Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 666

Preface

______________
2
______________
3
Configuration options
______________
4
Installation
______________
5
Wiring and Assembling
______________
Commissioning and
6
Diagnostics
______________
General technical
7
specifications
______________
8
Interface modules
______________
9
Terminal modules
______________
10
Power modules
______________
11
Digital Electronic Modules
______________
12
Analog electronic modules
______________
13
4 IQ-SENSE
______________
14
RESERVE modules
______________
A
Order numbers
______________
B
Dimension drawings
______________
Address space of the inputs
C
and outputs
______________
D
Response Times
______________
Determining the Leakage
Resistance of an ET 200S
E
______________
Station
Product overview

SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET200S

Brief Instructions on
Commissioning ET 200S

SIMATIC
Distributed I/O System ET 200S
Operating Instructions

The following supplement is part of this documentation:


No.

Designation

Drawing number

Edition

1
2

Product information
Product information

A5E00352937-02
A5E00583609-01

01/2005
07/2005

Edition 07/2005

EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Special Measures for


Interference-Free Operation

F
______________

Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.

Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90437 NRNBERG
GERMANY

Order No.: EWA-4NEB 780602402-14


Edition 09/2005

Copyright Siemens AG 2005.


Technical data subject to change

Preface
Purpose of the manual
The information in this manual enables you to operate the distributed I/O system ET 200S on
the PROFIBUS DP as DP-Slave:
As a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP
As a PROFINET IO device on PROFINET

Required level of knowledge


Knowledge of the field of automation engineering is required to understand the manual.

Scope of the manual


This manual applies to the components of the ET 200S distributed I/O system specified in
the appendix.
The manual contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manual
was published. We reserve the right to enclose a Product Information bulletin containing
up-to-date information regarding new components and new versions of components.

Changes since the previous version


The following changes/additions have been made since the previous version of the manual:
Function enhancement for interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Function enhancement for interface module IM151-3 PN

Approvals
See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

CE certification
See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Labeling for Australia (C-tick mark)


See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

iii

Preface

Standards
See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Position in the information landscape


The following table shows an overview of the contents of the handbooks for the ET 200S:
Manual

Contents

ET 200S Distributed I/O System

Installing and wiring of ET 200S


Commissioning and diagnostics of ET 200S
Technical specifications of IM151-1, digital, and analog
electronic modules
Order numbers for ET 200S

ET 200S Motor Starters

Installing and wiring of motor starters


Commissioning and diagnostics of motor starters
Technical specifications of motor starters
Fail-safe motor starters
Safety-integrated SIGUARD system
Order numbers for motor starters

PROFINET System Description

Basic principles of PROFINET


Network components and structures
Data exchange and communication
PROFINET engineering

From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO

Differences
Blocks
System status lists
Diagnostics

Fail-Safe Motor Starters


Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System

ET 200S IM151-7 CPU Interface Module and Instruction List

Addressing of IM151-7 CPU


ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU in the PROFIBUS network
Commissioning and diagnostics of IM151-7 CPU
Technical specifications of the IM151-7 CPU

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions

Installation
Commissioning
Open- and closed-loop control techniques
Protection and monitoring functions
Technical specifications

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual

Parameter list
Function diagrams
Alarm and fault messages

Positioning ET 200S

1STEP 5V/204kHz
1POS INC/Digital
1POS SSI/Digital
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog

Technological functions ET 200S

1COUNT 24V/100kHz
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
1SSI
2PULSE

iv

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Preface
Manual

Contents

Serial Interface Module ET 200S

1SI 3964/ASCII
1SI MODBUS/USS

Fail-safe modules

4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe


4 F-DO DC24/2A PROFIsafe

SIWAREX CS

Measurement of weight and power values

The manuals are available on the Internet in the languages German, English, French, Spanish and Italian
(see Service & Support on the Internet).

Guide
You can quickly access specific information in the manual by using the following aids:
At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the
figures and tables that appear in the manual.
An overview of the contents of each section is indicated on the left of each page
throughout the manual.
Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used
in the manual are defined.
At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index enabling rapid access to the
information you are looking for.

Special note
In addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master or PROFINET IO
controller you are using (see appendix).

Note
This manual contains a detailed listing of the contents of the ET 200S manuals (reference in
"See also"). We recommend that you begin by orienting yourself to the manuals (and
portions thereof) that are most relevant to solving your task.

Recycling and disposal


Due to the fact that it is low in contaminants, the ET 200S is recyclable. Contact a certified
electronic-waste disposal company to recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an
environment-friendly manner.

SIMATIC Technical Support, Contact Persons and Training


You will find information on this in the product information on the intranet at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/19293011

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Preface

See also
Module order numbers (Page A-1)
Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module (Page A-9)
Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts (Page A-8)
Order numbers for ET 200S network components (Page A-7)
Order numbers for ET 200S accessories (Page A-6)
Standards, certifications, and approvals (Page 7-1)
Order numbers for manuals (Page A-9)

vi

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... iii
1

Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 1-1


1.1

What are distributed I/O systems?............................................................................................. 1-1

1.2

What is PROFINET IO? ............................................................................................................. 1-3

1.3

What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? ............................................................................ 1-4

1.4

Guide to the ET 200S manuals................................................................................................ 1-10

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S ........................................................................................ 2-1


2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7

Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................ 2-1


Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Example: Installing ET 200S...................................................................................................... 2-3
Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S ............................................................................... 2-4
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................... 2-5
Example: Creating a user program............................................................................................ 2-6
Example: Switching on ET 200S................................................................................................ 2-6
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................... 2-7

2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7

Commissioning on PROFINET IO ........................................................................................... 2-10


Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2-10
Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S .................................................................................. 2-12
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................. 2-13
Example: Assigning device names for the IO device............................................................... 2-14
Example: Creating a user program.......................................................................................... 2-14
Example: Switching on ET 200S.............................................................................................. 2-15
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................. 2-16

Configuration options.............................................................................................................................. 3-1


3.1

Precisely Modular System ......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2

ET 200S Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 3-3

3.3

Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential.......................................... 3-4

3.4

Configuration options for the interface modules ........................................................................ 3-6

3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5

Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules ......................... 3-9
Electronic modules and applications ......................................................................................... 3-9
Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module .................................................... 3-14
Configuration example: Terminal modules for power modules ............................................... 3-16
Identifying the proper terminal module for an electronic module............................................. 3-19
Configuration example: Terminal modules for electronic modules.......................................... 3-20

3.6

Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................ 3-23

3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3

Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................... 3-25


Cycle Synchronization on the PROFIBUS DP - Basics ........................................................... 3-25
Parameterizing Cycle Synchronization .................................................................................... 3-26
Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP .......................................... 3-29

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

vii

Table of contents

viii

3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.7

Option handling on PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................... 3-30


Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP ............................................................ 3-30
Principle of operation of option handling.................................................................................. 3-30
Requirements for option handling ............................................................................................ 3-32
Example: Use of RESERVE modules...................................................................................... 3-33
Assigning parameters for option handling................................................................................ 3-34
Controlling and monitoring options .......................................................................................... 3-35
Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37

3.9

Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-38

3.10

Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system ............................................................................. 3-41

3.11

Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration.......... 3-43

Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1


4.1

Basic principles of installation .................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2

Mounting the interface module................................................................................................... 4-4

4.3

Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules ....................................................................... 4-6

4.4

Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module................................................................... 4-9

4.5

Mounting the terminating module............................................................................................. 4-11

4.6

Mounting the shield connection ............................................................................................... 4-13

4.7

Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates .............................................................. 4-15

4.8

Setting the PROFIBUS address............................................................................................... 4-17

Wiring and Assembling ........................................................................................................................... 5-1


5.1

General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S ......................................................... 5-1

5.2

Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply ........................................................... 5-3

5.3

Electrical configuration of the ET 200S...................................................................................... 5-6

5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10

Wiring the ET 200S .................................................................................................................... 5-7


Wiring rules for ET 200S ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Wiring a terminal module with screw terminals.......................................................................... 5-7
Wiring a terminal module with spring terminals ......................................................................... 5-8
Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect............................................................................... 5-9
Wiring terminal modules........................................................................................................... 5-12
Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted power module .................................... 5-15
Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted electronic module .............................. 5-16
Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
interface modules..................................................................................................................... 5-17
Wiring IM151-3 PN interface module ....................................................................................... 5-19
Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module ............................................................ 5-20

5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2

Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25


Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25
Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28

5.6

Assigning a device name for the IO device.............................................................................. 5-30

Commissioning and Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 6-1


6.1

Safety tests prior to commissioning ........................................................................................... 6-1

6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2

Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP.................................................................. 6-1


Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP...................................... 6-1
Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................... 6-3

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table of contents
6.2.2.1
6.2.2.2
6.2.2.3
6.2.2.4
6.2.2.5
6.2.2.6
6.2.3
6.2.3.1
6.2.3.2
6.2.4
6.2.4.1
6.2.4.2
6.2.4.3
6.2.4.4
6.2.4.5
6.2.4.6
6.2.4.7
6.2.4.8
6.2.4.9
6.2.4.10

Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ............................................................. 6-3


Grouping modules for configuration........................................................................................... 6-4
Grouping of digital input modules .............................................................................................. 6-6
Grouping of digital output modules ............................................................................................ 6-7
Grouping of motor starters ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Example of a project design....................................................................................................... 6-8
Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.................................................... 6-10
Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP........................................................................... 6-10
Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................. 6-11
Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-13
LED displays on the interface module ..................................................................................... 6-13
LED displays on the power module ......................................................................................... 6-15
LED displays on digital electronic modules ............................................................................. 6-16
LED displays on analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 6-17
LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module ............................................... 6-18
LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module ................................................. 6-19
LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module........................................................................... 6-20
LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module ...................................................... 6-21
LED displays on the 2PULSE electronic module..................................................................... 6-22
LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and
1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules ..................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.4.11 LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module.............. 6-25
6.2.4.12 LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module .............................................................. 6-26
6.2.5
Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-27
6.2.6
Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S ............................................................................................ 6-27
6.2.7
Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.7.2 Structure of the slave diagnostics ............................................................................................ 6-32
6.2.7.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................. 6-34
6.2.7.4 Master PROFIBUS address..................................................................................................... 6-35
6.2.7.5 Manufacturer ID ....................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.2.7.6 Identifier-related diagnostics .................................................................................................... 6-36
6.2.7.7 Module status........................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.2.7.8 Channel-specific diagnostics ................................................................................................... 6-40
6.2.7.9 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................. 6-49
6.2.7.10 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................. 6-57

6.3
6.3.1
6.3.1.1
6.3.1.2
6.3.1.3
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.7.1
6.3.7.2
6.3.7.3
6.3.7.4
6.3.7.5
6.3.7.6

Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO ................................................................. 6-59


Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS IO .................................................................................. 6-59
Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFINET IO....................................... 6-59
Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ........................................................... 6-59
Combine modules for the configuration ................................................................................... 6-60
Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO ..................................................... 6-61
Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-63
Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-65
Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 6-66
Differences in the replacement value behavior........................................................................ 6-67
Diagnostics with STEP 7.......................................................................................................... 6-68
Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-68
Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................. 6-68
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO .................................................. 6-72
Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus ............................................................................. 6-72
Failure of the load voltage of the power module...................................................................... 6-75
STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device .................................................................... 6-75

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

ix

Table of contents
7

General technical specifications ............................................................................................................. 7-1


7.1

Standards, certifications, and approvals .................................................................................... 7-1

7.2

Electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................................... 7-6

7.3

Transport and storage conditions .............................................................................................. 7-8

7.4

Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions.................................................................... 7-8

7.5

Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated
voltage of the ET 200S............................................................................................................. 7-11

7.6

Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12

Interface modules ................................................................................................................................... 8-1


8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2

8.1.3

Parameters for interface modules.............................................................................................. 8-1


Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1
Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3

8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.11
8.2.12
8.2.13
8.2.14
8.2.15

Parameter description for the interface modules ....................................................................... 8-4


DP interrupt mode ...................................................................................................................... 8-4
Bus length .................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration ............................................................................. 8-4
Option handling, general ............................................................................................................ 8-5
Option handling: slots 2 to 63..................................................................................................... 8-5
Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................... 8-5
Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................... 8-6
Insert/remove-module interrupt.................................................................................................. 8-6
Analog-value format ................................................................................................................... 8-6
Interference frequency suppression........................................................................................... 8-6
Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7
Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7
Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle ......................................................................................... 8-7
Time Ti (read in process values)................................................................................................ 8-7
Time To (output process values) ............................................................................................... 8-8

8.3

IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)...................................................... 8-9

8.4

IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0) ........................................... 8-12

8.5

IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0) ..................................... 8-16

8.6

Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0).................................... 8-20

8.7
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4

Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0).......................................................... 8-24


Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module ......................................................................... 8-24
SNMP ....................................................................................................................................... 8-28
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN ........................................................................ 8-28
Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN................................................................................ 8-30

Terminal modules ................................................................................................................................... 9-1


9.1

Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules ............................ 9-1

9.2

TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-4

9.3

TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-6

9.4

TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0) ............................................................................................................ 9-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table of contents

10

11

9.5

TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0) .................. 9-10

9.6

TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00) ......................... 9-13

9.7

TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-15

9.8

TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-18

9.9

TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-20

9.10

TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-22

9.11

TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0) .................. 9-24

9.12

TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0) .................. 9-27

9.13

TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0) .................. 9-29

Power modules..................................................................................................................................... 10-1


10.1

Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1

10.2

PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) .......................................................... 10-2

10.3

PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)..................................................... 10-5

10.4

PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) ............................... 10-8

Digital Electronic Modules .................................................................................................................... 11-1


11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3

Parameters for digital electronic modules................................................................................ 11-1


Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-1
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR .................................................................................................... 11-3
Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4

11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5

Parameter description for the digital electronic modules......................................................... 11-5


Hardware interrupt ................................................................................................................... 11-5
Input delay................................................................................................................................ 11-5
Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge .............................................................................. 11-5
Pulse stretching........................................................................................................................ 11-5
Chatter monitoring ................................................................................................................... 11-7

11.3

2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). ....................................... 11-9

11.4

4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)...................................... 11-13

11.5

4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) ............................. 11-17

11.6

2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)...................... 11-21

11.7

4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) ..................... 11-25

11.8

4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) ................ 11-29

11.9

4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)........................................... 11-33

11.10

2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-41

11.11

2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-45

11.12

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)................. 11-49

11.13

4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) ................ 11-54

11.14

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) .......... 11-59

11.15

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0).................... 11-64

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

xi

Table of contents

12

11.16

4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0).................... 11-69

11.17

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0).............. 11-74

11.18

Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)............................... 11-79

11.19

2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-84

11.20

2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-90

Analog electronic modules.................................................................................................................... 12-1


12.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3

Analog value representation .................................................................................................... 12-1


Overview .................................................................................................................................. 12-1
Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 .................................... 12-2
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage,
current, and resistance-type sensors....................................................................................... 12-4
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for resistance
thermometer............................................................................................................................. 12-6
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for thermocouples..... 12-9
Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage
and current ............................................................................................................................. 12-12

12.2.4
12.2.5
12.2.6
12.3
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3

Fundamentals of analog value processing ............................................................................ 12-13


Connecting measuring sensors ............................................................................................. 12-13
Connecting thermocouples .................................................................................................... 12-18
Connecting unused channels of analog input modules ......................................................... 12-23

12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4

Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems................... 12-24
Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values ............. 12-24
Effect of the value range for the analog input ........................................................................ 12-25
Effect of the value range for the analog output ...................................................................... 12-25
Use of the shield connection .................................................................................................. 12-26

12.5
12.5.1

12.5.7

Parameters for analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 12-26


Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST,
4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST ................................................................................... 12-26
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF........................ 12-27
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed,
and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed................................................................................................. 12-28
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST,
and 2AI TC HF ....................................................................................................................... 12-29
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST,
2AO I HF ................................................................................................................................ 12-34
Parameter description for the analog electronic modules...................................................... 12-35

12.6

2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) ..................................... 12-37

12.7

2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) ............................... 12-41

12.8

2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)................................. 12-46

12.9

2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0).......................... 12-50

12.10

Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0) ................................... 12-54

12.11

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) ..................... 12-57

12.12

2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0).......................... 12-61

12.13

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) ................ 12-65

12.5.2
12.5.3
12.5.4
12.5.5
12.5.6

xii

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table of contents

13

14

12.14

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) ..................... 12-69

12.15

2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)................................. 12-73

12.16

2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) ......................... 12-77

12.17

2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) ................................... 12-85

12.18

2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) ............................ 12-91

12.19

2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) ................................... 12-95

12.20

2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0) ............................. 12-99

12.21

2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0) .................................. 12-102

12.22

2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)............................ 12-106

4 IQ-SENSE ......................................................................................................................................... 13-1


13.1

Features of 4 IQ-SENSE.......................................................................................................... 13-1

13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.2.5
13.2.6
13.2.7

Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3


Overview .................................................................................................................................. 13-3
Group diagnostics parameter................................................................................................... 13-4
Synchronization group parameter............................................................................................ 13-4
Sensor type parameter ............................................................................................................ 13-6
Switching hysteresis parameter ............................................................................................... 13-7
Time functions and time value parameters.............................................................................. 13-8
Teach-in disable parameter ..................................................................................................... 13-8

13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3

Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................................................. 13-9


Fundamentals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................ 13-9
Standard................................................................................................................................. 13-10
Enhanced ............................................................................................................................... 13-11

13.4

Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 13-15

RESERVE modules .............................................................................................................................. 14-1


14.1

RESERVE modules ................................................................................................................. 14-1

Order numbers .......................................................................................................................................A-1


A.1

Module order numbers............................................................................................................... A-1

A.2

Order numbers for ET 200S accessories .................................................................................. A-6

A.3

Order numbers for ET 200S network components .................................................................... A-7

A.4

Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts ................................................................................... A-8

A.5

Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module................................ A-9

A.6

Order numbers for manuals ....................................................................................................... A-9

Dimension drawings ...............................................................................................................................B-1


B.1

Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat dissipation ............................................... B-1

B.2

Interface modules ...................................................................................................................... B-2

B.3

Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted ............... B-3

B.4

Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted...................................... B-7

B.5

Terminating module ................................................................................................................. B-10

B.6

Shield connection..................................................................................................................... B-10

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

xiii

Table of contents
C

Address space of the inputs and outputs ................................................................................................C-1


C.1

Address space of the inputs and outputs...................................................................................C-1

Response Times.....................................................................................................................................D-1
D.1

Overview ....................................................................................................................................D-1

D.2

Response times at the DP master .............................................................................................D-1

D.3

Response times for the ET 200S ...............................................................................................D-2

D.4

Response times for the digital input modules ............................................................................D-6

D.5

Response times for the digital output modules ..........................................................................D-7

D.6

Response times for analog input modules.................................................................................D-7

D.7

Response times for analog output modules...............................................................................D-8

D.8

Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................D-10

D.9

Response times for technological modules .............................................................................D-10

D.10

Response times of PROFINET IO ...........................................................................................D-10

Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S Station .................................................................E-1

Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation ................................................................................. F-1


Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1

Tables
Table 1-1

ET 200S components................................................................................................................. 1-6

Table 1-2

Features and benefits of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 1-9

Table 2-1

Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP................................................................ 2-5

Table 2-2

Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO ................................................................ 2-13

Table 3-1

Configuration examples for ET 200S ......................................................................................... 3-1

Table 3-2

Power supply of the ET 200S..................................................................................................... 3-3

Table 3-3

Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited ............................................. 3-6

Table 3-4

Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable ........................................ 3-9

Table 3-5

TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable .......................... 3-11

Table 3-6

TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable..................... 3-12

Table 3-7

Terminal modules for power modules...................................................................................... 3-16

Table 3-8

Terminal modules for electronic modules ................................................................................ 3-20

Table 3-9

Control interface....................................................................................................................... 3-36

Table 3-10

Feedback interface................................................................................................................... 3-36

Table 3-11

Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37

Table 3-12

Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S ............................................................................................. 3-38

Table 3-13

Basic structure of data records with identification data............................................................ 3-39

Table 3-14

Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-39

xiv

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table of contents
Table 3-15

Parameter length in bytes ........................................................................................................ 3-44

Table 3-16

Maximum configuration per voltage group............................................................................... 3-45

Table 4-1

Mounting dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4-2

Table 5-1

Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28

Table 6-1

Configuration table and address space ..................................................................................... 6-9

Table 6-2

Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP ................................................ 6-10

Table 6-3

Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO
STANDARD/ IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .................................................................................. 6-14

Table 6-4

Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP ............................ 6-30

Table 6-5

Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ....................................................................................... 6-34

Table 6-6

Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1) ....................................................................................... 6-35

Table 6-7

Structure of station status 3 (Byte 2) ....................................................................................... 6-35

Table 6-8

Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5) .......................................................................... 6-36

Table 6-9

Power module error types........................................................................................................ 6-42

Table 6-10

Digital electronic module error types ....................................................................................... 6-42

Table 6-11

Analog input module error types .............................................................................................. 6-44

Table 6-12

Analog output module error types............................................................................................ 6-45

Table 6-13

1SSI error types ....................................................................................................................... 6-45

Table 6-14

1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types ........................................................................................... 6-46

Table 6-15

1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types ............................................................................................. 6-46

Table 6-16

1STEP 5V/204kHz error types................................................................................................. 6-46

Table 6-17

2PULSE error types ................................................................................................................. 6-47

Table 6-18

1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types ....... 6-47

Table 6-19

1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types ........................................................................ 6-48

Table 6-20

4 IQ-SENSE error types........................................................................................................... 6-48

Table 6-21

Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO ................................................. 6-61

Table 6-22

Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN................................................................................. 6-64

Table 6-23

Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7................................................................................ 6-68

Table 7-1

Use in industrial environment..................................................................................................... 7-5

Table 7-2

Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12

Table 8-1

Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1

Table 8-2

Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and


IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2

Table 8-3

Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3

Table 8-4

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module.................................................. 8-9

Table 8-5

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module....................................... 8-13

Table 8-6

Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD................................. 8-17

Table 8-7

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module................................ 8-21

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

xv

Table of contents
Table 8-8

Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module...................................................... 8-26

Table 8-9

Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards ................................................................................ 8-29

Table 9-1

Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules ..................................................... 9-1

Table 9-2

Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules................................................ 9-2

Table 9-3

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1


terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-4

Table 9-4

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0


terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-6

Table 9-5

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01


terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-8

Table 9-6

Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module................ 9-11

Table 9-7

Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module ............................................... 9-13

Table 9-8

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1


terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules.............................................. 9-16

Table 9-9

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1


terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-18

Table 9-10

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01


terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-20

Table 9-11

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01


terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-22

Table 9-12

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module ............... 9-25

Table 9-13

Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module................. 9-27

Table 9-14

Terminal assignment of the terminal module ........................................................................... 9-30

Table 10-1

Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1

Table 10-2

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 10-2

Table 10-3

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module ................................................. 10-6

Table 10-4

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module ........................... 10-9

Table 11-1

Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-2

Table 11-2

Parameters for 4DI NAMUR..................................................................................................... 11-3

Table 11-3

Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4

Table 11-4

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard.................................................................. 11-9

Table 11-5

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard................................................................ 11-13

Table 11-6

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard ....................................................... 11-17

Table 11-7

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-21

Table 11-8

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-25

Table 11-9

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature .................................................... 11-29

Table 11-10

Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 ............................ 11-33

Table 11-11

Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6 .............. 11-34

Table 11-12

Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k


(mechanical normally open contact) ...................................................................................... 11-34

xvi

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table of contents
Table 11-13

Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k


(mechanical changeover contact).......................................................................................... 11-35

Table 11-14

Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open


contact with single contact).................................................................................................... 11-35

Table 11-15

Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover


contact) .................................................................................................................................. 11-36

Table 11-16

Diagnosis for changeover contacts........................................................................................ 11-40

Table 11-17

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-41

Table 11-18

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-45

Table 11-19

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-49

Table 11-20

Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-54

Table 11-21

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature .............................................. 11-59

Table 11-22

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-64

Table 11-23

Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-69

Table 11-24

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature ................................................. 11-74

Table 11-25

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC ...................................................................... 11-79

Table 11-26

Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of


Version 2)............................................................................................................................... 11-85

Table 11-27

Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts ............................................................ 11-89

Table 11-28

Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A......................... 11-90

Table 11-29

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts ..................................................................... 11-94

Table 12-1

Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled .......... 12-2

Table 12-2

Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) ................................................................. 12-2

Table 12-3

Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) .................................. 12-3

Table 12-4

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 80 mV, 2.5 V, 5 V, and 10 V ............................ 12-4

Table 12-5

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA .............................. 12-4

Table 12-6

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range 20 mA ...................................................................... 12-5

Table 12-7

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 , 300 , 600 , 3000 .................................. 12-5

Table 12-8

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F......... 12-6

Table 12-9

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F........... 12-6

Table 12-10

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F......... 12-7

Table 12-11

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F........... 12-7

Table 12-12

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in C und F.................................... 12-8

Table 12-13

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in C und F...................................... 12-8

Table 12-14

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in C and F.................................................... 12-9

Table 12-15

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in C and F ................................................... 12-9

Table 12-16

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in C and F.................................................. 12-10

Table 12-17

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in C and F .................................................. 12-10

Table 12-18

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in C and F.................................................. 12-10

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

xvii

Table of contents
Table 12-19

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in C and F .................................................. 12-11

Table 12-20

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in C and F.................................................. 12-11

Table 12-21

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in C and F ............................................. 12-11

Table 12-22

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in C and F .................................................. 12-12

Table 12-23

SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 5 V; 10 V; 20 mA ................................................. 12-12

Table 12-24

SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA ........................................................ 12-13

Table 12-25

Compensation of the reference junction temperature............................................................ 12-18

Table 12-26

Reference junction parameters.............................................................................................. 12-21

Table 12-27

How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC
(CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L +.............................................................. 12-24

Table 12-28

Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value
in the value range................................................................................................................... 12-25

Table 12-29

Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output
value in the value range ......................................................................................................... 12-25

Table 12-30

Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard.............................................................. 12-26

Table 12-31

Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature................................................ 12-27

Table 12-32

Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed ......................................................... 12-28

Table 12-33

Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC..................................................................... 12-29

Table 12-34

Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31

Table 12-35

Parameters for analog output modules U, I ........................................................................... 12-34

Table 12-36

Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard .......................................................................... 12-38

Table 12-37

Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature.................................................................... 12-42

Table 12-38

Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed...................................................................... 12-46

Table 12-39

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-50

Table 12-40

Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST ......................................................................... 12-54

Table 12-41

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-57

Table 12-42

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-62

Table 12-43

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature...................................................... 12-65

Table 12-44

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-70

Table 12-45

Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard ..................................................................... 12-74

Table 12-46

Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature............................................................... 12-78

Table 12-47

Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard........................................................................ 12-86

Table 12-48

Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature.................................................................. 12-91

Table 12-49

Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard ........................................................................ 12-96

Table 12-50

Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature .................................................................. 12-99

Table 12-51

Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard........................................................................ 12-103

Table 12-52

Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature ................................................................. 12-107

Table 13-1

Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3

Table 13-2

Diffuse sensor .......................................................................................................................... 13-6

xviii

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table of contents
Table 13-3

Reflex sensor ........................................................................................................................... 13-6

Table 13-4

Standard feedback interface .................................................................................................. 13-10

Table 13-5

Enhanced feedback interface ................................................................................................ 13-11

Table 13-6

Enhanced control interface .................................................................................................... 13-12

Table 13-7

Terminal assignment of the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................. 13-15

Table A-1

Interface module order numbers................................................................................................ A-1

Table A-2

Terminal module order numbers................................................................................................ A-2

Table A-3

Power module order numbers.................................................................................................... A-3

Table A-4

Digital electronic module order numbers ................................................................................... A-3

Table A-5

Analog electronic module order numbers .................................................................................. A-4

Table A-6

Process-related module order numbers .................................................................................... A-5

Table A-7

Reserve module order numbers ................................................................................................ A-5

Table A-8

ET 200S accessories order numbers ........................................................................................ A-6

Table A-9

Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers ........................................ A-7

Table A-10

Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers.......................................... A-8

Table A-11

Fuse for digital input module and power module ....................................................................... A-8

Table A-12

Connecting cable for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................... A-9

Table A-13

ET 200S documentation packages or manuals ......................................................................... A-9

Table A-14

STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-10

Table A-15

STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-11

Table A-16

Technical Guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC S7 ............................................................. A-11

Table C-1

Address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S........................................................ C-1

Table C-2

PII feedback interface and PIQ control interface .......................................................................C-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

xix

Table of contents

xx

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Product overview
1.1

1.1

What are distributed I/O systems?

Distributed I/O System Range of Application


When a system is set up, it is common for the inputs to and outputs from the process to be
incorporated centrally in the automation system.
If the inputs/outputs are located at greater distances from the automation system, the wiring
can become very extensive and complex, and electromagnetic interferences can impair
reliability.
Distributed I/O systems are suited for these types of installations:
The controller CPU is located centrally.
The I/O systems (inputs and outputs) operate decentrally on-site.
The powerful PROFIBUS DP with its high data transmission rates ensures smooth
communication between the controller CPU and the I/O systems.

What is PROFIBUS DP?


PROFIBUS DP is an open bus system based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the
"DP" transmission protocol (DP stands for distributed peripherals).
Physically, PROFIBUS DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded two-wire line
or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable.
The "DP" transmission protocol enables a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between the
controller CPU and the distributed I/O systems.

What is a DP master and what are DP slaves?


The DP master links the controller CPU with the distributed I/O systems. The DP master
exchanges data with the distributed I/O systems via PROFIBUS DP and monitors the
PROFIBUS DP.
The distributed I/O systems (= DP slaves) prepare the sensor and actuator data on-site so
that they can be transmitted to the controller CPU via PROFIBUS DP.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

1-1

Product overview
1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?

Which devices can be connected to PROFIBUS DP?


An extremely wide range of devices can be connected on the PROFIBUS DP as a DP
master or as DP slaves, provided their behavior complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1
CP 3/1. The devices that can be used include the following:
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC S7/M7/C7
SIMATIC programming device or PC
SIMATIC HMI (operator panel (OP), operator station (OS), and text display (TD) operator
control and monitoring devices)
Devices from other manufacturers

Structure of a PROFIBUS DP network


The figure below illustrates a typical PROFIBUS DP network structure. The DP masters are
integrated in the relevant device. For example, the S7-400 has a PROFIBUS DP interface
and the IM 308-C master interface module is inserted in an S5-115U. The DP slaves are the
distributed I/O systems, which are connected to the DP masters by means of
PROFIBUS DP.

6

68
ZLWK,0&

3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&

'3PDVWHU

352),%86'3
'3VODYHV

(7;

(76

Figure 1-1

1-2

(7/

'ULYH

(70

6

(7%

'3$6,/,1.

68'3

2326

2WKHUILHOGGHYLFHV

Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Product overview
1.2 What is PROFINET IO?

1.2

1.2

What is PROFINET IO?

Definition
PROFINET IO is the open transmission system with realtime functionality defined in
accordance with the PROFINET standard. The standard defines a vendor-neutral
communication, automation, and engineering model.
An industrial-grade connection system is available for cabling of PROFINET components.
PROFINET departs from the hierarchical master-slave principle of PROFIBUS. A
provider-consumer principle is used instead. During configuration, the user specifies
which modules of an IO device are subscribed to by an IO controller.
The quantity frameworks are extended in accordance with the options available on
PROFINET IO. Parameter limits are not exceeded during configuration.
The transmission rate is 100 Mbits/s.
The user view during configuration is largely the same as that on the PROFIBUS DP
(STEP 7 HW Config is used for configuration).

Structure of a PROFINET IO network


The figure below illustrates a typical PROFINET IO network structure. PROFIBUS slaves, if
present, can be integrated by means of an IE/PB link.

,2FRQWUROOHU
6

6ZLWFK

,2GHYLFH
(76

6ZLWFK

,2GHYLFH
(76

6ZLWFK

23

6ZLWFK

3URJUDPPLQJ
GHYLFH

6ZLWFK

,(3%
OLQN
352),%86'3

Figure 1-2

PD[P

352),1(7,2
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 

Typical structure of a PROFINET IO network

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

1-3

Product overview
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?

1.3

1.3

What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?

Definition
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is a discretely modular, highly flexible DP slave with
IP 20 degree of protection.

Area of application
You can insert practically any number of I/O modules in practically any combination directly
next to the interface module that transfers the data to the DP master. This means you can
adjust the configuration to suit your on-site requirements.
Independent from the interface module, an ET 200S can consist of up to 63 modules such as
power modules, peripheral modules and motor starters.
The ability to integrate motor starters (switching and protecting of any three-phase load up to
7.5 kW) ensures that the ET 200S can be adapted quickly to suit almost any process-related
use of your machine.
The fail-safe modules of the ET 200S enable you to read in and output data in a fail-safe
manner up to Safety Category 4 (EN 954-1).

Terminal modules and electronic modules


The ET 200S distributed I/O system is connected as follows:
To PROFIBUS DP by means of a cable connector for PROFIBUS DP at the IM151-1
interface module
To PROFINET IO by means of a cable connector for PROFINET IO at the IM151-3 PN
interface module
Every ET 200S peripheral system is a
A DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP
An IO device on the PROFINET IO

1-4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Product overview
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?

View
The figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S.
1

10

ET 200S IM151-1 interface module

PM-E power module for electronic modules

Electronic modules

Power module for PM-D motor starters

Direct starter

Reversing starter

Terminating module

Power bus

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules

TM-P terminal modules for power modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

1-5

Product overview
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?

ET 200S components
The following table provides an overview of the most important components of the ET 200S:
Table 1-1

ET 200S components

Component

...is the mounting rail for the ET


200S. You install the ET 200S on the
mounting rail.

Interface module
IM151-1 BASIC
IM151-1 STANDARD
IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE

...connects the ET 200S to the DP


master and prepares the data for the
assembled electronic modules and
motor starters.

IM151-1 FO
STANDARD

Interface module
IM151-3 PN

1-6

Function

Mounting rail

Image

With RS 485 interface:

With fiber-optic cable interface:

... ...connects the ET 200S to the


PROFINET IO controllers and
prepares the data for the assembled
electronic modules and motor
starters.

with PROFINET interface:

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Product overview
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
Component
Terminal module

Function

Image

...carries the wiring and


accommodates the power and
electronic modules. Terminal
modules are available in the following
variants:
For power modules
For electronic modules
With screw terminal
With spring terminal
With Fast Connect (quick
connection method, no stripping
required)

Power module

...monitors the voltage for all


electronic modules in the voltage
group. The following power modules
are available:
For a 24 VDC infeed with
diagnostics
For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC infeed
with diagnostics
For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC, 24 VAC
to 230 VAC infeed with
diagnostics and fuse

Electronic module

...is inserted onto the terminal module


and determines the function:
Digital input modules with 24
VDC, 120/230 VAC, and NAMUR
Digital output modules with 24
VDC and 120/230 VAC
Relay modules
Analog input modules with
voltage, current, and resistance
measurement; thermoresistor;
and thermocouples
Analog output modules for voltage
and current
Technology modules
Fail-safe modules
RESERVE

Terminating module

...terminates the ET 200S and can be


used as a mount for 6 reserve fuses
(5 mm x 20 mm).

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

1-7

Product overview
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
Function

Image

Slot number labels

...are used for identifying the slots on


the terminal module.

Color coding labels

...enable customer- and


country-specific coding of the
terminals on the terminal module

PROFIBUS cable with


bus connector

... connects nodes of a


PROFIBUS DP configuration to each
other.

63

...for machine labeling or printing


80 strips per labeling sheet

62

Labeling sheet (DIN A4,


perforated, film)

...is used for connecting cable


shields.

Component
Shield connection

Fiber optic duplex cable


... connects nodes of a
with simplex plug (in the
PROFIBUS DP configuration to each
plug adaptor for
other.
IM151-1 FO STANDARD)
PROFINET connector
according to the
specifications in the

... connects nodes of a PROFINET IO


configuration to each other.

PROFINET Installation
Guide and the Industrial

Ethernet FC installation
instructions

1-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Product overview
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?

Features and benefits of ET 200S


The table below presents the features and benefits of ET 200S.
Table 1-2

Features and benefits of ET 200S


Features

Benefits
Structure
Function-oriented, cost-optimized station
design
Significant reduction in effort for configuration
and documentation
Space savings due to the ability to string
modules together in any order

Discretely modular design


1/2/4-channel electronic modules
Power modules
Integrated motor starters

Extensive range of electronic modules

Broad area of application

Communication capable, system-integrated


motor starter: Direct and oscillating starter up to
7.5 kW

PLC inputs and outputs, terminal blocks, circuit


breakers, and contactors in a plug-in module
save space and the effort involved in wiring

Permanent wiring due to the separation of


mechanical and electronic components

Prewiring possible
Module replacement during operation of the
ET 200S ("hot swapping")

Individual connection of power modules to


common potential

Individual formation of voltage groups


(identifiable by color coding of the TM-P
terminal modules for power modules)
Simple load interruption

Robust design for harsh industrial conditions (5 g


vibration resistance)

High operational reliability when mounted directly


on the machine, high availability

Connection system
Integrated voltage buses

Reduced effort required for wiring

Power bus up to 50 A for motor starters

Minimization of wiring in 400 V range

Screw terminals, spring terminals, and Fast


Connect

A change in terminal connection method is not


necessary

2- and 3-conductor connection or


2-, 3- and 4-conductor connection

Optimal selection on grounds of space and cost


Connection method with no stripping required
Time savings during wiring

Fast Connect

Replaceable terminal box in the terminal module

No need to remove the terminal module in the


event of terminal damage

Automatic coding of the I/O modules

Quick and reliable module replacement

Large label

Adequate space for clear identification

High data transfer rate of up to 12 Mbits/s on the


PROFIBUS DP and 100 Mbit/s on the
PROFINET IO

Short reaction times

Integrated safety functions

Savings on time-consuming safety engineering

For motor starters up to safety category


4 according to EN 954-1
Fail-safe modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

For detecting and outputting fail-safe signals via


PROFIBUS (PROFIsafe) up to Safety Category 4
(EN 954-1)

1-9

Product overview
1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals

1.4

1.4

Guide to the ET 200S manuals

Required manuals for various configurations


The components of ET 200S are described in various manuals. These manuals are part of
various documentation packages. The table below shows possible configuration variants of
the ET 200S and the manuals in the documentation packages that are required for each
variant.
You will need the information contained in the
following manuals:

$2

$,

'2

Distributed I/O System ET 200S


30(

,0

ET 200S consists of the following components:

38/6(

3RV,QF$QDORJ

66,

'2

30(

,0

ET 200S Distributed I/O System

Technological Functions ET 200S

3RV,QF'LJLWDO

'2

30(

,0

ET 200S Distributed I/O System


Positioning ET 200S

0RGEXV866

$,

'2

30(

ET 200S Serial Interface Module

$2

$,

'2

ET 200S Distributed I/O System


30(

,0
&38

,0

ET 200S Distributed I/O System

IM151-7 CPU Interface Module

1-10

$2

$,

'2

30(

,0
31

ET 200S Distributed I/O System


+

PROFINET System documentation

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Product overview
1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals

PM-D

2AO

2DO

PM-E

IM151-1

ET 200S consists of the following components:

DS

DS

You will need the information contained in the


following manuals:

ET 200S Distributed I/O System


+

ET 200S Motor Starters


Fail-Safe Motor Starters
Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System

ET 200S Distributed I/O System

)'2

)',

30(

'2

'2

30(

,0

ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe


Modules

30')352),VDIH

)'2

)',

30(

,0

ET 200S Distributed I/O System


)'6H[

)'6H[

ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe


Modules
+

ET 200S Motor Starters


Fail-Safe Motor Starters
Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter


operating instructions
+

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter


list manual
ET 200S Distributed I/O System
+

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter


operating instructions
+

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter


list manual
1

ICU24F for fail-safe frequency converter

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

1-11

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1

2.1.1

2.1

Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Introduction

Introduction
Using the following simple examples, you will learn how to place the ET 200S into operation
on the PROFIBUS DP step by step:
ET 200S assembling and wiring up
Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager
Creating a user program
Switching on ET 200S
Evaluating diagnostic messages:
Removing and inserting of modules
Switching off the load voltage on the power module
Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module

Requirements
You have assembled an S7 station consisting of a power supply component and a DP
master (e. g. CPU 315-2 DP). A CPU 315-2 DP was used as a DP master for this
example. Every other DP master (Norm IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) is naturally also
usable.
STEP 7 (starting V5.0 with ServicePack 3) is completely installed on you PG. You have
STEP 7 knowledge.
The programming device must be connected at the DP master.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-1

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Required components
The following graphic shows you which ET 200S components you require for the example on
the PROFIBUS DP:


30

',

',

',

',



6ORW

30 '2 '2 '2 '2

,0
5DLO
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH

[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'&
+LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
,067$1'$5'LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH
352),%86EXVFRQQHFWRU

Figure 2-1

Components for the example on PROFIBUS DP

Order numbers for example configuration on the PROFIBUS DP


Quantity

2-2

Ordering data

Order number

Standard profile rails 35 mm (e. g. length 483 mm)

6ES5 710-8MA11

IM151-1 STANDARD interface module and terminating module, 1 unit

6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0

Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-P15N23-A1, 1 piece

6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0

Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-E15N24-A1, 5 pieces

6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0

PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit

6ES7138-4CA01-0AB0

2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0

2DO DC24V/0,5A HF, 5 pieces

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0

Bus connector

6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

2.1.2

Example: Installing ET 200S

Procedure
1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a
stationary base.
2. Install the various modules on the rail beginning on the left (hook on, swing in, move to
the left). Adhere to the following sequence:
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module
TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module
TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module
Terminating module
3. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module.
Set PROFIBUS Address 3:
2)) 21









*)

Intended for future enhancements. Switch must be in OFF position.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-3

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

2.1.3

Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S

Procedure
1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:

$8;















$



$










$8;


/ 0









































24 VDC electronic power supply

24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1

24 VDC load supply voltage group 2

1. Use the PROFIBUS bus connector to connect the DP master with the ET 200S. The
PROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module.
2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.
3. Switch on the power supply for the DP master.
4. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master.
CPU 315-2 DP:
DC 5 V lights up
SF DP off
BUSF flashes

2-4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

2.1.4

Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager

Procedure
1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with a DP master
(e.g., CPU315-2 DP). Create OB1 and OB82 for the project.
2. Create the PROFIBUS subnet.
3. Connect the PROFIBUS subnet with the DP master in HW Config.
4. Take the ET 200S from the hardware catalog and put it on the PROFIBUS.
5. Set PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S.
6. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration
table.
7. Select the electronic modules in the configuration table, and click the "Pack addresses"
button.
Table 2-1

Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP

Module/
DP identifier

Order number

I address

Q address

Comment

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

Power module

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Byte 0.2 and 0.3

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Byte 0.4 and 0.5

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Bits 0.6 and 0.7

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

Power module

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 0.2 and 0.3

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 0.4 and 0.5

10

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Bits 0.6 and 0.7

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

1. Set the following parameters:


In the DP slave properties dialog box for ET 200S:
Enable startup for set- <> actual configuration: enable
In the DP slave properties dialog box for the PM-E 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 1
(in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress
In the DP slave properties dialog box for 2 DO 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 7
(in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Wire failure A0
2. Save the configuration.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-5

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

2.1.5

Example: Creating a user program

Procedure
1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1.
Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output:
STL
A I 0.0

If input byte 0.0 and

A M 2.0

memory bit 2.0 are set, then

S Q 0.0

set output byte 0.0

Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:


STL
L PIB 0

Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator


(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)

T PQB 0

Transfer the accumulator content to


I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)

1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.


2. Download the configuration to the DP master.

2.1.6

Example: Switching on ET 200S

Procedure
1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S.
CPU 315-2 DP:
DC 5 V: lights up
SF DP: off
BUSF: off
ET 200S:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up

2-6

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

2.1.7

Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages

Introduction
In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S. In
the event of an error, OB82 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB82.
Tip: Call SFC13 in OB82, and evaluate the diagnostic frame.

Removing and inserting the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module
1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module
during operation.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: lights up a diagnostic message is pending.
BF: off
ON: lights up
Result: The ET 200S continues to run error-free.
3. Evaluate the diagnostic message:
Result:
Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set external diagnostic
Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.1 is set Slot 2
Module status: Byte 19.2/19.3: 11B no module
4. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.
Result:
Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
The diagnostic message is deleted.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-7

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Switching off load voltage on the power module


1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1).
2. Observe the status LEDs.
IM 151 STANDARD interface module:
SF: lights up
Power module:
PWR: off No load voltage available on the power module
SF: lights up a diagnostic message is pending.
I/O modules in the voltage group:
LEDs: light up
3. Evaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set external diagnostics
Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.0 is set Slot 1
Channel-specific diagnostics:
Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000000B Slot 1
Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 10001B sensor or load voltage missing
4. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the power module:
PWR: on
SF: off
Status LEDs on the I/O modules:
LEDs: off
The diagnostic message is deleted.

2-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring


1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic
module (slot 7)
2. Observe the status LEDs:
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: lights up
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
SF: lights up a diagnostic message is pending
1: off output is not activated
3. Evaluate the diagnostic message:
Result:
Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set external diagnostics
Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.6 is set Slot 7
Channel-specific diagnostics:
Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000110B Slot 7
Byte 36.0 to 35.5: 000000B Channel 0
Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 00110B Wire break
4. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics:
Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
SF: off
1: off/on
The diagnostic message is deleted.

See also
Reading out the diagnostics (Page 6-29)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-9

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO

2.2

2.2.1

2.2

Commissioning on PROFINET IO

Introduction

Introduction
The following simple example teaches you step-by-step how to commission the ET 200S on
PROFINET IO:
Installing and wiring of ET 200S
Configuring with STEP 7 using the GSD file
Transferring device names to the IO device
Integrating into the user program
Switching on the ET 200S
Evaluating the interrupts and diagnostics:
Removing and inserting of modules
Switching off the load voltage on the power module
Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module

Requirements
You have set up an S7 station consisting of a power supply module and an IO controller
(e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). A CPU 317-2 PN/DP was used as the IO controller in this
example.
STEP 7 (V5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher) is fully installed on your programming device
(PG). You are familiar with STEP 7.
The PG is connected to the PROFINET IO.

2-10

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO

Required components
The figure below illustrates the ET 200S components needed for the example on
PROFINET IO:

,0
31



30

',

',

',

', 30 '2 '2 '2 '2

6ORW

5DLO
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH

[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'&
+LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
,031LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)&LQVWDOODWLRQFDEOHZLWK352),1(7FRQQHFWRU

Figure 2-2

Components for the example on PROFINET IO

Order numbers for the example configuration on PROFINET IO


Quantity

Ordering data

Order number

Standard mounting rail, 35 mm (e.g., length of 483 mm)

6ES5 710-8MA11

IM151-3 PN interface module and terminating module, 1 unit

6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (e. g. 64k)

6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0

TM-P15N23-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 1 unit

6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0

TM-E15N24-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 5 units

6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0

PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0

2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0

2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 5 pieces

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0

PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET


Installation Guide)
Appropriate installation cables:
FC Standard Cable
FC Trailing Cable
FC Marine Cable

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6XV1 840-2AH10
6XV1 840-3AH10
6XV1 840-4AH10

2-11

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO

2.2.2

Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S

Installing the mounting rail


1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a
stationary base.
2. Start from the left with the installation of the individual modules on the profile rail (hook in
- swivel in - slide to left). Adhere to the following sequence:
IM151-3 PN interface module
TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module
TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module
Terminating module

Wiring and assembling ET 200S


1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:

$8;

2-12

$8;

























































$



$










/ 0

24 VDC electronic power supply

24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1

24 VDC voltage group 2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
1. Use the PROFINET connector to connect the ET 200S (IO device) to the IO controller via
a switch. The PROFINET interface is located on the IM 151-3 PN interface module.
2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.
3. Switch on the power supply for the IO controller.
4. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller.
CPU 317-2 PN/DP:
DC 5 V lights up
SF off
BF2 flashes

2.2.3

Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager

Procedure
1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with an IO controller
(e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). Create OB1, OB82, and OB83 for the project.
2. Open the "Properties - Ethernet Interfaces" window in the HW config and apply a subnet
e. g. Ethernet(1).
3. Take the IM151-3 PN from the ET 200S catalog of the hardware catalog and insert it on
Ethernet(1):PROFINET IO System (100).
4. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration
table.
Table 2-2
Module

Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO


Order number

I address

Q address

Comment

6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 IM151-3 PN

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Byte 1.0 and 1.1

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Byte 2.0 and 2.1

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 1.0 and 1.1

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 2.0 and 2.1

10

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 3.0 and 3.1

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Power module

Byte 3.0 and 3.1


Power module

2-13

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
1. Set the following parameters:
In the IO device properties dialog for the PM-E 24 VDC,
Module 1 (in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress
In the IO device properties dialog for the 2 DO 24 VDC,
Module 7 (in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Wire failure A0
2. Compile and save the configuration.

2.2.4

Example: Assigning device names for the IO device

Procedure
1. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.
2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module.
3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name
for the IO device there.
4. An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is required for
transferring the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module.
The device name is transferred to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign
Device Name." To do so, activate the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name"
window. The device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interface
module IM151-3 PN.
Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.

2.2.5

Example: Creating a user program

Procedure
1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1.
Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output:
STL

2-14

A I 0.0

If input byte 0.0 and

A M 2.0

memory bit 2.0 are set, then

S Q 0.0

set output byte 0.0

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:
STL
L PIB 0

Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator


(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)

T PQB 0

Transfer the accumulator content to


I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)

1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.


2. Download the configuration to the IO controller.

2.2.6

Example: Switching on ET 200S

Procedure
1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller, ET 200S, and switch.
CPU 317-2 PN/DP:
DC 5 V: lights up
SF: off
BF2: off
LINK: lights up
ET 200S:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
LINK: lights up
Switch:
LINK: lights up
100MB: lights up

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-15

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO

2.2.7

Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages

Introduction
In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S.
In the event of an error, OB83 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB83.
Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 83 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.

Procedure
1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module
(e.g., from slot 2) during operation.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-3 PN interface module:
SF: lights up diagnostic message present.
BF: off
ON: lights up
Result: The ET 200S continues to run without fault.
3. In the event of a remove interrupt, OB83 is started. Start SFB 52 in OB83. Evaluate the
E002H diagnostic data record.
Byte

Contents

Meaning

Header information
0 and 1

8104H

Data record with discrepancies between the preset and actual


configurations

2 and 3

0014H

20 bytes follow

4 and 5

0100H

Version 1.0

6 and 7

0001H

0001H if the preset configuration deviates from the actual


configuration

IO device header information


8 and 9

0000H

steady

10 and 11

0000H

steady

12 and 13

0001H

Number of slots in which there is a discrepancy between the preset


configuration and the actual configuration

Configuration data of slots

2-16

14 and 15

0002H

Slot number of the slot with a discrepancy between the preset and
actual configurations

16 to 19

XXXXXXXXH

20 and 21

0000H

Identification of the inserted module


No module inserted

22 and 23

0000H

Number of submodule slots with a discrepancy between the preset


and actual configurations. Because the content is 0000H, no
additional submodule data follow.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
1. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.
Result:
Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
Once the module is inserted, diagnostic data record E002H no longer indicates a
discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations for any slot.

Switching off load voltage on the power module


1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1).
2. Observe the status LEDs.
IM 151-3 PN interface module:
SF: lights up
Power module:
PWR: off Load voltage on power module not present
SF: lights up diagnostic message present.
I/O modules in the voltage group:
LEDs: light up
3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH.
Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 81 or OB82 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.
Byte

Contents

Meaning

Header information
0 and 1

0010H

Data record with channel diagnostics

2 and 3

0012H

18 bytes follow

4 and 5

0100H

Version 1.0

Channel diagnostic data


6 and 7

0001H

Slot 1

8 and 9

0001H

Submodule slot 1

10 and 11

8000H

12

08H

Incoming fault

13

00H

Reserved

14 and 15

8000H

Error on submodule

Submodule diagnostic is pending

Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault


16 and 17

0000H

18

08H

Arriving fault

Channel 0

19

01H

Data type: 1 Bit

20 and 21

0011H

Sensor or load voltage missing

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-17

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
1. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the power module:
PWR: on
SF: off
Status LEDs on the I/O modules:
LEDs: off
The diagnostic is deleted.

Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring


1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic
module (slot 7)
2. Observe the status LEDs:
IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: lights up
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
SF: lights up diagnostic message present.
1: 1: off output is not activated
3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH:
Byte

Contents

Meaning

Header information
0 and 1

0010H

Data record with channel diagnostics

2 and 3

0012H

18 bytes follow

4 and 5

0100H

Version 1.0

Channel diagnostic data


6 and 7

0007H

Slot 7

8 and 9

0001H

Submodule slot 1

10 and 11

8000H

12

08H

Incoming fault

13

00H

Reserved

14 and 15

8000H

Error on submodule

Submodule diagnostic is pending

Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault

2-18

16 and 17

0000H

18

48H

Incoming fault at an output

Channel 0

19

01H

Data type: 1 Bit

20 and 21

0006H

Wire break

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
1. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics:
Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
SF: off
1: off/on
The diagnostic is deleted.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2-19

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S


2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO

2-20

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.1

3.1

Precisely Modular System

Principle
In describing the ET 200S as a discretely modular system, we mean you can adapt the
ET 200S configuration to meet the exact requirements of your application.
The table below shows you a number of examples of ET 200S distributed I/O system
configurations:
Configuration examples for ET 200S

','&967

','&967

$2867

$,57'67

&28179N+]

6ORW

&RPSOHWLRQ

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

Structure

,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

Example
ET 200S with
Digital electronic modules
Analog electronic modules
Technology modules

66,

Table 3-1

66,

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-1

Configuration options
3.1 Precisely Modular System

'6

'6

0
a

0
a

6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ


30'SRZHUPRGXOH

Structure

,QWHUIDFH
PRGXOH

Example
ET 200S with motor starters


'6

6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ


'6

','&967

','&967

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

30'SRZHUPRGXOH

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

','&967

ET 200S with
Electronic modules
Motor starters

','&967

a

a

0
a

3-2

0
a

 

0DQGDWRU\

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.2 ET 200S Power Supply

3.2

3.2

ET 200S Power Supply

Overview
Power is supplied to the ET 200S:
With 24 VDC at the interface module (see table below).
Power supply of the ET 200S

6ORW

&RPSOHWLRQ

66,

&RXQW9N+]

$,57'

$28

,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

24 VDC
at the interface module

','&9

Configuration (example)

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

Power supply

','&9

Table 3-2

66,
'&9

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-3

Configuration options
3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

3.3

3.3

Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

Placing and Connecting to Common Potential


With ET 200S, you can choose where to position the power modules. Each TM-P terminal
module (for a power module) that you install in the ET 200S opens a new voltage group. All
sensor and load supplies of the downstream electronic modules/motor starters are fed from
this TM-P terminal module (for a power module). If you place an additional TM-P terminal
module after an electronic module/motor starter, you interrupt the voltage buses (P1/P2) and
simultaneously open a new voltage group. This enables sensor and load supplies to be
individually connected to common potential.

AUX(iliary) Rail (AUX 1)


A TM-P terminal module (for a power module) enables you to connect an additional potential
(up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module), which you can apply by means of the
AUX(iliary) bus. You can set the AUX(iliary) bus individually:
As a protective conductor bar
For additionally required voltage

Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

(0

(0

(0

(0

(0

(0

(0

(0

(0






3-4



Voltage group 1

Supply voltage 2

Voltage group 2

Supply voltage 1

Voltage group 3

Additionally required voltage

Termination

Protective conductor

Power module

P1/P2 power buses

Interface module

AUX bus

Supply voltage 3

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

Warning
If you connect the AUX1 bus to common potential independently of the P1/P2 buses
(different voltages), there is no safe electrical separation between the AUX1 bus and the
P1/P2 buses.

Connecting different potentials to the AUX1 bus


Note
If you apply different potentials to the AUX1 bus within an ET 200S station, you must
separate the voltage groups by means of a power module with the TM-P15S23-A0 terminal
module.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-5

Configuration options
3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules

3.4

3.4

Configuration options for the interface modules

Which Interface Module Matches Your Application:


Table 3-3

Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited
Applications

Interface module

Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485


Transfer rates:
IM151-1 BASIC
interface
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500
kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s
Operation as a DPV0 slave
Direct data exchange
ET 200S Power Supply Bus Length: not relevant
Number of modules: max. 12
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485
interface
Operation as a DPV0 slave
Direct data exchange
ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be
parameterized)
Number of modules: max. 63
Option handling and status byte for power
modules

Transfer rates:
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.,75; 187.5;
500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s

IM151-1 STANDARD

In addition, for 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher:


Operation as a DPV1 slave
Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record)
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
Identification data

Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via fiber-optic


cable
Operation as a DPV0 slave
Direct data exchange
ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be
parameterized)
Number of modules: max. 63
Option handling and status byte for power
modules

Transfer rates:
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500
kBaud, 1.5 ; 12 Mbit/s

In addition, for 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher:


Operation as a DPV1 slave
Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record)
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
Identification data

3-6

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules

Applications
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485
interface
Direct data exchange
Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication
via PROFIBUS DP
Use of fail-safe modules
Clocking as of 1.5 Mbps
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP using HW
Config
Operation as a DPV0 slave
Noncyclical data traffic (dataset read/write):
Class 2 services (e.g. firmware update)
Operation as a DPV1 slave
Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record)
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
Number of modules: max. 63

Interface module
Transfer rates:
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500
kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s

after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 additional:


ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be
parameterized)
Identification Data
Option handling and status byte for power
module
Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication
for fault-secure modules
Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y-switching

Connection of the PROFINET IO via RJ45


connector
Operation as an IO device
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m
Number of modules: max. 63
Status byte for power modules

Transfer rate:
100 Mbit/s
Autosensing

IM151-3 PN

after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 additional:


Summary of modules within a byte (packing)
Slot granular replacement value behavior
Data sets for I/O devices

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-7

Configuration options
3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules

Rules for setting up a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD


For fiber-optic cable networks containing nodes with integrated fiber-optic cable interfaces,
note the following:
The fiber-optic cable network can only be set up as a line segment.
If you remove the fiber-optic cable from an integrated fiber-optic cable interface, or the
supply voltage to the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module fails, all the downstream
nodes are no longer accessible.

Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD


The figure below presents an example of how to set up a fiber-optic cable network with the
ET 200S and the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module.
1

S7-400H automation system with IM 467 FO as the DP master

ET 200S Distributed I/O with IM151-1 FO STANDARD

Fiber-optic duplex cable

Rules for setup of a PROFINET network


You can find information about setting up and starting up PROFINET in the PROFINET
system documentation.

3-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

3.5

3.5.1

3.5

Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic


modules

Electronic modules and applications

Use of electronic modules


Table 3-4

Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable
Applications

Evaluating switches, proximity


switches (BEROs), sensors, and
encoders

24 VDC

Electronic module
2DI 24 VDC Standard
2DI 24 VDC High Feature
4DI 24 VDC Standard
4DI 24 VDC High Feature
4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

UC 24 to 48V

4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature

Evaluating NAMUR sensors


Evaluating wired, unwired
mechanical sensors

4 input channels

4DI NAMUR

Evaluating switches, proximity


switches (BEROs), sensors, and
encoders

120 VAC

2DI 120 VAC Standard

230 VAC

2DI 230 VAC Standard

Switching solenoid valves, DC and


AC contactors, indicator lights,
actuators

24 VDC up to 0.5 A

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature


4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
24 VDC up to 2 A

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard


2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

120/230 VAC up to 1 A

2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 A

Up to 120 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A

2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A 24 to 230


VAC/5 A

Up to 48 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A

2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230


VAC/5 A

Measuring voltages

10 V/ 5 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AI U Standard

Measuring voltages with high


resolution

10 V/ 5 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AI U High Feature

Time-critical measuring of voltages

10V/ 5V/ 2.5V/ 1 to 5V

2AI U High Speed

Measuring currents with two-wire


measuring transducers

4 to 20 mA

2AI I 2WIRE Standard

Time-critical measuring of currents


with two-wire measuring
transducers

4 to 20 mA

Measuring currents with four-wire


measuring transducers

20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA

4AI I 2WIRE Standard


2AI I 2WIRE High Speed

0 to 20 mA

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2AI I 4WIRE Standard

3-9

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Applications

Electronic module

Measuring currents with two-wire,


four-wire measuring transducers
and high resolution

20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature

Time-critical measuring of currents


with four-wire measuring
transducers

4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
20 mA

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

Measuring temperatures with


thermoresistors and resistors
Measuring reference junction
temperatures in thermocouple
applications

Pt100/ Ni100 150 /300 /600

2AI RTD Standard

Measuring temperatures with


thermoresistors and resistors
Measuring reference junction
temperatures in thermocouple
applications
High degree of accuracy
Temperature coefficient can be
assigned

Pt100/ Ni100/ Pt 200/ Ni 120/ Pt


500/ Ni 500/ Pt 1000/ Ni 1000 150
/ 300 / 600 / PTC

2AI RTD High Feature

Measuring temperatures with


thermocouples and voltages

Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T
80 mV

2AI TC Standard

Measuring temperatures with


thermocouples and voltages
Internal reference junction in
connection with TM-E15S24-AT

Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T/C
80 mV

2AI TC High Feature

Outputting of voltages

10 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AO U Standard

Outputting of voltages with high


resolution

10 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AO U High Feature

Outputting of currents

20 mA/ 4 to 20 V

2AO I Standard

Outputting of currents with high


resolution

20 mA/ 4 to 20 V

2AO I High Feature

Photoelectric proximity switch

Reflex sensor and diffuse sensor


with IQ-SENSE

4 IQ-SENSE

Counting of pulses, measurement


of frequency, rotational speed, or
period duration by means of
incremental encoders

24 V signals up to 100 kHz

1COUNT 24V/100kHz

5 V signals up to 500 kHz

1COUNT 5V/500kHz

Detecting and evaluating of paths


with absolute encoders (SSI)
Simple positioning tasks

Absolute encoder: 13 Bit/ 21 Bit/ 25 1SSI


Bit

Control of stepper motor power


sections
Positioning of stepper motors

5 V pulses up to 204 kHz

1STEP 5V/204kHz

Outputting of pulses in 4 different


operating modes

Minimum pulse duration of 200 s

2PULSE

Controlled positioning, incremental


encoder 5 V differential signals

Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS INC/Digital


outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid
traverse/creep speed

Drive triggered via analog output


10V

3-10

1POS INC/Analog

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Applications

Controlled positioning, SSI encoder

Electronic module

Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS SSI/Digital


outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid
traverse/creep speed
Drive triggered via analog output
10V

1POS SSI/Analog

RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 serial
data transmission

ASCII and 3964(R) protocol

1SI 3964/ASCII

Protocol mode and USS

1SI Modbus/USS

Reservation of a slot for any


electronic module

Width 15 mm

RESERVE

Width 30 mm

Use of electronic modules on terminal modules


You can combine the terminal modules in the ET 200S configuration.
Table 3-5

TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable

Power modules

TM-P terminal modules for power modules

Screw terminal

15S23-A1

15S23-A0

15S22-01

30S44-A0

F30S47-F0

Order number
6ES7-193

...4CC20-0AA0

...4CD20-0AA0

...4CE00-0AA0

...4CK20-0AA0

3RK1
903-3AA00

Spring terminal

15C23-A1

15C23-A0

15C22-01

30C44-A0

Order number
6ES7-193

...4CC30-0AA0

...4CD30-0AA0

...4CE10-0AA0

...4CK30-0AA0

---

---

---

Fast Connect

15N23-A1

15N23-A0

15N22-01

Order number
6ES7-193

...4CC70-0AA0

...4CD70-0AA0

...4CE60-0AA0

PM-E 24 VDC

PM E 24-48 VDC

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/
24 to 230 VAC

PM-E F pm 24 VDC
PROFIsafe*

PM-E F pp 24 VDC
PROFIsafe*

PM-D F 24 VDC
PROFISafe

* see manual ET 200S Fault-Secure Modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-11

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Table 3-6

TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable

Electronic modules

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules

Screw terminal

15S26-A1

15S24-A1

15S24-01

15S23-01

15S24-AT

30S44-01

30S46-A1

Order number
6ES7193

...4CA400AA0

...4CA200AA0

...4CB200AA0

...4CB000AA0

...4CL200AA0

...4CG200AA0

...4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1

Order number
6ES7193

...4CA500AA0

...4CA300AA0

...4CB300AA0

...4CB100AA0

...4CL300AA0

...4CG300AA0

...4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---

Order number
6ES7193

...4CA800AA0

...4CA700AA0

...4CB700AA0

...4CB600AA0

4DI UC24..48V HF

4DI NAMUR

2DI 120 VAC Standard

2DI 230 VAC Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard

2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A

2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5


A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A

2DI 24 VDC Standard


2DI 24 VDC High Feature
4DI 24 VDC Standard
4DI 24 VDC High Feature
4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High


Feature
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High
Feature
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

2RO NO/NC 24 to 48
VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5
A
2AI U Standard
2AI U High Feature
2AI U High Speed
2AI I 2WIRE Standard
2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
4AI I 2WIRE Standard

2AI I 2/4WIRE High


Feature

2AI I 4WIRE Standard

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed


2AI RTD Standard

3-12

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Electronic modules

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules

Screw terminal

15S26-A1

15S24-A1

15S24-01

15S23-01

15S24-AT

30S44-01

30S46-A1

Order number
6ES7193

...4CA400AA0

...4CA200AA0

...4CB200AA0

...4CB000AA0

...4CL200AA0

...4CG200AA0

...4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1

Order number
6ES7193

...4CA500AA0

...4CA300AA0

...4CB300AA0

...4CB100AA0

...4CL300AA0

...4CG300AA0

...4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---

Order number
6ES7193

...4CA800AA0

...4CA700AA0

...4CB700AA0

...4CB600AA0

2AI RTD High Feature

2AI TC Standard

2AI TC High Feature


2AO U Standard

2AO U High Feature


2AO I Standard

2AO I High Feature


4 IQ-SENSE

1COUNT 24V/100kHz

1COUNT 5V/500kHz

1SSI

1STEP 5V/204kHz

2PULSE

1POS INC/Digital

1POS SSI/Digital

1POS INC/Analog

1POS SSI/Analog

1SI 3964/ASCII

1SI Modbus/USS

4/8 F-DI 24 VDC


PROFIsafe*

4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A
PROFIsafe*

RESERVE
(width 15 mm)

RESERVE
(width 30 mm)

* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-13

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

3.5.2

Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module

Applicability of power modules


The table below indicates which power modules you can use with the various electronic
modules:
Power modules

Electronic modules

PM-E 24 VDC

Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC
Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC

Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC
Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/ 24 to
230 VAC

Can be used with all electronic modules.

PM-E F pm 24 VDC
PROFIsafe

For the fail-safe modules.

PM-E F pp 24 VDC
PROFIsafe

See ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules manual

PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe

3-14

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

Procedure
Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module for your application:

'R\RX
QHHGDFFHVVDWWKLV
WHUPLQDOPRGXOHWRWKH$8;
EXVE\PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOV IRU
H[DPSOHIRUSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUVRU
DGGLWLRQDOVXSSO\RISRWHQWLDOXSWR
WKHPD[LPXPORDGYROWDJHRIWKH
PRGXOH "

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036
[WHUPLQDOV
1R

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&
[WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
7031
[WHUPLQDOV

<HV

'R\RX
ZDQWWRLQWHUUXSWWKH
$8;EXVZLWKWKLVWHUPLQDO
PRGXOHDQGWKXVRSHQDQHZSRWHQWLDO
JURXS"

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036$
[WHUPLQDOV
1R

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&$
[WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
7031$
[WHUPLQDOV

<HV
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036$
[WHUPLQDOV
'R\RX
ZDQWWRXVHIDLOVDIH
PRGXOHVLQWKLVQHZSRWHQWLDO
JURXS"

1R

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&$
[WHUPLQDOV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
7031$
[WHUPLQDOV

<HV

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036$
[DQG[WHUPLQDOV
<HV

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&$
[DQG[WHUPLQDOV
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
703)6)
[WHUPLQDOV

Figure 3-1

Selecting terminal modules for power modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-15

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

3.5.3

Configuration example: Terminal modules for power modules

Introduction
The table below indicates options for using terminal modules for power modules:
Table 3-7

Terminal modules for power modules

Terminal module

Configuration

TM-P15S22-01
3RWHQWLDOJURXS

TM-P15C22-01

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

TM-P15N22-01

30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$8;

TM-P15S23-A1
TM-P15C23-A1

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

TM-P15N23-A1

30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$


$


$


$


$FFHVVE\
PHDQVRI
WHUPLQDOVWR$8;

3-16

$8;
3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Terminal module
TM-P15S23-A0

Configuration

TM-P15C23-A0

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

TM-P15N23-A0

30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$


$


$


$


$8;
$FFHVVE\
PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOV
WR$8;

2SHQQHZSRWHQWLDOJURXSE\PHDQVRI$8;

TM-P30S44-A0
3RWHQWLDOJURXS

TM-P30C44-A0

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

30

(0

 

 

$


$
 

30

(0

 

 

$


$
 

$8;
$FFHVVE\PHDQV
RIWHUPLQDOVWR
$8;

2SHQQHZSRWHQWLDOJURXSE\PHDQVRI$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-17

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Terminal module
TM-PF30S47-F1

Configuration
3RWHQWLDOJURXS

30

(0

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

30

%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

(0

























$8;

3-18

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

3.5.4

Identifying the proper terminal module for an electronic module

Procedure

'R\RXQHHG
DWHUPLQDOPRGXOHWKDWLV
VXLWDEOHIRUDOOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHV
ZLGWKPP DQGWKDWSURYLGHVDFFHVVWR
WKH$8;EXVYLDWHUPLQDOV"

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$ [WHUPLQDOV
<HV

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&$ [WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1$ [WHUPLQDOV

1R
'R\RXQHHG
DWHUPLQDOPRGXOHZLWKDFFHVVYLDWHUPLQDOV
WRWKH$8;EXV IRUH[DPSOHIRUSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUVRU
WKHXVHRIDGGLWLRQDOSRWHQWLDOXSWR
WKHPD[LPXPUDWHGORDGYROWDJH
RIWKHPRGXOH "

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$ [WHUPLQDOV
<HV

)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1$ [WHUPLQDOV

1R
'R\RXQHHG
WHUPLQDOVDQG
IXQFWLRQDOLW\RIDPRGXOH HJFRXQWHUPRGXOH
FRQQHFWLRQRIQRQUHTXLUHGVLJQDOOLQHVZLWKWKH
VDPHSRWHQWLDODV33 HJFRQQHFWLRQRI
QRQHTXLYDOHQWVHQVRUV "

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&$ [WHUPLQDOV

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6 [WHUPLQDOV
70(6 [WHUPLQDOV
<HV

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(& [WHUPLQDOV
70(& [WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1 [WHUPLQDOV

1R
'R\RX
QHHGDWHUPLQDOPRGXOH
ZLWKDQLQWHUQDOUHIHUHQFHMXQFWLRQ
IRUWHPSHUDWXUHFRPSHQVDWLRQ"

<HV

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$7 [WHUPLQDOV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&$7 [WHUPLQDOV

1R
'R\RX
QHHGDWHUPLQDOPRGXOH
IRUWKHIDLOVDIHPRGXOHV"

<HV

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(6$ [WHUPLQDOV

1R

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6 [WHUPLQDOV
1R

1RWIRUHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHVZLWKWHFKQRORJLFDOIXQFWLRQV

Figure 3-2

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$ [WHUPLQDOV

6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(& [WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1 [WHUPLQDOV

Selecting terminal modules for electronic modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-19

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

3.5.5

Configuration example: Terminal modules for electronic modules

Introduction
The table below indicates options for using terminal modules for electronic modules:
Table 3-8

Terminal modules for electronic modules

Terminal modules

Configuration

TM-E15S26-A1
TM-E15C26-A1

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

TM-E15N26-A1

%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0
















 
 

 
 







 
 

 
 

 
 

 
 





$

$


 
$

$


 


$

$


 
$

$


 

 

 

$8;

$FFHVVYLDWHUPLQDOVWR$8;

TM-E15S24-A1
TM-E15C24-A1

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

TM-E15N24-A1

30

(0 (0 (0 30

(0 (0 (0 (0 (0




























 

 

 

 

 

 

$


$ $
 

$ $
 

$


$


$ $
 

$ $
 

$ $
 

$ $
 

$


$8;
$FFHVVE\PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOVWR$8;

3-20

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Terminal modules

Configuration

TM-E15S24-01
TM-E15C24-01

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

TM-E15N24-01

30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0
















 
 

 
 







 
 

 
 

 
 

 
 




 

 

 

 

 

 

$8;

TM-E15S23-01
TM-E15C23-01

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

TM-E15N23-01

30

(0 (0 (0 30

(0 (0 (0 (0 (0
















 
 

 
 







 
 

 
 

 
 

 
 




$8;

TM-E15S24-AT
TM-E15C24-AT

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0













 


 
 




 


 
 

 
 

 
 




 

 

 

 

$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-21

Configuration options
3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
Terminal modules

Configuration

TM-E30S44-01
TM-E30C44-01

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

30

(0

(0 30

(0

(0




























 


 


 


 


 

 

 

 

$8;

TM-E30S46-A1
TM-E30C46-A1

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3

30

(0





$

$


(0









 

 
   
$ $ $
  
 
$$ $
  


3-22

3RWHQWLDOJURXS

30

(0


$

$


(0









  
 
   
$ $ $
  
 
$ $ $
  







$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.6 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP

3.6

3.6

Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP

Introduction
The ET 200S can be used as the sender (publisher) for direct data exchange
(data exchange broadcast). The DP master you are using must, of course, also support
direct data exchange. You will find information on this in the description of the DP master.

Principle
Direct data exchange (data exchange broadcast) is characterized by the fact that
PROFIBUS DP nodes "listen in" on which data a DP slave is returning to its DP master. This
mechanism enables the node that is "listening in" (receiver / subscriber) to directly access
changes to the input data of remote DP slaves.
During configuration in STEP 7, you use the respective I/O input addresses to specify the
address area of the receiver where the sender's data are to be placed.

Example: Direct data exchange with IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE


The figure below gives an example of the direct data exchange relationships you can
configure with an ET 200S as the sender and the nodes that can "listen in" as possible
receivers.
2

1
3

9
6
8
8

8
7

CPU 31x-2

DP slave

DP master system 1

CPU 31x-2 as DP slave

CPU 31x-2 as DP master 1

ET 200S

DP master system 2

PROFIBUS

CPU 31x-2 as DP master 2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-23

Configuration options
3.6 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP

Note
The IM 151-1 High Feature differentiates the Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication
via PROFIBUS DP for the fault-secure modules after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0. You can find
the description of this function in the manual S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and
Programming.

3-24

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP

3.7

3.7.1

3.7

Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP

Cycle Synchronization on the PROFIBUS DP - Basics

Features
Reproducible response times (i.e., of equal length) are achieved in SIMATIC with an
equidistant DP bus cycle, synchronization of the user program on the DP bus cycle, and the
isochronous transfer of I/O data to the I/O modules. The isochronous portions of the user
program are processed synchronously with the DP bus cycle by means of synchronous cycle
interrupts (OB61 to OB64). The I/O data are transferred at defined and constant
(isochronous) intervals via the backplane bus of the DP slave to the I/O modules and
switched through isochronously up to the "terminal."
In other words, isochronous operation results in the synchronization of all of the hitherto
free-running single cycles. These include the user program in the CPU, the DP cycle on the
PROFIBUS subnet, the cycle in the DP slave, and, finally, the cycle in the I/O modules of the
DP slaves.
The maximum jitter for the IM151-1 amounts to 10 s. The jitter of the periphery devices of
the ET 200S cannot be accounted for due to the existing diversity.

Requirements
The cycle synchronization is possible with the IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE with modules,
that support cycle synchronization. You can see whether a module supports cycle
synchronization in the device description or HW config. Other modules in the ET 200S
setup are possible. However, these do not support cycle synchronization.
The transmission rate of the PROFIBUS DP is at least 1.5 Mbps (shorter equidistance
times can be achieved with higher transmission rates).
The maximum equidistance cycle is 32 ms.
The equidistance master (Class 1) must be a class 1 DP master. In other words, a
programming device or PC cannot be an equidistance master.
In equidistant operation, only one DP master (Class 1) can be active on the
PROFIBUS DP. Programming devices or PCs (Class 2) can also be connected.
The cycle synchronization can only then be activated on the ET 200S if the equidistant
bus cycle on the DP master system was activated.
Isochronous operation (equidistance) of the ET 200S is not guaranteed during removal or
insertion of electronic modules.
If asynchronous results like "Switch on power module" or "Read/Write data set" are to
cause no cycle injury, a sufficiently large gap between To and Ti must be ensured, i.e.
Tdp is to be increased.
In equidistant operation, the ET 200S requires a startup time of approximately 150 DP
cycles to ensure isochronous operation right through to the terminals.
The bus length must amount to less than 1 m.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-25

Configuration options
3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP

Optimizing the equidistant time


The longest delays for the digital input/output modules (assignable in the case of inputs)
are the critical factor in determining the length of the equidistant DP cycle. Hint: Pay
attention to equal input delay of all digital modules in the ET 200S-Station for cycle
synchronization.
The shorter the input delays you set for the HIGH FEATURE digital input modules, the
shorter the equidistance times that can be achieved. Hint: For the digital input modules
HIGH FEATURE, set at least one input delay of 0.1 ms.
The processing time of the modules should be taken into account in the case of modules
that support isochronous operation.
The minimum equidistance time is dependent on the number of modules in the ET 200S.
Hint: Use at least 4-channel digital input modules HIGH FEATURE to reduce the number
of modules.
Lower equidistance times can be achieved if you distribute the modules of an ET 200S
(with a high module count) between two ET 200S stations.
The equidistance time is reduced if you increase the transmission rate.
Hint: Set the highest possible baud rate.

3.7.2

Parameterizing Cycle Synchronization

Procedure
1. CPU settings:
"Object properties" of the CPU > Register "Cycle synchronization alarms"
CPU - Set cycle synchronization alarm
Select the DP master system used
Select the desired subprocess image
Recommended delay time:
accept the standard settings of the default value.
Memory

Interrupts

General

Startup

Priority
OB 61:

25

Time Interrupts

Cyclic Interrupts

Clock-Synchr. Interrupts

Diagnostics / Clock Protection

Cycle / Clock Flag

DP MasterSystem No.

Subprocess Image(s)
(e.g.: 1.4)

Remanence

Time Delay
3.000

ms

Default

Figure 3-3

3-26

Dialog box cycle synchronization alarms

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP
2. DP master system settings:
DP master "Object properties" > "General" tab > "Properties" button > "Parameter" tab >
"Properties" button > "Network settings" tab > "Options" button
Activate equidistance on the DP master system
Set the length of the equidistance DP cycle (max. 32 ms)
Set "Times Ti and To for all DP slaves equal" (causes a synchronization of the I/O
data of the various DP slaves)
Times Ti and To can be set separately.
Recommendation: accept the standard settings Ti and To.
Equidistance

Network Station

Cables

Activate equidistant bus cycle


Recalculate

Optimize DP cycle (and poss. Ti, To):


Number of PGs/OPs/TDs etc. on PROFIBUS
Configured:

Total:

Graduation:
Equidistant DP cycle:

8.000

ms

0.125

ms

Details ...

(min = 6.000 ms; max. = 32.000 ms)


Synchronization of Slaves
Times Ti an To identical for all slaves (if not: setting in Properties - Slaves)
Graduation:
Time Ti (read in process values):
(min = 3.4375 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)

3.5000

ms

0.0625

ms

Graduation:
Time To (output process values):
(min = 0.8125 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)

Figure 3-4

3.5000

ms

0.0625

ms

Dialog box options

Note
The "recalculate" button enables you to recalculate a value for the equidistant DP cycle
from STEP 7 that takes the current PROFIBUS DP configuration into account. This value
is then automatically entered in the fields "Equidistant DP cycle", Time Ti (...)" and "Time
To (...)".

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-27

Configuration options
3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP
3. DP slave settings:
DP slave "Object properties" > "Cycle synchronization" tab
Activate "Synchronize DP slave to equidistant DP cycle".
Enter times Ti and To (if "Times Ti and To for all DP slave equal" was not set on the
DP master). Recommendation: Accept the standard settings for Ti and To.
Select the devices to be configured and assign in the "Addresses" tab the subprocess
image defined in the CPU.
3URSHUWLHV'3VODYH
*HQHUDO
LQIRUPDWLRQ

6ODYHSDUDPHWHUV

&ORFNLQJ

6\QFKURQL]H'3VODYHWRHTXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOH WKHVDPH7L7RIRUDOOVODYHV
7LPH7L UHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV 
PLQ PVPD[ PV



PV 7LPHEDVH

PV

7LPH7L UHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV 
PLQ PVPD[ PV



PV 7LPHEDVH

PV

(TXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOH
PLQ PVPD[ PV



PV

Figure 3-5

DP slave properties dialog box

Note
If you click on "Cycle synchronization" in the "Edit" menu, a configuration overview of the
cycle synchronized devices is displayed.

4. Create user program:


Creation of the OB 61.
At the start of the OB 61, the SFC 126 has to call up the inputs to update the
subprocess image.
At the end of the OB 61, the SFC 127 has to call up the outputs to update the
subprocess image.
The subprocess image to be used is the one in the CPU parameterized subprocess
image ("Cycle synchronization alarms" tab).

3-28

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP

3.7.3

Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics
Event

Cause

Action

Station failure of the ET 200S

Faulty isochronous operation


(10 or more clock failures or
clock violations).

Check the parameter


assignment.

The obtainable equidistance


times are too long.

The input delays of the HIGH


FEATURE digital input modules
are not optimally set.

Decrease the input delay of the


HIGH FEATURE digital input
modules.

No isochronous signal
detection/output

Wrong process image partition


used.

Check whether the same


process image partition was
used in the user program of
OB61 (or up to OB64) when
SFCs 126/127 are called and in
the configuration of the DP
master/DP slave.

Neg. RET_VAL in the case of


SFCs 126/127

Further information
You can find further information to the cycle synchronization in the STEP 7 Online Help and
in the manual Cycle synchronicity.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-29

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

3.8

3.8.1

3.8

Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP

Principle
Option handling enables you to set up the ET 200S for future expansions (options). Option
handling means that you install, wire, configure, and program the planned maximum
configuration of the ET 200S. The electronic modules required for this are merely replaced
with inexpensive RESERVE modules, which you can easily replace later with the planned
electronic modules.
This means that the ET 200S can be completely prewired ("master cabling") because the
RESERVE module is not connected to the terminals of the terminal module and therefore is
not connected to the process.
The RESERVE modules for future expansion at the right-hand end of the station are
optional. In this case, preparatory installation and wiring are possible but not required.

See also
Removing and inserting electronic modules (Page 5-28)

3.8.2

Principle of operation of option handling

Principle
With option handling, the configuration of slots 2 to 63 of the ET 200S is checked. If the
check is enabled for a slot, the RESERVE module (option) or a configured electronic module
can occupy this slot without a diagnostic being signaled. If the check is disabled, only the
configured electronic module can be located in this slot. Any other module will trigger a
diagnostic. You can also control the configuration of slots 2 to 63 and monitor the
configuration of slots 1 to 63 using the control and feedback interface in the process input
image (PII) and process output image (PIQ).

3-30

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
7KHVHWWLQJRIWKHSDUDPHWHU2SHUDWLRQDW3UHVHW!$FWXDO
FRQILJXUDWLRQLVQRWUHOHYDQWIRUWKHSURFHVVLOOXVWUDWHG

,VWKHFRQILJXUHG
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOHLQVHUWHG"

<HV

1RHUURU
%LWLQ3,,  

1R
%LWLQ3,, 

6ORW
HQDEOHG FRQILJXUDWLRQLQ
+:&21),* "

1R

3UHVHW!DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
'LDJQRVLVLVUHSRUWHG

<HV
6ORW
HQDEOHGLQ3,4
ELWLQ3,4  "

1R

<HV

,VWKH
5(6(59(PRGXOHLQVHUWHG
RULVWKHUHDQHPSW\VORWDWWKHULJKW
KDQGHQGRIWKH
(76VWDWLRQ"

1R

,QFRUUHFWPRGXOH
5HPRYHGPRGXOH

<HV
1RHUURU
1RGLDJQRVLV

Figure 3-6

3,, SURFHVVLQSXWLPDJH
3,4 SURFHVVRXWSXWLPDJH

Principle of operation of option handling

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-31

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

3.8.3

Requirements for option handling

Requirements
The following is required for option handling:
Interface module IM 151-1 STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0), IM 151-1 FO
STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0) or IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0).
For configuration, the GSD file (see table below)
DPV0 operation
SI02806A.GSx

DPV0/DPV1 operation

SI02806B.GSx

SI03806A.GSx

SI03806B.GSx

As of 07/2003 (V1.0 or higher)


6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0

DPV0/DPV1
operation
SI0280E0.GSx
after date 08/2005
(after V2.0)

6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0

6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0

6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0

6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0

Note
You do not require a GSD file for option handling in STEP 7 if you are using both of the
following:
IM 151-1 STANDARD / FO
after STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3 and
The current HW update for the interface and power modules. Link the HW Update in
the HW Config via the "Tools > install HW updates" menu command. You can
download the HW updates on the Internet at Customer Support.
IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
after STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3
You can find the options handling description in the STEP 7 Online Help.

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power module


One of these power modules must be included in the configuration at least once.
RESERVE modules as a substitute for the future electronic modules

Note
If the actual configuration of an ET 200S station does not match the preset configuration,
a diagnostic is signaled if the check for the relevant slots is not enabled for option
handling.

3-32

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

3.8.4

Example: Use of RESERVE modules

30('&9
','&9
','&9
$,8
30('&9
'2
'2
'2
'2
30('&9
',
',
',
'2
'2
'2
'2
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ

)XWXUHSODQQHG
PD[LPXP
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
RIWKH(7
6

,067$1'$5'

Configuration variants

VWYHUVLRQ
3UHSDUDWLRQ
XVLQJ
5(6(59(
PRGXOHVDQG
SUHZLULQJ

25

2SWLRQ

%DVLF
FRQILJ

2SWLRQ

30('&9
','&9
','&9
$,8
30('&9
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
30('&9
',
',
',
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ

,067$1'$5'

%DVLFFRQILJ

7KLVVHWXS
PXVWEH
FRQILJXUHG
+:&21),*
&20
352),%86

6HQVRUVDFWXDWRUV

<RXPXVWLQVWDOO
DQGZLUHWKLV
FRQILJXUDWLRQ

25

30('&9
','&9
','&9
$,8
30('&9
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
30('&9
',
',
',
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ

3UHSDUDWLRQ
XVLQJ
5(6(59(
PRGXOHVDQG
SUHZLULQJ7KH
5(6(59(
PRGXOHVDWWKH
ULJKWKDQGHQG
RIWKHVWDWLRQ
DUHQRWSUHVHQW

,067$1'$5'

QGYHUVLRQ

<RXPXVWLQVWDOO
DQGZLUHWKLV
FRQILJXUDWLRQ

6HQVRUVDFWXDWRUV

Figure 3-7

Example of the use of the RESERVE modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-33

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

3.8.5

Assigning parameters for option handling

Introduction
In STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS, you parameterize the desired electronic module that you
would like to use for future applications e.g. 4DI HF on the RESERVE module slots
(or the expansions on the right end of the station):
Drag the electronic module to the configuration table
Assign the parameters

Procedure
1. Drag a PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power module with one
of the following entries to the configuration table:
...O (option handling) or
...SO (status byte + option handling)

Note
Entry of the power module with the ending ...O or ...SO can only be made once in the
ET 200S configuration!

2. Assign parameters to the interface module as follows:


Interface module

Parameters

Setting

Description

IM 151-1
STANDARD

Option handling,
general

Enable

Option handling is enabled for the


entire ET 200S.

or

Option handling: Slot


2 to 63

Enable (all slots on


which RESERVE
modules can be
located)

There are RESERVE modules or


a configured electronic module on
the slot. A diagnostic is not
signaled.

IM 151-1 FO
STANDARD
or
IM 151-1 HIGH
FEATURE

Note
For the parameterization "Operation for set < > actual installation" blocked,
The ET 200S does not start up if a module is missing or if an incorrect module is inserted.
The diagnostic "No module" or "Incorrect module" is signaled.
The ET 200S starts up if you enable option handling for the slot of an inserted RESERVE
module. A diagnostic is not signaled.

3-34

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

Substitute values
If you have assigned an electronic module for the RESERVE module, the following substitute
values are signaled:
Digital input modules: 0
Analog input modules: 7FFFH
Function module: 0

3.8.6

Controlling and monitoring options

Introduction
You can use the control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) to control and monitor
options by means of the user program.
Recommendation: Before you work with the optional enhancements of the ET 200S, check
via the feedback interface (see table further below) whether all configured electronic
modules are plugged in.

Note
The use of SFCs 14/15 enables consistent accesses to the control and feedback interface.

Principle
The control and feedback interface is in the process output and input image of the PM-E 24
to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power modules. It is only available if you
have selected the entries ending in ...O or ...SO for the relevant power module in the
configuration software.
There is one bit for each slot of the electronic or RESERVE modules of the ET 200S.
Control interface: Slot 2 to 63
Feedback interface: Slot 1 to 63
       
,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[

      
       
       

,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[

 
 
 
 
 













 
 
 
 
 







%LWQR







1RWDSSOLFDEOH

Figure 3-8

Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-35

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

Control interface PIQ (AB x to AB x+7):


You can use these bytes (8 bytes) to control the diagnostic behavior of the slots that you
enabled for option handling in HW Config.
Only the bits of the slots you enabled for option handling during parameter assignment are
evaluated (they are marked with "0").
Table 3-9
Slot
2 to 63

Control interface
Value of the bit

Response

Parameter assignment for option handling applies. RESERVE


modules are permitted:
The station is engaged in data exchange.
A diagnostic is not signaled.
The SF LED on the interface module is off.

Parameter assignment for option handling is cancelled.


RESERVE modules are not accepted on this slot:
The station is engaged in data exchange.
The diagnostic "Incorrect module" is signaled.
The SF LED on the interface module lights up.

Feedback interface PII (EB x to EB x+7):


The feedback interface (8 bytes) tells you which module is actually on each slot.
All slots are reported. This includes slots that you have not enabled for option handling.
Table 3-10
Slot
1 to 63

3-36

Feedback interface
Value of the bit

Response

The RESERVE module, an incorrect module, or a removed


module is on the slot.

The configured module is on the slot.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

3.8.7

Fault correction during option handling

Fault correction during option handling


Table 3-11

Fault correction during option handling


Event

ET 200S does not start up;


configuration error

Cause

Action

There are multiple entries of


power modules ending in ...O or
...SO in the ET 200S
configuration.

Check and correct the


configuration in HW Config.

There is no power module entry


ending in ...O or ...SO in the
ET 200S configuration.

Use a power module entry


ending in ...O or ...SO in HW
Config.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-37

Configuration options
3.9 Identification data

3.9

3.9

Identification data

Definition
Identification data are data that are stored in a module for assisting the user in:
Checking the system configuration
Locating hardware changes in a system
Correcting errors in a system
Identification data enable modules to be uniquely identified online. For IM151-STANDARD
(after 6ES7151-AA04-AB0), IM151- FO STANDARD (after 6ES7151-AB03-AB0) and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0), this data is available on the
ET 200S.
In STEP 7, the identification data are displayed in the "Module Information - IM 151" and
"Properties - DP Slave" tabs (see STEP 7 online help).

Reading of identification data


The user can access particular identification data with Read data record. This requires a
two-stage access:
1. A data record containing the associated data record numbers for the various indices is
stored in data record 248 (see table below).
Table 3-12

Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S


Content

Length (bytes)

Coding (hex)

Header information
ID of content directory

00 01

Index of content directory

00 00

Length of subsequent blocks in bytes

00 08

Number of blocks

00 05

SSL
Associated data record number
Length of data record
Index

2
2
2
2

F1 11
00 E7
00 40
00 01

SSL
Associated data record number
Length of data record
Index

2
2
2
2

F1 11
00 E8
00 40
00 02

SSL
Associated data record number
Length of data record
Index

2
2
2
2

F1 11
00 E9
00 40
00 03

SSL
Associated data record number
Length of data record
Index

2
2
2
2

F1 11
00 EA
00 40
00 04

Block information for identification data

8-bytes of block information for additional data record objects


: 48

3-38

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.9 Identification data
1. The portion of the identification data assigned to the respective index is located under the
associated data record number (see table on identification data below).
All data records with identification data have a length of 64 bytes.
The data records are structured according to the principle shown in the table below.
Table 3-13

Basic structure of data records with identification data


Content

Length (bytes)

Coding (hex)

Header information
SSL

F1 11

Index

00 0x

Length of identification data

00 38

Number of blocks with identification data

00 01

Index

00 0x

Identification data for the respective index (see table


below)

54

Identification data

The identification data are assigned to the indices corresponding to the table below.
The data structures in data records 231 to 234 correspond to the specifications of
PROFIBUS Guideline - Order No. 3.502, Version 1.1, May 2003.
Table 3-14

Identification data

Identification data

Access

Default setting

Explanation

Identification data 0: Index 1 (data record 231)


MANUFACTUREROR_ID

Read (2 bytes)

2A hex (=42 dec)

The name of the manufacturer is stored


here. (42 dec = SIEMENS AG)

ORDER_ID

Read (20 bytes)

Dependent on the
module

Order number of the module

SERIAL_NUMBER

Read (16 bytes)

Not relevant

HARDWARE_REVISION

Read (2 bytes)

Not relevant

SWSOFTWARE_REVISION

Read (4 bytes)

Firmware version

Provides information on the firmware


version of the module.

REVISIONS_COUNTER

Read (2 bytes)

Provides information on the assigned


changes on the module.

PROFILE_ID

Read (2 bytes)

F600 hex

Generic device

PROFILE_SPECIFIC_
TYPE

Read (2 bytes)

0005 hex

On interface modules

IM_VERSION

Read (2 bytes)

0101 hex

Provides information on the version of the


identification data (0101 hex = Version 1.1)

IM_SUPPORTED

Read (2 bytes)

000E hex

Provides information on the available


identification data (Index 2 to 4)

Maintenance Data 1: Index 2 (data record 232)


TAG_FUNCTION

Read/write (32
bytes)

Enter a system-wide unique identifier for


the module here.

TAG_LOCATION

Read/write (22
bytes)

Enter the installation location of the module


here.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-39

Configuration options
3.9 Identification data
Identification data

Access

Default setting

Explanation

Maintenance Data 2: Index 3 (Data set 233)


INSTALLATION_DATE

Read/write (16
bytes)

Enter the installation date of the module


here.

RESERVED

Read/write (38
bytes)

Reserved

Enter a comment on the module here.

Maintenance Data 3: Index 4 (Data set 234)


DESCRIPTOR

3-40

Read/write (54
bytes)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system

3.10

3.10

Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system

Properties
The ET 200S is integrated in a redundant DP system as DPV0 or DPV1 slave via the Y
switching.

Requirements
DPV0

DPV1

Possible with all interface modules


after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3
GSD file

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after


(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
STEP 7 V5.3 SP3

5HGXQGDQW'3V\VWHP
5HGXQGDQW352),%86'3

</,1.
,0

<VZLWFKLQJ
(70

(70

<OLQH

(76

Figure 3-9

ET 200S and the Y switching

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-41

Configuration options
3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system

Procedure
1. Configuration of the redundant DP system (redundant DP master, PROFIBUS DP,
slaves)
2. Configure the ET 200S with STEP 7

Reference
You can find further information in the documentation for Y switching (manual or product
information).

3-42

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.11 Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration

3.11

3.11

Limitations on the number of modules that can be


connected/maximum configuration

Principle
Number of modules:
ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC: max. 12 modules.
ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD; IM151-1 FO STANDARD; IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE: max. 63 modules.

Note
Reduction of the maximum number of connectable peripheral modules
For every utilized 2D0 AC24 230V module in an ET 200S, the number of connectable
peripheral modules in this station is reduced by one module.
This applies to IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE.

This includes power modules, electronic modules, RESERVE modules, and motor
starters.
Bus length of the ET 200S:
max. 2 m: for IM151-1 BASIC.
max. 2 m (can be parameterized): for IM151-1 STANDARD; IM151-1 FO STANDARD;
IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Parameter length:
for PROFIBUS DP: Independent from the DP master used (max. 244 byte)
For IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 the possibility exists for
operation on a S7-CPU in configuration after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 , IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 to operate with more that 244 byte parameter
data. A configuration per GSD file does not offer this possibility. Also see the note
below.
for PROFINET IO: not relevant for maximum upgrade.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3-43

Configuration options
3.11 Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration
Table 3-15

Parameter length in bytes


Module

Parameter length

Module

Parameter length

IM151-1 BASIC

19 bytes

2AI I 2WIRE Standard

4 bytes

IM151-1 STANDARD

27 bytes

4AI I 2WIRE Standard

7 bytes

27 bytes

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed

12 byte
(4 byte 3)

2AI I 4WIRE Standard

4 bytes

IM151-1 FO STANDARD
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE 6

56 byte 1
PM-E 24 VDC

3 bytes

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to
230 VAC

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

12 byte
(4 byte 4)

2DI 24 VDC High Feature

3 bytes

2AI RTD Standard

4 bytes

4DI 24 VDC High Feature

3 bytes

2AI RTD High Feature

7 byte
(4 byte 2)

2DI 24 VDC Standard

1 byte

2AI TC Standard

4 bytes

2AI TC High Feature

4DI 24 VDC Standard


4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard
4DI NAMUR

12 bytes

2AO U Standard

2DI 120 VAC Standard

3 bytes

2AO U High Feature

2DI 230 VAC Standard

3 bytes

2AO I Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High


Feature

3 bytes

2AO I High Feature

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

1 byte

1COUNT 24V/100kHz
1COUNT 5V/500kHz

16 bytes

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High


Feature

3 bytes

1SSI

8 bytes

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

1 byte

1STEP 5V/204kHz

7 bytes

2PULSE

16 bytes
16 bytes

4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard


2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 A

3 bytes

1POS INC/Digital

2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A


24 to 230 VAC/5 A

3 bytes

1POS SSI/Digital

7 bytes
7 bytes

16 bytes

1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog

2AI U Standard

4 bytes

1SI 3964/ASCII

2AI U High Feature

4/8 bytes

1SI Modbus/USS

2AI U High Speed

12 byte
(4 byte 5)

4 IQ-SENSE

16 bytes

RESERVE

---

Motor starter STANDARD

3 bytes

Motor starter HIGH


FEATURE

12 bytes

1) Cycle synchronization is activated


2) for application as 2AI RTD ST
3) for application as 6ES7134-4GB50-0AB0
4) for application as 6ES7134-4FB50-0AB0
5) for application as 6ES7134-4GB60-0AB0
6) is not relevant after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0

3-44

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Configuration options
3.11 Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration

Note
With the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0) you have the possibility to
configure more than 244 byte parameter data in STEP 7 in DPV1 mode. Due to the higher
parameter length, an increase in the startup time is to be expected.

Address space:
On PROFIBUS DP (depends on the DP master)
The IM151-1 BASIC interface module supports a maximum of 88 input bytes or 88
output bytes.
Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD and IM151-1 FO STANDARD supported
A maximum of 128 input bytes or 128 output bytes (6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0 or higher
and 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0 or higher)
A maximum of 244 input bytes or 244 output bytes (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher
and 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher)
The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module supports a maximum of 244 input
bytes or 244 output bytes.
On PROFINET IO
The IM151-3 PN interface module supports a maximum of 256 input bytes and 256
output bytes.
Power module: Maximum expansion per potential group
Table 3-16

Maximum configuration per voltage group

Power modules
PM-E 24 VDC power
module

Maximum
current-carrying capacity
10 A

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC power 10 A


module
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to
230 VAC power module

10A (DC 24V)


8A (AC 120/230V)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Connectable modules
The number of modules that can be
connected depends on the total current of all
the modules in this voltage group. This must
not exceed 10 A in total. The total current is
governed in large part by the digital output
modules:
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
4DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A

3-45

Configuration options
3.11 Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration
Number of identifiers: per module one identifier (max. 63 identifiers)
You can use the ET 200S with DP masters with diagnostic frame lengths of 32 bytes
because the length of the diagnostic frame can be assigned for all of the interface
modules.

See also
Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 6-32)
Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module (Page 8-1)
Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (Page 8-2)
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module (Page 8-3)

3-46

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.1

4.1

Basic principles of installation


Warning
Open components
Modules of an ET 200S are open components. That is, you must set up the ET 200S in
housings, cabinets, or electrical rooms that are accessible only by means of a key or tool.
Only trained and authorized personnel should be allowed access to the housings, cabinets,
or electrical rooms.

Simple installation
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is designed for simple installation.

Installation rules
The ET 200S distributed I/O system starts with an interface module.
A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of each voltage
group.
After a power module come digital, analog, technology, or RESERVE modules.
The ET 200S distributed I/O system ends with the terminating module.
The maximum configuration of the distributed I/O system is as follows:
IM151-1 BASIC: max. 13 modules (including interface module). The bus length is not
relevant.
IM151-1 STANDARD / IM151-1 FO STANDARD / IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: max. 64
modules (including interface module) or max 2 m bus length.

Mounting position
Preferably, the ET 200S is mounted horizontally on a vertical wall. Any other installation
position is also possible; however, there are limitations with regard to ambient temperature.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-1

Installation
4.1 Basic principles of installation

Mounting rail
The distributed I/O system ET 200S is installed on a galvanized profile rail according to
EN 50022 (35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm).

Note
If the ET 200S distributed I/O system is exposed to elevated vibratory and shock loads, we
recommend that you screw the rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approximately 200
mm.
To prevent the ET 200S distributed I/O system from slipping sideways, we recommend that
you apply a mechanical hold-down (for example, with grounding terminal, 8WA2 011-1PH20)
at both ends of the device.
If you install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground
the rail separately.

Mounting dimensions
Table 4-1

Mounting dimensions

Dimensions

4-2

Mounting
width

Interface module: 45 mm
Terminal module with electronics modules: 15 mm or 30 mm
Terminator module: 7.5 mm

Mounting
height

Interface module: 119.5 mm


Electronic module with terminal module:
3-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 119.5 mm
3-stepped with Fast Connect: 143 mm
3-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 151.5 mm
3-stepped with Fast Connect and shielding plate: 175 mm
4-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 132 mm
4-stepped with Fast Connect: 164 mm
4-stepped with screw or spring clamp and shielding plate: 164 mm
4-stepped with Fast Connect and shielding plate: 196 mm
6-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 157 mm
6-stepped with Fast Connect: 204 mm
6-stepped with screw or spring clamp and shielding plate: 189 mm
6-stepped with Fast Connect and shielding plate: 236 mm
7-stepped with screw clamp: 196.5 mm

Mounting
depth

ET 200S on profile rail with 7.5 mm depth: 75 mm


ET 200S on profile rail with 15 mm depth: 82.5 mm

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.1 Basic principles of installation

Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat dissipation


When the ET 200S is installed in an enclosure, the distance to the enclosure cover or front
door should be at least 2 mm.

PP

30 (0 (0 (0 30

(0 (0 (0

PP
PP

PP

PP

Figure 4-1

PP

PP

Minimum clearances

Note
Compatibility to the successor device of a IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Allow for an additional 15 mm space on the left side for the installation in the IM151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0). You device is thus compatible to the 15 mm wide successor
device.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-3

Installation
4.2 Mounting the interface module

4.2

4.2

Mounting the interface module

Introduction
The interface module connects the ET 200S with the PROFIBUS DP.
The interface module exchanges data between the higher-level controller and the I/O
modules.

Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.
All terminal modules are installed to the right of the interface module. The maximum
configuration of the ET 200S distributed I/O system is 12/63 modules (including power
modules, I/O modules, reserve modules, and motor starters).

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Mounting the interface module


1. Hook the interface module onto the rail.
2. Pivot the interface module backwards until you hear the locking mechanism engage.

Figure 4-2

4-4

Mounting the interface module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.2 Mounting the interface module

Removing the interface module


The interface module is wired, and the terminal modules are on the right:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the interface module.
2. Disconnect the wiring and the bus connector on the interface module.
3. Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the interface module downward
until it stops, and move the interface module to the left.
Note: The locking mechanism is beneath the interface module.
4. With the locking mechanism depressed, pivot the interface module so that it comes off
the mounting rail.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-5

Installation
4.3 Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules

4.3

4.3

Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules

Introduction
The terminal modules accommodate the I/O modules and power modules.
The terminal modules can be prewired (without I/O modules).
All terminal modules are mounted on the right of the interface module.

Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Mounting the terminal module


1. Hook the terminal module onto the mounting rail.
2. Pivot the terminal module backwards until you hear the locking mechanism engage.
3. Move the terminal module to the left until you hear it latch onto the previous interface
module (if already mounted) or the terminal module.

Figure 4-3

4-6

Mounting the terminal module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.3 Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules

Removing the terminal module


The terminal module is wired, and there are other terminal modules on the right and left.
A particular terminal module within the ET 200S distributed I/O system can only be removed
when there is a distance of approximately 8 mm to the adjacent terminal modules
(you achieve this distance by moving the adjacent modules).
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.
2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.
3. Removal from the right:
Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the previous terminal
module/interface module (on the left) downward until it stops, and move the terminal
module to the right.
Removal from the left:
Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the terminal module downward until
it stops, and move the terminal module to the left.
Note: The locking mechanism is beneath the terminal module.
4. With the locking mechanism depressed, pivot the terminal module so that it comes off the
mounting rail.
Removing the terminal module (from the right)

3
4

Locking mechanism

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-7

Installation
4.3 Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules

Note
It is not necessary to remove the terminal module in order to replace the terminal box.

See also
Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module (Page 4-9)

4-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.4 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module

4.4

4.4

Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module

Introduction
The terminal box is part of the terminal module. If necessary, you can replace the terminal
box. It is not necessary to remove the terminal module.

Requirements
The terminal module is installed, wired, and assembled with an electronic module.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Procedure
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.
2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.
3. Simultaneously press the upper and lower release buttons of the electronic module, and
remove it from the terminal module.
4. Insert the screwdriver from below at an angle into the small opening underneath the slot
number plate, and at the same time pull the terminal box downward until it stops. Then
pull the terminal box upward and out of the terminal module.
5. Replace the terminal box, and insert the new one into the terminal module from above
(see figure). Then push the terminal box upward until it snaps into place.
6. Insert the electronic module in the terminal module.
7. Wire the terminal module.
8. Switch on the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-9

Installation
4.4 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module
Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module:

4-10

Slot number plate

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.5 Mounting the terminating module

4.5

4.5

Mounting the terminating module

Introduction
The terminating module on the right end of the ET 200S terminates the ET 200S distributed
I/O system. If you have not inserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready for
operation.

Requirements
The last terminal module must be installed.

Mounting the terminating module


1. Hook the terminating module onto the mounting rail to the right of the last terminal
module.
2. Pivot the terminating module backwards onto the mounting rail.
3. Move the terminating module to the left until you hear it latch onto the last terminal
module.

1
3

Figure 4-4

Mounting the terminating module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-11

Installation
4.5 Mounting the terminating module

Removing the terminating module


1. Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the last terminal module downward
until it stops, and move the terminating module to the right.
2. Pivot the terminating module so that it comes off the mounting rail.

Note
If
the terminating module of the ET 200S is removed and remounted under voltage, or
the ET 200S backplane bus is interrupted during operation, e.g., at a terminal module,
and then restored to function,
the complete power supply of the ET 200S must be switched off and on again in order to
achieve a defined station status.

4-12

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.6 Mounting the shield connection

4.6

4.6

Mounting the shield connection

Introduction
The shield connection is needed for applying cable shields (e.g., analog electronic
modules, 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module, and 1SSI electronic module).
You mount the shield connection on the terminal module.
The shield connection consists of a shield connection element, a power bus (3 x 10 mm),
a shield clamp, and a grounding terminal.

Requirements
The terminal modules are installed.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Metal-cutting saw

Procedure
1. Push the shield connection element onto the first terminal module from below.
2. Push the shield contact element onto the last terminal module from below.
In order to maintain the stability of the power bus between two shield connection
elements during installation, you must insert an additional shield connection element after
every sixth terminal module (given a width of 15 mm).
3. Saw off a piece of power bus of the appropriate size. The length of the power bus should
be equal to the distance between the shield connection elements + 45 mm.
4. Press the power bus onto the shield connection element. The power bus must be sized in
such a way that it projects from the shield contact element by 15 mm on the left or right,
depending on the mounting direction.
5. Attach the shield terminals to the power bus (between the shield connection elements).
6. Attach the grounding terminal to the projecting power bus.
Mounting the shield connection:

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-13

Installation
4.6 Mounting the shield connection

4
2
3

4-14

Shield terminals

Shield connection elements

Grounding terminal

Power bus

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.7 Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates

4.7

4.7

Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates

Introduction
The slot number plates identify the individual I/O modules with a slot (1 to 63).
The color-coding plates enable an individual color coding of the terminals in accordance
with company or national conventions. The color-coding plates are available in white, red,
blue, brown, yellow, yellow-green, and turquoise. Each terminal on the terminal module
can be provided with a color-coding plate.
The slot number plates and color-coding plates are applied to the terminal modules.
Position of the slot number plate: below the coding element on the terminal module.
Position of the color-coding plates: directly next to each terminal on the terminal box.

Requirements
The terminal modules are installed.
There must not be any electronic modules inserted when you apply the slot number
plates.
The terminal modules should not be wired when you apply the color-coding plates.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver (for removal only)

Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates


Applying slot number plates:
1. Break off the slot number plate (1 to 63) from the strip.
2. Use your finger to press the slot number plate onto the terminal module.
Applying color-coding plates:
1. You can twist off the color-coding plates directly from the strip onto the opening provided
for them next to the terminal
2. Use your finger to press the color-coding plates onto the terminal module.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-15

Installation
4.7 Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates
Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates:

2
2

Slot number plate

Color-coding plates

Removing slot number plates and color-coding plates


Removing slot number plate:
1. Detach the electronic module from the terminal module.
2. Lift the slot number plate from its holder.
Removing color-coding plates:
Use a screwdriver to lift the color-coding plates from their holders.

4-16

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Installation
4.8 Setting the PROFIBUS address

4.8

4.8

Setting the PROFIBUS address

Introduction
The PROFIBUS address is used to specify the address of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system on the PROFIBUS DP.
The PROFIBUS DP address for the ET 200S is set on the interface module by means of
DIP switches. The DIP switches are on the front of the interface module, protected by a
sliding window.
The permitted PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.
Each address can be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP.

Requirements
Address setting is not yet assigned on PROFIBUS DP.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address


1. Slide the window on the interface module upward.
2. Use a screwdriver to set the desired PROFIBUS DP address via the DIP switch.
3. Close the window.
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

2))

21

([DPSOH
'3DGGUHVV

(76
















2QO\ZLWK,067$1'$5',0)267$1'$5'
5HVHUYHGIRUIXWXUHXSJUDGHV7KLVVZLWFKPXVWEHLQWKH2))SRVLWLRQ

Figure 4-5

Setting the PROFIBUS address

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4-17

Installation
4.8 Setting the PROFIBUS address

Changing the PROFIBUS DP address


You change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change in
the PROFIBUS DP address is applicable to the ET 200S after a power on at the interface
module.

4-18

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.1

5.1

General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S

Introduction
When operating the ET 200S distributed I/O system as part of a plant or system, special
rules and regulations have to be followed depending on the field of application.
This chapter provides an overview of the most important rules you have to observe when
integrating the ET 200S distributed I/O system in a plant or system.

Specific application
Note the safety and accident prevention regulations that apply to specific applications
(for example, machine protection guidelines).

Emergency stop devices


Emergency stop devices as defined in IEC 204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 113) must remain
effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.

Startup of the system after certain events


The following table identifies situations you must pay attention to when the system starts up
after the occurrence of certain events.
If ...
Startup follows a power dip or a power
failure

Then ...
Dangerous operating states must not occur. If
necessary, force an emergency stop!

Startup of the ET 200S follows an


interruption of the bus communication
Startup follows unlocking of the emergency
stop device

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

There must not be an uncontrolled or undefined


startup.

5-1

Wiring and Assembling


5.1 General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S

Line voltage
The following table identifies requirements to be observed for the line voltage.
With ...

Requirements

Stationary plants or systems without all-pole line


voltage disconnect switch

There must be a line voltage disconnect switch or


a fuse in the building installation.

Load power supplies, power supply modules

The set rated voltage range must correspond to


the local line voltage.

All circuits of the ET 200S distributed I/O system

Any fluctuation/deviation of the line voltage from


the rated value must be within the permitted
tolerances

24 VDC supply
The following table identifies requirements you must observe for the 24 VDC supply.
With ...

Requirements ...

Buildings

Outdoor lightning
protection

Take lightning protection


precautions

24 VDC supply lines, signal lines

Indoor lightning
protection

(for example, lightning protection


elements)

24 VDC supply

Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage

Protection against outside electrical influences


The following table identifies requirements you must observe to provide protection against
electrical influences or faults.
With ...

Requirements ...

All plants or systems in which the ET 200S


is integrated

The plant or system must be connected to a protective


conductor for dissipation of electromagnetic
interferences.

Supply, signal, and bus lines

The wiring arrangement and installation must be


correct.

Signal and bus lines

Any wire or conductor break must not result in


undefined states of the plant or system.

See also
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions (Page 7-8)

5-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply

5.2

5.2

Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply

Introduction
In this section, you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200S distributed
I/O system on a grounded incoming supply (TN-S system). The specific subjects discussed
are:
Disconnecting devices, short-circuit protection, and overload protection in accordance
with DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0113
Load voltage supplies and load circuits.

Grounded incoming supply


In grounded incoming supplies, the neutral conductor of the supply line is grounded. A mere
ground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section of the plant causes
the protective devices to trip.

Safety isolation
Safety isolation is required for:
Modules that must be supplied with 60 VDC or 25 VAC
24 VDC load circuits

Configuring the ET 200S with ungrounded reference potential


After M151-1 BASIC (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0), IM151-1 STANDARD
(6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0) and IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) the ground M
of the power supply rated voltage of the IM151-x to the profile rail (ground wire) via an RC
combination and thus a ground-free installation is possible.
For dissipation of interference currents, the ground of the IM151-x is internally linked via an
RC combination (R = 10 M / C = 22 nF) with the profile rail (ground wire). High-frequency
interference currents are thus dissipated, and static charge is prevented.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-3

Wiring and Assembling


5.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply

Components and protective measures


Various components and protective measures are required for the installation of an overall
plant. The types of components and the degree to which the protective measures are
mandatory depend on the DIN VDE regulation that applies to your plant setup. The following
table refers to the figure below.
Compare ...

Refer to figure

Disconnecting device for controller,


sensors, and actuators

Short-circuit and overload protection:

Group-wise for sensors and actuators

DIN VDE 0100


... Part 460:

... Part 1:

Main switch

Disconnector

... Part 725:


Single-pole protection of
circuits

... Part 1:
Fuse for grounded
secondary electric circuit:
unipolar
otherwise: fuse all poles

Isolation by transformer
recommended

Isolation by transformer
recommended

Load power supply for AC load


circuits with more than five
electromagnetic devices

5-4

DIN VDE 0113

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply

ET 200S in the overall configuration


The figure below shows the ET 200S distributed I/O system in the overall configuration
(load voltage supply and grounding concept) with incoming supply from a TN-S system.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

Low-voltage distribution e.g.


TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
FG: Functional ground to divert noise
directly to the DIN rail by means of a
spring contact
ET 200S

FG

FG FG

FG FG FG FG FG

Mounting rail

PE (AUX1)

AC
DC

1L+
1M
Shield contact for fastening cable
shields
Ground bus

Load circuit
400 VAC for motor starters
2
3

AC
DC
VDC load circuit for electronic modules and
motor starters
2
3

AC
AC
120 VAC/230 VAC load circuit for AC modules

Figure 5-1

Operate ET 200S with grounded ground

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-5

Wiring and Assembling


5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200S

5.3

5.3

Electrical configuration of the ET 200S

Isolation
In the ET 200S, isolation exists between:
The load circuits/process and all other circuit components of the ET 200S
The PROFIBUS DP interface in the interface module and all other circuit components
The PROFINET interface in the IM151-3 PN interface module and all other circuit
components
The figure below shows the voltage ratios for ET 200S with IM151-1. Only the primary
components are shown in the figure.

'3
LQWHUIDFH

(OHFWURQLFV
EDFNSODQHEXV

(76EDFNSODQHEXV

%XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH

,VRODWLRQ

,VRODWLRQ

,VRODWLRQ

3URFHVV
HOHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQW

3URFHVV
HOHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQW

,VRODWLRQ

,VRODWLRQ

,VRODWLRQ

,0

/ 0

'&90 3(
3RZHU
PRGXOH

3RWHQWLDO,2

Figure 5-2

5-6

3URFHVV
HOHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQW

7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH

5DLO

'&9 0 3(
(OHFWURQLF
PRGXOH

(OHFWURQLF
PRGXOH

3RWHQWLDO'3LQWHUIDFH

3RZHU
PRGXOH

(OHFWURQLF
PRGXOH

3RWHQWLDOORJLFFLUFXLWU\

Voltage ratios for ET 200S with IM151-1

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

5.4

5.4.1

5.4

Wiring the ET 200S

Wiring rules for ET 200S

Wiring rules
Wiring rules for ...

Interface module (supply


voltage)

Terminal modules (spring


and screw terminals)

Terminal modules
(Fast Connect)

Connectable wire cross-sections for


solid wires

No

0.14 to 2.5 mm2

0.5 to 1.5 mm2

Connectable
wire
cross-sections
for flexible wires

Without end sleeve

0.25 to 2.5 mm2

0.14 to 2.5 mm2

0.5 to 1.5 mm2

With end sleeve

0.25 to 1.5 mm2

0.14 to 1.5 mm2

---

Number of wires per connection

1 or a combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm2


(total) in a common end sleeve

Maximum external diameter of the wire


insulation

3.8 mm

3.2 mm at 1.5 mm2

Stripped wire length

11 mm

End sleeves in
accordance with
DIN 46228

Without insulating
collar

Form A, 8 to 12 mm long

With insulating collar


0.25 to 1.5 mm2

Form E, up to 12 mm long

5.4.2

3.1 mm at 1.5 mm2


3.8 mm at 2.5 mm2

--Form A, up to 12 mm long

-----

Wiring a terminal module with screw terminals

Introduction
In terminal modules with screw terminals, the individual wires are screwed into the terminal.

Requirements
Follow the wiring rules.
No end sleeves are required.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-7

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Procedure
1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.
2. Insert the individual wires into the terminal.
3. Screw the ends of the individual wires onto the terminal module (torque of 0.4 to 0.7 Nm).

5.4.3

Wiring a terminal module with spring terminals

Introduction
In terminal modules with spring terminals, the individual wires are affixed by inserting them
into the terminal.

Requirements
Follow the wiring rules.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Procedure
1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.
2. Insert the screwdriver in the upper (round) opening of the terminal.
3. Insert the wire into the lower (square) opening of the terminal to the end stop.
4. Release the terminal by pressing with the screwdriver into the opening.
5. Push the wire into the released spring terminal, and pull the screwdriver out.

5-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Figure 5-3

5.4.4

Wiring the spring terminal

Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect

Introduction
In the case of terminal modules with Fast Connect, the individual wires are attached
using a quick connection method that requires no stripping.
Fast Connect is a connection method that requires no wire preparation
(i.e., the wire insulation does not have to be stripped).
Each terminal of the terminal module with Fast Connect has a test opening
(for measuring the voltage, for example). The test opening is suitable for probes with a
maximum diameter of 1.5 mm.
End sleeves are not permitted.
Diagram of the Fast Connect terminal module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-9

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

1
2
3

Opening for measuring, checking: max. 1.5 mm

Opening for 1 wire: 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2

Locking mechanism open (the wire can be inserted)

Locking mechanism closed (the cable is connected)

Requirements
Follow the wiring rules.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Connectable wires
You can connect solid and flexible wires with PVC insulation with a wire cross-section of
0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (max. external diameter of 3.2 mm). If the conductor cross-section is the
same, they can be connected fifty times. You can find a list of the tested wires at:
http://www.idc2.de
UL-compliant cables and connections
Wiring range for insulating piercing connection 22 -16 AWG solid/stranded PVC insulated
conductors, UL style no. 1015 only.

Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect


1. Insert the unstripped wire into the round opening to the end stop (the insulation and
conductor must form a flat surface).
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening above the locking mechanism to the end stop.
3. Press the screw driver downward until the locking mechanism reaches its end position.

5-10

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

PP




Figure 5-4

Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect

Result: The wire is connected.

Note
If you want to reconnect a wire that was connected previously, you must first cut it off.

Releasing the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect
1. Insert the screw driver into the opening below the locking mechanism to the end stop.
2. Using the screwdriver, lift and press the locking mechanism upward.
3. The wiring is released: Remove the wire.





Figure 5-5

Releasing the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-11

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Removing any conductor remnants (if necessary)


To remove any conductor remnants (insulation), you can remove disassemble the locking
mechanism from the terminal module (see Step 3). To do this, the locking mechanism must
be open (upper position). You can only insert the locking mechanism in the upper position
(see Step 4).
1. Insert the screwdriver in the opening below the locking mechanism (the tip of the
screwdriver is on the lip of the locking mechanism).
2. Press the screwdriver downward until you lift the locking mechanism from the terminal
module.
3. Remove the locking mechanism from the terminal module. Remove any remnants of the
conductor from the locking mechanism.
4. Use your fingers to press the locking mechanism back into the opening. Attention: Put the
locking mechanism into the correct position or you could damage the terminal point.







Figure 5-6

5.4.5

Disassembling the locking mechanism from the terminal module

Wiring terminal modules

Introduction
The ET 200S distributed I/O system incorporates terminal modules both for power modules
and for electronic modules:
In the case of the terminal modules for power modules, you connect the supply/load
voltage for the respective voltage group.
Terminal modules for electronic modules connect the ET 200S with the process.
In the case of the terminal modules for electronic modules, you can connect cable shields
by means of a shield connection.

Requirements
You must wire the terminal modules with the supply/load voltage switched off at the
power module and the load voltage switched off at the electronic module.
Follow the wiring rules.

5-12

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Wiring terminal modules for power modules


Wire the terminal module in accordance with the terminal assignment.

Wiring terminal modules for digital, analog, and technology modules


Wire the terminal module in accordance with the terminal assignment.

Connecting cable shields


We recommend that you use the shield connection to connect cable shields (in the case of
analog electronic modules, the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module and the 1SSI
electronic module, for example).
1. Remove the insulation material from the area around the shield clamp, and clamp the
cable shield into the shield clamp (above the power bus). The shield clamp is suitable for
one cable with a maximum diameter of 8 mm or two cables with a maximum diameter
of 4 mm each.
2. Tighten the shield clamp (approximately 0.5 Nm)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if you want to connect additional cable shields.
4. Strip the insulation from the ground wire (from 6 to 25 mm2), and insert it into the
grounding terminal (below the power bus). Tighten the grounding terminal
(2 Nm to 2.5 Nm).
5. Attach the other end to the ground bus.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-13

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S
Connecting cable shields:

1
5
2
4

Shield clamp

Insulation material removed

Cable to the sensor

Cable to the ground bus

Grounding terminal

Note
To stabilize the shield connection, you must mount and screw in at least one shield clamp
over the shield connection element.

5-14

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

5.4.6

Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted power module

Terminal assignment
The terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which power module is
inserted.
TM-P15S23-A1 and power
module

$8;

$8;

$ $
 

$ $
 

3

3


$


$


3
$8; 3(

TM-P15S23-A0 and power


module

3

3

$8; 3(

AUX1 bus (PE)


implemented. Connection to
terminals A4 and A8.

$8;
3

3


$


$


3

$8; 3(

AUX1 bus (PE) interrupted.


Connection to terminals A4
and A8.

TM-P30S44-A0 and power module

3


3

3

3

$8; 3(

TM-P15S22-01 and power


module

AUX1 bus implemented. No


connection to the terminals
of the terminal module.

TM-PF30S47-F0 and PM-D F


24 VDC*

&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
$


3
3
$8; 3(

$









$



AUX1 bus (PE) interrupted.


Connection to terminals A4 and A8.

'&9
0

AUX1 bus implemented. No


connection to the terminals of
the terminal module.

*: for terminal assignment, see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-15

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

5.4.7

Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted electronic module

Terminal assignment
The terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which electronic module is
inserted. For information on technology modules, refer to the Technological Functions
manual.
TM-E15S26-A1 and electronic
module/technology module

TM-E15S24-A1 and
electronic module

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

&+

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented.


Connection to terminals A4, A8
and A3, A7.

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

&KDQQHO
&+

AUX1 bus (PE)


implemented. Connection
to terminals A4 and A8.

TM-E15S24-01 and electronic


module/technology module

AUX1 bus implemented.


No connection to the
terminals.

TM-E15S24-AT and 2AI TC


High Feature

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

&+

&+

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented. No


connection to terminals 4 and 8.

5-16

TM-E15S23-01 and
electronic module

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented.


No connection to the terminals
of the terminal module.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S
TM-E30S44-01 and technology
module

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

&+

&+

TM-E30S46-A1 and fail-safe


module*
)'2

)'2

)',

)',































$
$

$$





$


$




$

$


AUX1 bus (PE) implemented. No


connection to terminals 4 and 8 or
12 and 16.

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented.


Connection to terminals A4, A8
and A3, A7 or A12, A16 and A11
and A15.

*: for terminal assignment, see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

5.4.8

Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
interface modules

Introduction
The supply voltage and the bus connector (RS 485) are connected at the IM151-1 BASIC,
IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules.

Requirements
Wire the interface module with the supply voltage switched off.
Follow the wiring rules.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-17

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Procedure
1. Connecting the supply voltage:
Strip the insulation from the wires for the supply voltage of the interface module.
Secure the individual wires in the screw terminal.
2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP:
Insert the bus connector onto the PROFIBUS DP connection.
Tighten the screws of the bus connector.
Wiring IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE:

1
(76

Labeling strip

Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)

PROFIBUS DP

See also
Wiring rules for ET 200S (Page 5-7)

5-18

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

5.4.9

Wiring IM151-3 PN interface module

Introduction
The supply voltage and the bus connector are connected at the IM151-3 PN interface
module.

Requirements
Wire the interface module with the supply voltage switched off.
Follow the wiring rules.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool (6GK1 901-1GA00) (stripping tool for
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables)

Required accessories
PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation
Guide)
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables
The following are suitable:
Fast Connect standard cable

6XV1 840-2AH10

Fast Connect trailing cable

6XV1 840-3AH10

Fast Connect marine cable

6XV1 840-4AH10

Installing bus connector


Install the PROFINET connector according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation
Guide.

Procedure
1. Connecting the supply voltage:
Strip the insulation from the wires for the supply voltage of the interface module.
Secure the individual wires in the screw terminal.
2. Connecting PROFINET:
Insert the bus connector onto the PROFINET connection.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-19

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S
Wiring IM151-3 PN:

2
ET 200S

PROFINET

Labeling strip

Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)

See also
Wiring rules for ET 200S (Page 5-7)

5.4.10

Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module

Introduction
The supply voltage and the fiber-optic cable are connected at the IM151-1 FO STANDARD
interface module via a simplex connector.

Requirements
Wire the interface module with the supply voltage switched off.
Follow the wiring rules.

Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

5-20

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Required accessories
Package with simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0)
Package with plug adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)
Fiber optic duplex cable see catalog IK PI

Installing simplex connectors


Note
The fiber optic cable may have the following maximum length:
PROFIBUS plastic fiber optic standard cable

50 m

PROFIBUS PCF fiber optic standard cable

300 m

1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the jacket of the fiber-optic duplex cable.


2. Attach the fiber optic duplex cable with the associated simplex plugs. You can find
detailed installation instructions in theSIMATIC NET- PROFIBUS Networks manual.
Hint: Do not click the 2 simplex plugs closed individually, click them closed together so
that they a complete a "duplex plug". In this manner you will achieve a better hold in the
plug adapter.
IMPORTANT: The smoothed and polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely
flat and even. Likewise, the plastic jacket must not protrude or be cut unevenly. Every
irregularity causes strong attenuation of the light signal over the fiber-optic cable!
3. Place the simplex connectors into the plug adapter for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD
interface module and the fiber-optic cable into the designated cable ducts. Snap the plug
adapter closed until you can hear clearly that the side panels have engaged.
When inserting the plug in the plug adaptor, pay attention to the correct position:
Transmitter always up and receiver always down!

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-21

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Plug adapter for IM151-1 FO STANDARD

Snap the two simplex connectors closed together such that you get a "duplex connector."

Hint: Cut the lower wire approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper wire to achieve a better
arrangement of the wiring.

Maximum 30-mm bending radius

Fiber-optic duplex cable

Bending radius for the fiber-optic cable


When placing the fiber-optic duplex core into the plug adapter and routing the cable, be sure
not to exceed the permissible bending radius of 30 mm. Refer also to the installation
guidelines for fiber-optic cable in the ET 200 Distributed I/O System or SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual.

Reusing fiber-optic cable


Note
If you insert previously used fiber-optic cable into the plug adapter, you must shorten both
fiber-optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reinstall the simplex connectors.
This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by rebent, heavily stressed portions of the
fiber-optic duplex core.

5-22

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S

Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module


1. Connecting the supply voltage:
Strip the insulation from the wires for the supply voltage of the interface module.
Secure the individual wires in the screw terminal.
2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP:
Insert the fiber-optic cable with the mounted plug adapters into the
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module.
Fold the protruding plug grip upward.
Pay attention to the correct position: The transmitter fiber optic cable is inserted into the
receiver female connector and the receiver fiber optic cable in the transmitter female
connector of the fiber optic cable interface of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD.
If the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module is the last node of the fiber-optic cable
network, the unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be blanked off (blanking plug
inserted in IM151-1 FO STANDARD, as supplied).

Caution
Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmit diodes. The emitted light beam
could damage your eyes.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-23

Wiring and Assembling


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S
Wiring up IM151-1 FO STANDARD:
2

1
7
6
4
3

ET 200S

Transmitter

Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)

Grip

Labeling strip

Simplex connector

PROFIBUS DP (fiber-optic cable)

Receiver

See also
Wiring rules for ET 200S (Page 5-7)

5-24

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules

5.5

5.5.1

5.5

Inserting and identifying electronic modules

Inserting and identifying electronic modules

Introduction
The electronic modules are inserted in the terminal modules.
A labeling strip allows you to identify the electronic modules.
Electronic modules are:
Self-coding
Type-coded
The first time you insert an electronic module, a coding key engages on the terminal
module. This mechanically prevents the wrong electronic module from being inserted.

Requirements
Follow the rules below for inserting electronic modules.

Procedure
1. Insert the electronic module into the terminal module until you hear it snap into place.
2. For identification purposes, pull the labeling strip upward out of the electronic module.
3. Then reinsert the labeling strip back into the electronic module.

3
2

Figure 5-7

Inserting and identifying electronic modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-25

Wiring and Assembling


5.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules

Removing electronic modules


1. Simultaneously press the two release buttons on the top and bottom of the electronic
module.
2. Pull the electronic module forward out of the terminal module.

Figure 5-8

Removing electronic modules

Implementing an electronic module type change


You have already removed the electronic module:
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the coding key from the terminal module.
2. Reinsert the coding key onto the used electronic module.
3. Insert the new electronic module (type change) into the terminal module until you hear it
snap into place.
4. Label the new electronic module.
Removing the coding key

5-26

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules

Coding key

Warning
Changes to the code element can result in dangerous plant conditions.

Replacing a defective electronic module


You have already removed the electronic module:
1. Remove the coding key from the underside of the new electronic module.
2. Insert the new electronic module (same type) into the terminal module until you hear it
snap into place.
3. Label the new electronic module.

See also
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 6-57)
Electronic modules and applications (Page 3-9)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-27

Wiring and Assembling


5.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules

5.5.2

Removing and inserting electronic modules

Introduction
ET 200S supports the removal and insertion of modules during operation (RUN mode). The
ET 200S remains in RUN mode when an electronic module is removed. The protective
conductor connections of the ET 200S are not interrupted.

Rules
You cannot remove and insert modules during operation unless the corresponding
parameters have been assigned.
You can remove and insert modules during operation with IM151-1 BASIC,
IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO STANDARD,
IM151-1 FO STANDARD, IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, and IM151-3 PN interface modules.
If one module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the station will not start
up.
The removal and insertion of modules affects the isochronous operation (equidistance).
When replacing more than one module, make sure that only one gap occurs.

Principle
The following table indicates which modules you can remove and insert under which
conditions:
Table 5-1

Removing and inserting electronic modules


Modules

5-28

Removing and
inserting

Conditions

Interface module

No

---

Power modules

Yes

The load voltage must be switched off!

Digital electronic modules (input)

Yes

---

Digital electronic modules (output)

Yes

The load voltage must be switched off by


means of an external switch/fuse!

Analog electronic modules

Yes

---

4 IQ-SENSE

Yes

The sensors can also be replaced during


operation. The electronic module then
assigns parameters automatically to
these sensors.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules
Modules
1COUNT 24V/100kHz

Removing and
inserting

Conditions

Yes

The load voltage must be switched off by


means of an external switch/fuse!

Yes

---

1COUNT 5V/500kHz
1SSI
1STEP 5V/204kHz
2PULSE
1POS INC/Digital
1POS SSI/Digital
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog
1SI 3964/ASCII
1SI Modbus/USS

Yes

---

RESERVE

Yes

---

See also
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 6-57)
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO (Page 6-72)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-29

Wiring and Assembling


5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device

5.6

5.6

Assigning a device name for the IO device

Introduction
Each PROFINET device has a factory-assigned unique device identification (MAC address).
For the configuration and in the startup, every ET 200S IO device is addressed with its
device name.
For detailed information on addressing in PROFINET IO, refer to the PROFINET System
Description.

Assigning a device name


1. Insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.
2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module.
3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name
for the IO device there. You can choose any arbitrary device name except for "NONAME"
(independent of upper/lower case)

Figure 5-9

5-30

Assigning a device name in HW Config

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device
An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is required
for assigning the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module.
4. Transfer the device name to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign Device
Name."

Figure 5-10

Transferring a device name online to the IM151-3 PN

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-31

Wiring and Assembling


5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device
Click the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name" window. The device name
is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interface module IM151-3 PN.

Figure 5-11

"Assign device name" window before name assignment

Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.

5-32

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Wiring and Assembling


5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device

Figure 5-12

"Assign device name" window after name assignment

Forwarding the device name when the interface module is replaced


The IO device device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
For the transfer of the device name when exchanging the interface module IM151-3 PN, pull
the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card out of the "old" IM151-3 PN and insert it in the "new one".
The IO device adopts the device name from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card after
switching the power supply off/on. Then, the station is addressable again and functions the
same as before the exchange.

Station flash test


If you are using multiple IO devices, multiple IO devices are also indicated in the "Assign
device name" dialog. In this case, you should compare the MAC address of the device with
the indicated MAC address and select the proper IO device.
The identification of IO devices in a system is facilitated by a station flash test. The flash test
is activated as follows:
1. In the "Assign device name" dialog, select one of the indicated IO devices.
2. Select a flash duration.
3. Click the "Flash on" button.
The LINK LED on the selected IO device flashes (open the flaps on the front cover of the
IM151-3 PN!)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

5-33

Wiring and Assembling


5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device

5-34

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.1

6.1

Safety tests prior to commissioning

Running tests
Note
You must ensure the safety of your system. Before undertaking the final commissioning of
your system, you should perform a complete function test and the necessary safety tests.
Provision should be made in the tests for all possible foreseeable errors. In this way, you can
avoid exposing your personnel or property to danger during operation.

6.2

6.2.1

6.2

Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

Introduction
Project design involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.
Configuring: Systematic ordering of the individual ET 200S modules (setup).
Parameterizing: Determining the ET 200S parameters with the configuration software.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-1

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Note
The ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog of HW Config:
IM151-1 BASIC: after STEP 7 V5.2
IM151-1 STANDARD: after STEP 7 V5.0 with Service Pack 3
IM151-1 FO STANDARD: after STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 1
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: after STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 3
You will not need a GSD file. Advantages:
Simplified summary of the devices (via the "Pack addresses" button in HW config)
Validity checking of parameters
You can find further information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

DPV1 operation
If you are using IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher) or IM151-1 FO
STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) in DPV1 mode on an S7 CPU that does not
support an insert/remove module interrupt, you must not enable the "Operation at preset <>
actual configuration" parameter in STEP 7. Otherwise, the removal of a module (module
failure) always results in a station failure (OB86).
If it is imperative that you enable "Operation at preset <> actual configuration", you must
either select DPV0 mode or configure IM151-1/FO STANDARD using the GSD file (under
"Additional field devices - I/O" in the STEP 7 hardware catalog). "Operation at preset <>
actual configuration" is then possible even when the insert/remove module interrupt is
disabled.
However, the S7-CPU does not register an insertion or removal (module failure). You can
detect such events only by cyclically reading the diagnostic frame and evaluating the module
status.

Configuring by means of the GSD file

You configure the ET 200S distributed I/O system using the GSD file. The ET 200S is linked
as norm slave in your system via the GSD file. You can download the GSD file on the
Internet at the following address:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd
The following GSD files are available:
IM151-1 BASIC: "SIEM80F3.GSx"
IM151-1 STANDARD:
up to 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0: "SIEM806A.GSx"
after 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0: "SI03806A.GSx"
IM151-1 FO STANDARD: "SI03806B.GSx"
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE:
up to 6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0: "SI0180E0.GSx"
after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0: "SI0280E0.GSx"

6-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.2

Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.2.1

Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software

Introduction
The following instructions describe how you link the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 or SIMATIC S5
(COM PROFIBUS).

Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S7


In SIMATIC S7 proceed as follows after STEP 7, V5.0, Service Pack 3 for linking of the GSD
file:
1. Start STEP 7, and select the "Options > Install New GSD Files" menu command in HW
Config.
2. In the next dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with OK.
Result: The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the directory
"PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > I/O".
3. Configure the ET 200S using STEP 7 (refer to the STEP 7 help).

Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S5


In SIMATIC S5 (COM PROFIBUS V5.1 Service Pack 2 Hotfix 1 or higher), the procedure for
integrating the GSD file is as follows:
1. Copy the GSD file from ET 200S in the COM PROFIBUS directory: "...CPBV51\GSD"
(default)
2. Copy the Bitmap file to the directory: "...CPBV51\BITMAPS".
3. Start COM PROFIBUS, and call the "File > Read in GSD File" file menu command.
Result: ET 200S is displayed in the hardware catalog for the slave configuration.
4. Configure the ET 200S using COM PROFIBUS (refer to the COM PROFIBUS help).

Note
If you are using different configuration software, refer to the relevant documentation.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-3

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.2.2

Grouping modules for configuration

Introduction
The ET 200S has a maximum address area of:
IM151-1 BASIC: up to 88 byte for inputs and 88 byte for outputs.
IM151-1 STANDARD (up to 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (up to
6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0): up to 128 byte for inputs and 128 byte for outputs.
IM151-1 STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (after
6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: up to 244 byte for inputs and 244
byte for outputs.
To better utilize the available address space of the DP master and reduce data exchange
between the ET 200S and the DP master, you can group several electronic modules/load
feeders within one byte in the input or output area of the process image. This is achieved by
the systematic arrangement and designation of the ET 200S electronic modules/motor
starters.
A listing of the address space requirements for the individual modules is located in the
appendix.
You can group the following module types within a byte:
Digital input modules
Digital output modules
Motor starters (direct starters and reversing starters)

Procedure
1. Integrate the GSD file in your configuration software.
Result: You can identify combinable devices in the hardware catalog of your configuration
software by double availability. The devices differ only by a "*" in the name.
2. Configure the ET 200S setup, adhering to the following rules:
The modules that you can group within a byte must be of the same module type (see
above).
Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 with creation state 1
to 4: The devices that are combinable within a byte must be connected directly next to
one another. Only power modules are permitted between the electronic modules.
Power modules do not open a new byte.
After Interface module IM151-1 BASIC; IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0
with creation state 5, 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0; IM151-1 FO STANDARD and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: Optional other devices may be connected between
combinable devices.
There can be a total of no more than 8 channels (1 byte).

6-4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Note
In STEP 7 applications, if you combine the modules for IM151-1 STANDARD,
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD or IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the DPV1 mode:
No insert/remove module interrupts (OB83) are triggered for these modules. In this
case, you can recognize that a module has been removed by evaluating the module
status in the diagnostic frame in the cyclic user program.
Each grouped module then receives its own diagnostic address.

3. Select the module designation without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration
software.
Result: You open a byte and store the first device there.
4. Select the module designation with "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration
software.
Result: You store other devices in the opened byte until all bits are occupied.
5. If a byte is filled, you must configure a module again (that is, open a new byte without "*").

Note
Configuration via the GSD file: The configuration software does not check the correct
combination of the devices. If you configure more than 8 channels in a byte, the modules
that exceed the byte limit are reported as improperly configured in the diagnostics.
Module status 10B: incorrect module; invalid reference data
These modules are not addressed.

See also
Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-5

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.2.3

Grouping of digital input modules

Principle
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital input modules.
,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHOWR

',

6WUXFWXUH

,QSXW
E\WH

', ',

:LWKRXW

'HVLJQDWLRQ

6WHS

6WHS

6WHS

', ', ',

:LWKRXW
:LWK


',

:LWKRXW
:LWK


',

',

$VRI,0%$6,&,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHO
(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(

',

6WUXFWXUH

'HVLJQDWLRQ

6WHS

6WHS

6WHS

', $, ',

:LWKRXW

', $, ', $2 ',

:LWKRXW

:LWKRXW
:LWK

,QSXW
E\WH


',

:LWK


:LWK

',

',

$,

$,

2XWSXW
E\WHV


$2

Figure 6-1

6-6

Grouping of digital input modules within a byte

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.2.4

Grouping of digital output modules

Principle
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital output modules.
,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHOWR

6WHS

6WHS

6WHS

6WUXFWXUH

'2

'2 '2

'2 '2 '2

'HVLJQDWLRQ

:LWKRXW

,QSXW
E\WH

:LWKRXW
:LWK


:LWKRXW

',

:LWK


',

',

$VRI,0%$6,&,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHO
(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(
6WHS

6WHS

6WHS

6WUXFWXUH

'2

'2 $, '2

'HVLJQDWLRQ

:LWKRXW

:LWKRXW


,QSXW
E\WH

:LWK


'2 $, '2 $2 '2

:LWKRXW

:LWK


$,

2XWSXW
E\WHV


'2

:LWK

$,

'2

'2



$2

Figure 6-2

Grouping of digital output modules within a byte

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-7

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.2.5

Grouping of motor starters

Principle
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of motor starters.
6WHS

6WUXFWXUH

06

06 06

:LWKRXW

'HVLJQDWLRQ


,QSXWE\WH

:LWKRXW
:LWK

',

2XWSXWE\WH

Figure 6-3

6.2.2.6

6WHS

',


'2


'2

Grouping of motor starters within a byte

Example of a project design

Introduction
The following example describes how to design an ET 200S configuration:

Configuration of ET 200S
An example design of an ET 200S configuration is shown in the following figure:

'6
%XVWHUPLQDWRU

'6

'6

30'

'29

'29

30($&9

'2'&9

'2'&9

$2,

30('&9

52

','&9

            

$,8

 

'2'&9

'2'&9

$,8

 

$2,

','&9

30('&9

,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

','&9

6ORW


*URXSLQJLQDVLQJOHE\WH
$VRI,0%$6,&,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHO
(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(

Figure 6-4

6-8

Configuration of ET 200S

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Configuration table and address space


The user is free to select the byte addresses of the inputs and outputs (if the configuration
software supports this). The bit addresses result automatically from the sequence of the
grouped modules.
The table below shows which modules have been grouped and the corresponding address
space.
Table 6-1

Configuration table and address space

Slot

Module
1

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

Grouping

I/O address
---

Yes

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0* 2DI DC24V

6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U

No

6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I

No

6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0* 4DI DC24V

Yes

6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0 4DO DC24V

Yes

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0* 2DO DC24V

Inputs

Outputs

---

---

0.0 to 0.1
0.2 to 0.3
1 to 4
0 to 3
0.4 to 0.7
4.0 to 4.3
4.4 to 4.5

6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0* 2DO Rel.

10

6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U

No

4.6 to 4.7

11

6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I

No

5 to 8
5 to 8

12

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

---

13

6ES7132-4BB30-0AB0 2DO 24 VDC

Yes

9.0 to 9.1

14

6ES7132-4BB30-0AB0* 2DO 24 VDC

Yes

9.2 to 9.3

15

6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E AC230

16

6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0* 2DO 230 V

Yes

---

17

6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0* 2DO 230 V

Yes

18

3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D

19

3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS

20

3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 *DS

21

3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS

---

---

---

---

--9.4 to 9.5
9.6 to 9.7

---

---

Yes

9.0 to 9.3

10.0 to 10.3

9.4 to 9.7

10.4 to 10.7

Yes

10.0 to 10.3

11.0 to 11.3

No grouping
If you do not want to group digital input modules, digital output modules, or motor starters
within a byte when configuring the ET 200S distributed I/O system, use only those module
designations without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration software.
Each individual electronic module/motor starter will then occupy one byte in the input or
output area of the process image.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-9

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.3

Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.3.1

Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

Software requirements
The table below contains the software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP.
Table 6-2

Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Configuration software
used

Version

Notes

STEP 7

Version 5.0 Service


Pack 3 or higher

You are using HW Config. With Service Pack 3 or higher, the


ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog.

COM PROFIBUS

Version 5.1, Service


Pack 2, Hotfix 1 or
higher

You have integrated the GSD file of ET 200S in COM PROFIBUS.

Configuration software for


a different DP master

You need the GSD file of ET 200S.

Requirements for commissioning


The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on
PROFIBUS DP:
DP slave is installed
PROFIBUS address is set on the DP slave
DP slave is wired
DP slave is configured (configured and parameters assigned)
Supply voltage for the DP master is switched on (see manual for the DP master)
DP master is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the DP master)

Procedure
To commission the DP slave, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the supply voltage for the DP slave.
2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.

See also
Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 6-1)
Basic principles of installation (Page 4-1)
Setting the PROFIBUS address (Page 4-17)
Wiring rules for ET 200S (Page 5-7)

6-10

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.3.2

Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

Flow diagram for startup of the ET 200S

6WDUWXSZKHQH[SHFWHG!DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
SDUDPHWHUGLVDEOHG RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI'39

6ZLWFKRQWKHVXSSO\YROWDJHIRU
WKH'3VODYH

'3VODYHVHWVRXWSXWVWRDQG
DFFHSWVWKHVHW352),%86
DGGUHVV

/('V21'&9
DQG%)OLJKWXS

'3VODYHUHFHLYHVFRQILJXUDWLRQ
GDWDIURPWKH'3PDVWHU

&RQILJXUDWLRQGDWD
FRUUHVSRQGWRWKHDFWXDO
VHWXS"

1R

6)OLJKWVXSUHG
%)EOLQNVUHG

<HV
%)/('RIILQSXWVDQGRXWSXWV
HQDEOHGGDWDWUDQVIHUEHWZHHQ
(76DQG'30DVWHUSRVVLEOH

Figure 6-5

5HPHG\0DWFKFRQILJXUDWLRQGDWD
WRVHWXSRUYLFHYHUVD

Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-11

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Note
All interface modules support the default startup. In other words, configuration using the
GSD file or HW Config is not necessary.
The following conditions apply:
Preset parameters are used.
AKF (general identifier format in compliance with the PROFIBUS standard) in the
configuration frame
Grouping (packing) of the electronic modules is not possible without parameter
assignment.
All supply voltages must be switched on at the power modules.
It is not possible to remove or insert modules during operation.

See also
Parameters for digital output modules (Page 11-4)
Parameters for digital input modules (Page 11-1)
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR (Page 11-3)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST, 4AI I 2WIRE ST, and
2AI I 4WIRE ST (Page 12-26)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST, 2AO I HF
(Page 12-27)
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (Page 12-31)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST, and 2AI TC HF
(Page 12-34)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed (Page 12-28)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF (Page 12-27)
Channel-specific diagnostics (Page 6-40)

6-12

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4

Diagnostics using LED display

6.2.4.1

LED displays on the interface module

Interface module
LED display on the interface module:

(76

6)

%)

21

Group error (red)

Bus fault (red)

Supply voltage (green)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-13

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Status and error displays using LEDs on IM151-1 BASIC/IM151-1 STANDARD/


IM151-1 FO STANDARD/IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
The table below shows the status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC,
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
modules.
Table 6-3

Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO STANDARD/
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Event (LEDs)

Cause

SF

BF

ON

Off

Off

Off

Action

There is no voltage at the interface module, or


the interface module has a hardware defect.

Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 V


on the interface module.

On

There is voltage at the interface module.

Flashing

On

The interface module is not configured or is


configured incorrectly. No data exchange is
taking place between the DP master and the
interface module.

Causes:
The PROFIBUS address is incorrect.
Configuration error
Parameter assignment error
*

On

On

Transmission rate detection, illegal


PROFIBUS address, or lowermost DIP switch
(PROFIBUS address) not in the OFF position.
Causes:
The response monitoring time has
elapsed.
Bus communication with the interface
module via PROFIBUS DP has been
interrupted.

On

On

The designed configuration of the ET 200S


does not match the actual configuration.

Check the interface module.


Check the configuration and parameter
assignment.
Check the PROFIBUS address.

Set a valid PROFIBUS address (1 to 125) at


the interface module, or check the bus
configuration.
Check that the bus connector is correctly
inserted.
Check whether the bus cable to the DP
master has been disconnected.
Switch the 24 VDC supply voltage off and
on again at the interface module.
Check the configuration of the ET 200S to
determine whether a module is missing or
defective or whether an unconfigured module
is inserted.
Check the configuration (e.g., using COM
PROFIBUS or STEP 7), and correct the
parameter assignment error.

There is an error in an I/O module, or the


interface module is defective.
Off

Off

On

Replace the interface module, or contact your


Siemens representative.

Data exchange is taking place between the DP master and the ET 200S.
The preset configuration and actual
configuration of the ET 200S match.

* Not applicable

6-14

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.2

LED displays on the power module

Power module
LED display on the power module:

6)

2 )6*

3:5

Group error (red)

Fuse (green) only in the case of PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/120 to 230 VAC)

Load voltage (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the power module


The table below shows the status and error displays on the power module.
Event (LEDs)
SF

FSG

Cause

Action

PWR

On

Off
Off

No parameter assignment, or incorrect


module inserted. There is a diagnostic
message.

Check the parameter assignment.


Evaluate the diagnostics.

The fuse in the power module has tripped.

Replace the fuse.

There is no load voltage at the power


module.

Check the load voltage.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-15

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.3

LED displays on digital electronic modules

Digital electronic modules


LED displays on digital electronics modules:

6)

Group error (red) only for 2DI DC24V HF, 4DI DC24V HF, 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 2DO DC24V/2A HF and
4DI NAMUR

Status display for input/output status (green)

Status display for status of the inputs/outputs (green) only for 4DI DC24V ST, 4DI DC24V HF, 4DO DC24V/0.5A ST, 4DO DC24V/2A ST,
4DI UC24..48V HF and 4DI NAMUR

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the digital electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the digital electronic module.
Event (LEDs)
SF

Cause

On

No configuration or incorrect
module plugged in. Diagnostic
message present.
On

Check the parameterization.


Evaluate the diagnostic
message.

Input/output on channel 0
activated.
On

Input/output on channel 1
activated.
On

Input/output on channel 2 (only for


4DI/DO) activated.
On

6-16

Action

Input/output on channel 3 (only for


4DI/DO) activated.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.4

LED displays on analog electronic modules

Analog electronic modules


LED displays on analog electronics modules:

6)

Group error (red)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on analog electronic modules


The table below shows the status and error displays on digital electronic modules.
Event (LED)

Cause

Action

SF
On

No parameter assignment, or
incorrect module inserted. No load
voltage. There is a diagnostic
message.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Check the parameter


assignment. Check the load
voltage. Evaluate the
diagnostics.

6-17

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.5

LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module

1COUNT 24V/100kHz
LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz:

6)

83

'1

Group error (red)

Status display of counting direction (green)

Status display for digital input/digital output (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz


The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic
module.
Event (LEDs)
SF

UP

DN

Action

No configuration or incorrect
module plugged in. Diagnostic
message present.

Check the parameterization.


Evaluate the diagnostic message.

On

On

Status of the low-order bits of


the counter, if the counter
counts forward.
On

Status of the inverse low-order


bits of the counter, if the
counter counts backward.
On

DO (direct control, comparator


output) activated.
On

6-18

Cause

DI (HW gate, synchronization,


latch) activated.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.6

LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module

1COUNT 5V/500kHz
LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz:
6)

83

6<1

'1

Group error (red)

Status display for the digital output (green)

Status display for digital input (green)

Status display for synchronization (green)

Status display for counting direction (green)





Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic
module.
Event (LEDs)
SF

UP

DN

SYN

Cause
13

Action

16

On

No parameterization. Diagnostic message Check the parameterization.


present.
Evaluate the diagnostic
message.
On

Status of the low-order bits of the counter,


if the counter counts forward.
On

Status of the inverse low-order bits of the


counter, if the counter counts backward.
On

Synchronization is performed (only in


counting modes; image of STS_SYN
acknowledgement bit).
On

DO 1 is activated.
On

DO 2 is activated.
On

DI is activated.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-19

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.7

LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module

1SSI
LED display on the EM 1SSI:

6)

83

3 

'1

&03

Group error (red)

Status display for change in sensor value (green)

Status display for digital input (green)

Status display for result of comparison

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the EM 1SSI electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the EM 1SSI.
Event (LEDs)
SF

UP

DN

Cause
CMP

On

No parameterization.
Check the parameterization.
Diagnostic message present. Evaluate the diagnostic
message.
On

for transmitter value change


from small to larger
transmitter values (including
zero-crossing)
On

for transmitter value change


from larger to smaller
transmitter values (including
zero-crossing)
On

DI (latch) activated.
On

6-20

Action

Set for comparison result


CMP 1

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.8

LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module

1STEP 5V/204kHz
LED displays on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz:

6)

5()

5'<

326

Group error (red)

Status display for digital input REF (green)

Ready for positioning job (green)

Status display for digital input (green)

Positioning underway (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronic
module.
Event (LEDs)
SF

REF

RDY

Cause

Action

POS

On

No configuration or incorrect
module plugged in. Diagnostic
message present.
On

Check the
parameterization. Evaluate
the diagnostic message.

REF activated.
On

If parameters were assigned to the


module correctly and pulse enable
has been activated
On

DI activated.
On

If a positioning operation is running

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-21

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.9

LED displays on the 2PULSE electronic module

2PULSE
LED displays on the 2PULSE:

6)

Group error (red)

Status display for digital input (green)

Status display for the digital output (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 2PULSE electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 2PULSE electronic module.
Event (LEDs)
SF

On

Cause
8
No parameterization. Diagnostic
message present.

On

Action
Check the parameterization. Evaluate
the diagnostic message.

Input on the channel 0 activated.


On

Input on the channel 1 activated.


On

Output on channel 0 is activated.


On Output on channel 1 is activated.

6-22

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.10

LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and
1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules

1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog


LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog,
1POS SSI/Analog:
6)

83

'1



2
3 326



Group error (red)

Status displays for digital inputs (green)

Positioning underway (green)

Status display for a change in an actual value (green)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-23

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital,
1POS INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1POS INC/Digital,
1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules.
Event (LEDs)
SF

UP

DN

POS

Cause
13

Action

14

On

No parameterization.
Diagnostic message
present.
On

Check the
parameterization.
Evaluate the
diagnostic message.

In the case of actual value


change from lower to
higher values
On

In the case of actual value


change from higher to
lower values
On

Digital: the positioning runs


and one of the 3 digital
outputs is set.
Analog: the positioning
runs and on the analog
output a voltage not equal
to 0 V is output.
On

DI 0 is activated.
On

DI 1 is activated.
On

6-24

DI 2 is activated.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.11

LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module

1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modules


LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS:

6)

7;

5;

Group error (red)

Status displays for digital inputs (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial
interface modules
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and
1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modules.
Event (LEDs)
SF

TX

Cause

Action

RX

On

Hardware fault

Check the module.

Firmware error
Parameter assignment error

Check the parameter assignment.


Evaluate the diagnostics.

Wire break or loose cable between Check the wiring.


the module and the communication
peer1
Communication error
On

Check the communication settings.

The module is sending data via the


interface.
On

The module is receiving data via


the interface.

Only detected in the case of RS-422 interface connections when the default for the receive line is
set to R(A) 5V/R(B) 0V.
1

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-25

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.4.12

LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module

4 IQ-SENSE
LED on the electronics module 4 IQ-SENSE:

6)

2


Group error (red)

Status display for the input status (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module.
Event (LEDs)
SF

On

On

Cause

Action

6
No parameter assignment.

Check the parameter assignment.

There is a diagnostic message.

Evaluate the diagnostics.

Underrange of function reserve.

Adjust the reflection light barrier. Clean


the optical system. Replace the
sensor.

Teach-in operation is underway.

Terminate the teach-in operation.

Input on the channel 0 activated.


On

Input on the channel 1 activated.


On

Input on channel 2 is activated


On Input on channel 3 is activated

6-26

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.5

Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules

Actions after a diagnostic message in DPV0 mode


The error is entered in the channel-specific diagnostics in the diagnostic frame:
The SF LED on the interface module lights up.
Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible.

Actions after a diagnostic message in DPV1 mode


Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
Diagnostics can be reported as diagnostic interrupts in DPV1 mode.
After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is:
Entered in the diagnostic frame as a diagnostic interrupt block (always limited to one
interrupt)
Stored in the diagnostic buffer of the CPU
The SF LED on the interface module lights up.
OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the CPU goes to STOP mode.
Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).

See also
Channel-specific diagnostics (Page 6-40)

6.2.6

Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S

Introduction
In the case of certain process states/errors, the DP slave saves one interrupt block for each
process state or error containing relevant information in the diagnostic frame (DPV1 interrupt
mechanism). Independent of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is maintained in the
identifier-related diagnostics, the module status, and the channel-related diagnostics.

Interrupts in DPV0 mode


For DPV0 mode, no interrupts are defined based on the PROFIBUS standard. Thus,
interface modules do not trigger an interrupt in DPV0 mode.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-27

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Interrupts in DPV1 mode


The ET 200S supports the following interrupts:
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
Requirement: Alarms are only supported if you operate the interface modules IM151-1
STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0) (in the DPV1 mode), IM151-1 FO STANDARD
(after 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0) (in the DPV1 mode) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(in the DPV1 mode).
In case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the DP
master (see information on program design in the System Software for S7-300/ S7-400
programming manual).

Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt


For an arriving or outgoing event (e.g. wire failure) the module triggers for "enable:
diagnostic alarm" a diagnostic alarm.
The CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the OB82 diagnostic
block instead. The result that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start
information of OB82.

Evaluating hardware interrupts with STEP 7


When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program
and processes the OB40 hardware interrupt block instead.
The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of OB40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable. The figures below present the assignment to
the bits of the local data double word 8.
Hardware interrupts for 2DI 24 VDC High Feature and 4DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic
modules:
/%

/%

/%

       


/%

  

%LWQR
/'

5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO

',
',

5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO

Figure 6-6

6-28

Start information of the OB 40: which event has triggered process alarm for digital input
modules

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
Hardware interrupts for 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High
Speed electronic modules:
/%

/%

/%

/%

               


%LWQR
/'

/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHQRWPHW&KDQQHO
8SSHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO
/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO
8SSHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO

Figure 6-7

Start information of the OB 40: which event has triggered process alarm for analog input
modules

You will find a description of OB40 in the System and Standard Functions reference manual.

Triggering of an insert/remove-module interrupt


Insert/remove-module interrupts are supported in DPV1 mode. The CPU interrupts
processing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnostic block instead. The result
that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB83.

6.2.7

Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7

6.2.7.1

Reading out the diagnostics

Introduction
The slave diagnostics comply with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Depending on the DP
master, slave diagnostics can be read out with STEP 5 or STEP 7 for all DP slaves that
comply with the standard.

Length of the diagnostics frame


The maximum frame length for the ET 200S is as follows:
IM151-1 BASIC: 43 byte
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(DPV0 mode): 64 byte
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD (DPV1 mode): 110 byte
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (DPV1 mode): 128 byte
The minimum frame length is
6 bytes (identifier-related diagnostics, module status, and channel-specific diagnostics
disabled via parameter assignment).

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-29

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Options for reading out the diagnostics


The table below shows the options for reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5
on PROFIBUS DP.
Table 6-4

Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP


Block or tab in STEP 7

Application

"DP Slave Diagnostics"


tab

Slave diagnostics in plain text on


the STEP 7 user interface

"Diagnosing hardware" in

SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG"

Reading out slave diagnostics


(store in data area of the user
program)

For SFCs, refer to STEP 7

SFC 59 "RD_REC"

Reading out data records of the


S7 diagnostics (store in the data
area of the user program)

See the system and standard


functions reference manual

SFB 52

Read data records from the DP


slave

For SFBs, refer to STEP 7


online help (system
functions/system function
blocks)

SFB 54 "RALRM"1

Receiving interrupts from the


interrupt OBs

For SFBs, refer to STEP 7


online help (system
functions/system function
blocks)

SIMATIC S5 with IM308-C


as DP master

FB 192 "IM308C"

For FBs, refer to the ET 200


Distributed I/O System

SIMATIC S5 with the


S5-95U PLC as DP master

FB 230 "S_DIAG"

Reading out slave diagnostics


(store in data area of the user
program)

Automation system with DP


master
SIMATIC S7/M7

"RDREC"

Reference

STEP 7 online help

online help

manual

Only with S7-400 V3.0 or higher and with CPU 318 V3.0 or higher

Example of reading out slave diagnostics using FB 192 "IM308C"


Here, you will find an example of how to use FB 192 to read out the slave diagnostics for a
DP slave in the STEP 5 user program.
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 5 user program:
The IM308-C occupies as DP master the tiles 0 ... 15 (number 0 of the IM308-C).
The DP slave has PROFIBUS address 3.
The slave diagnostics are intended to be stored in DB 20. However, you can also use any
other data block for this.
The slave diagnostics consist of a maximum 64 bytes (IM151-1 STANDARD).

6-30

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
STEP 5 user program
STL

Explanation
: A

DB 30

: SPA

FB 192

Name

: IM308C

DPAD

KH F800

Default address area of the IM 308-C

IMST

KY 0, 3

IM No. = 0, PROFIBUS address of DP slave = 3

FCT

KC SD

Function: read slave diagnostics

GCGR

KM 0

Not evaluated

TYP

KY 0, 20

S5 data area: DB 20

STAD

KF +1

Diagnostic data from data word 1

LENG

KF -1

Diagnostic length = joker length (all permitted bytes)

ERR

DW 0

Error code stored in DW 0 of DB 30

Example of reading out S7 diagnostics with SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG"


Here, you will find an example of how to use SFC 13 to read out the slave diagnostics for a
DP slave in the STEP 7 user program.
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 7 user program:
The diagnostic address of the ET 200S is 1022 (3FEH).
The slave diagnostics should be stored in the DB82: starting at address 0.0, length 64
bytes.
The slave diagnostics consist of a maximum of 64 bytes
(IM151-1 STANDARD in DPV0 mode).
STEP 7 user program
STL

Explanation

CALL SFC 13
REQ

:=TRUE

Read request

LADDR

:=W#16#3FE

Diagnostic address of the ET 200S

RET_VAL

:=MW0

RET_VAL of SFC 13

RECORD

:=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 64

Data mailbox for the diagnostic in DB 82

BUSY

:=M2.0

Read operation runs over several OB1 cycles

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-31

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.7.2

Structure of the slave diagnostics

Structure of the slave diagnostics


The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics.

IM151-1 BASIC

IM151-1 STANDARD
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2

Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2

Station statuses 1 to 3

Byte 3

Byte 3

Master PROFIBUS address

Byte 4
Byte 5

Byte 4
Byte 5

High byte
Low byte

Byte 6
:
Byte 14

Byte 9

Byte 15

:
Byte 15

Byte 16

Module status

:
Byte 34

Byte 35

Byte 17

Byte 36

Byte 18

Byte 37

Byte 42

Byte 61

:
to max.
Byte 109/127

Identifier-related
Diagnostics

* **
max.
48 bytes

More information

Byte 6
:
Byte 8

Manufacturer ID

9 channel-specific diagnostics
(15 for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
in the DPV1 mode)
The channel-specific
diagnostics is variable from
0 to 27 byte. This depends on the
number of channel-specific
diagnoses.

Interrupts
(only 1 interrupt possible for each slave
diagnostic frame possible)

* These diagnoses can be disabled or enabled by parameter. If you


disable the diagnoses, they are removed from the diagnostic frame.
** Only in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO
STANDARD (6ES7 151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the
DPV1 mode.

Figure 6-8

6-32

Structure of the slave diagnostics

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Note
If you utilize the ET 200S in a redundant system, the slave diagnostics receive an additional
H status block.

Note
The length of the diagnostic frame varies:
For IM151-1 BASIC, between 6 and 43 bytes
For the IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(depending on the parameterization)
Between 6 and 62 bytes in DPV0 mode
Between 6 and 110 bytes in DPV1 mode (STANDARD)
Between 6 and 128 bytes in DPV1 mode (HIGH FEATURE)
For IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, between 6 and 62 bytes in DPV0 mode and between 6
and 128 bytes in DPV1 mode (depending on the parameter assignment).
You can see the length of the last received diagnostic frame in:
STEP 7 from the parameter RET_VAL des SFC 13.
STEP 5 from the parameter ERR of the FB 192.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-33

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.7.3

Station statuses 1 to 3

Definition
Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave.

Structure of station status 1(Byte 0)


Table 6-5
Bit

Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0)


Meaning

Cause/remedy

1: The DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP


master.

Correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave?


Bus connector connected?
Voltage at DP slave?
RS 485 repeater set correctly?
Reset carried out on DP slave?

1: The DP slave is not yet ready to exchange data.

Wait while the DP slave starts up.

1: The configuration data sent by the DP master to


the DP slave does not match the configuration of
the DP slave.

Correct station type or correct configuration of the DP


slave entered in the configuration software?

1: External diagnostics are available. (Group


diagnostic display)

Evaluate the identifier-related diagnostics, the module


status, and/or the channel-specific diagnostics. Bit 3 is
reset as soon as all the faults have been rectified. The bit
is reset when there is a new diagnostic message in the
bytes of the diagnostics indicated above.

1: The required function is not supported by the DP


slave (for example, changing the PROFIBUS
address by means of software).

Check the configuration.

1: The DP master cannot interpret the response of


the DP slave.

Check the bus configuration.

1: The DP slave type does not match the software


configuration.

Correct station type entered in the configuration software?

1: Parameters have been assigned to the DP slave


by a different DP master (not the one that currently
has access to the DP slave).

The bit is always 1, for example, if you access the DP


slave with the programming device or another DP master.
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master that assigned
parameters to the DP slave is located in the "master
PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte.

6-34

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1)


Table 6-6

Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1)

Bit

Meaning

1: Parameters have to be reassigned to the DP slave.

1: A diagnostic message is pending. The DP slave will not work until the fault has been
corrected (static diagnostic message).

1: The bit is always set to "1" in the DP slave.

1: Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave.

1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command 1.

1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command 1.

0: The bit is always at 0.

1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in progress.

The bit is updated only if another diagnostic message changes, too.

Structure of station status 3 (Byte 2)


Table 6-7

Structure of station status 3 (Byte 2)

Bit
0 to 6
7

6.2.7.4

Meaning
0: The bits are always at "0".
1:

There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can store.
The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostic messages sent by the DP slave in its
diagnostic buffer (channel-specific diagnostics).

Master PROFIBUS address

Definition
The master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte contains the PROFIBUS address of the
DP master that:
Assigned parameters to the DP slave and
Has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-35

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.7.5

Manufacturer ID

Structure
The manufacturer ID contains a code that describes the type of the DP slave.
The table below shows the structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5).
Table 6-8

Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5)

Byte 4

6.2.7.6

Byte 5

Manufacturer ID for

80H

F3H

ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC

80H

6AH

ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD

80H

6BH

ET 200S with IM151-1 FO STANDARD

80H

E0H

ET 200S with IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Identifier-related diagnostics

Definition
The identifier-related diagnostics indicate whether or not modules of the ET 200S have
errors/faults. The identifier-related diagnostics start at byte 6 and comprise:
3 bytes in the case of IM151-1 BASIC
9 bytes in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics


The identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the
IM151-1 BASIC interface module:

  
%\WH

 


 

%LWQR

  
/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHGLDJQRVLV
LQFOXGLQJE\WH E\WHV

&RGHIRU,'UHODWHGGLDJQRVWLFV

%\WH
%\WH

       

%LWQR

       
   

0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR

(YHQWVRQWKH
FRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOH
DUHLQGLFDWHGE\VHWELWV

$OZD\V

Figure 6-9

6-36

Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
The identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
modules:

%\WH

 


 

%LWQR

  
/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHGLDJQRVLVLQFOXGLQJE\WH
E\WHV

&RGHIRU,'UHODWHGGLDJQRVWLFV

%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH

      

%LWQR

0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR

   

 

       
       
       
 
 
 


 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

(YHQWVRQWKH
FRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOH
DUHLQGLFDWHGE\VHWELWV

$OZD\V

Figure 6-10

6.2.7.7

Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,


IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Module status

Definition
The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and expands on the
identifier-related diagnostics with regard to the configuration. The module status begins after
the identifier-related diagnostics and comprises:
7 bytes in the case of IM151-1 BASIC
20 bytes in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-37

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Structure of the module status


The module status for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-1 BASIC interface
module:

%\WH

  

      

%LWQR

/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHVWDWXV
LQFOXGLQJE\WH E\WHV
&RGHIRUPRGXOHVWDWXV

%\WH

+

6WDWXVW\SH0RGXOH6WDWXV

%\WH

+

LUUHOHYDQW

%\WH

+

LUUHOHYDQW

 
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH

     


%LWQR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR

%PRGXOH2.YDOLGXVHUGDWD
%PRGXOHHUURULQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
%LQFRUUHFWPRGXOHLQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
%QRPRGXOH RUPRGXOHIDLOXUH 
LQYDOLGXVHUGDWD

Figure 6-11

Structure of the module status for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC

The module status for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-1 STANDARD,
IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules:

6-38

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
  
%\WH

  

  

%LWQR

/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHVWDWXV
LQFOXGLQJE\WH E\WHV
&RGHIRUPRGXOHVWDWXV



+

%\WH

6WDWXVW\SH0RGXOH6WDWXV

%\WH

+

LUUHOHYDQW

%\WH

+

LUUHOHYDQW

 

 

 

 

%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH

DOZD\V

Figure 6-12

%LWQR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR

 %PRGXOH2.YDOLGXVHUGDWD
%PRGXOHHUURULQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
 %LQFRUUHFWPRGXOHLQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
%QRPRGXOH RUPRGXOHIDLOXUH 
LQYDOLGXVHUGDWD

Structure of the module status for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,


IM151 FO STANDARD, and IM151 HIGH FEATURE

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-39

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

6.2.7.8

Channel-specific diagnostics

Definition
The channel-specific diagnostics give information on channel faults of modules and expand
on the identifier-related diagnostics. The channel-specific diagnostics start after the module
status (if parameters are preset accordingly). The maximum length is limited by the
maximum total length of the slave diagnostics of 43/62 bytes in DPV0 mode or 110/128
bytes in DPV1 mode. The channel-specific diagnostics do not affect the module status.
A maximum of 9 (in DPV0/DPV1 mode) or 15 (in DPV1 mode with
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE) channel-specific diagnostic messages are possible.

Setup of the channel-specific diagnostics


The channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S are structured as follows with the
IM151-1 BASIC interface module:
   
%\WH

   

%LWQR

 
 %XSWR %0RGXOHVORWWKDWVHQGVWKH
FKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
&RGHIRUFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
   

   

%LWQR

%\WH
 %XSWR%1XPEHURIWKHFKDQQHOWKDWVHQGVWKHGLDJQRVLV
%,QSXWFKDQQHO
 %2XWSXWFKDQQHO
%,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO
   

   

%LWQR

%\WH
(UURUW\SH
&KDQQHO
W\SH

%\WHV
WR

Figure 6-13

6-40

%%LW
 %ELWV
%ELWV
 %%\WH
%:RUG
 %ZRUGV

1H[WFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJH
DVVLJQPHQWDVIRUE\WHVWR

Structure of the channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
The channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
modules:

%\WH

   
 

  

%LWQR

%WR%6ORWRIWKHPRGXOH
WKDWVXSSOLHVWKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
&RGHIRUFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
   

  

%LWQR

%\WH

%WR%1XPEHURIWKHFKDQQHOWKDWVXSSOLHVWKHGLDJQRVLV
%,QSXWFKDQQHO
%2XWSXWFKDQQHO
%,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO

   

  

%LWQR

%\WH
(UURUW\SH VHHIROORZLQJWDEOHV
&KDQQHOW\SH %%LW
%ELWV
%ELWV
%%\WH
%:RUG
%:RUGV

%\WH
WR

1H[WFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJH
DVVLJQPHQWDVIRUE\WHVWR

0D[E\WH
0D[E\WH
0D[E\WH

LQ'39PRGH,0,0)267$1'$5',0+,*+)($785(
LQ'39PRGH,0,0)267$1'$5'
LQ'39PRGH,0+,*+)($785(

Structure of the channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,


IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Note
The slot of the module is encoded in bits 0 to 5 of byte 16/35. Necessary: displayed number
+1 slot of the module (0 slot 1; 1 slot 2; 3 slot 4 etc.)
In bits 6/7 of byte 17/36, 00B is output if a power module reports a channel-specific
diagnostic.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-41

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Power module error types


The diagnostic message is reported on channel 0 and applies to the whole module.
The table below shows the error types on power modules
Table 6-9

Power module error types

Power module electronic


modules
PM-E 24 to 48
VDC/
120 to 230 VAC

PM-E 24 VDC

Error type

Remedy

17D

10001: Sensor or load


voltage missing

No supply voltage, or
inadequate supply
voltage.

Correct the process


wiring. Check the supply
voltage.

18D

10010: Fuse error

The fuse in the power


module has tripped.

Replace the fuse.

PM-E 24 to 48
VDC
---

Meaning

Digital electronic module error types


The table below shows the error types on digital electronic modules
Table 6-10

Digital electronic module error types

Digital electronic modules

Error type

Meaning

Remedy

2DI 24 VDC High Feature

1D

00001: Short-circuit

Short circuit of the


sensor supply. The
diagnostic message is
issued on channel 0
and applies to the
whole module.

Correct the process


wiring (sensor wiring).

4DI 24 VDC High Feature

1D

00001: Short circuit

Short circuit of the


sensor supply. The
diagnostic message is
issued on channel 0
and applies to the
whole module.

Correct the process


wiring (sensor wiring).

Line to the actuator


interrupted.

Correct the process


wiring.

No supply voltage, or
inadequate supply
voltage.

Correct the process


wiring. Check the supply
voltage.

Fuse triggered.

Replace the fuse.

(In conjunction with


IM151-1 BASIC / IM151-1
STANDARD,
6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0 or
higher,
IM151-1 FO
STANDARD,
6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0 or
higher) or IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE
26D

11010: External error


(In conjunction with
IM151-1 STANDARD, up
to 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0
or IM151-1 FO
STANDARD, up to
6ES7151-1AB00-0AB0)

4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature

6-42

26D

11010: External error

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
Digital electronic modules
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature

Error type

Remedy
Correct the process
wiring.

1D

00001: Short circuit

Short circuit of the


actuator supply to
ground.

6D

00110: Wire break

Line to the actuator


interrupted.

1D

00001: Short circuit

Short circuit on the


signal line to the
sensor.

Correct the process


wiring.

Sensor is defective.

Replace the sensor.

Wrong sensor type


assigned.

Parameterization
correction

Load impedance too


low.

Use a sensor with higher


impedance.

Signal line to a sensor


interrupted.

Correct the process


wiring.

Sensor is defective.

Replace the sensor.

Wrong sensor type


assigned.

Parameterization
correction

Load impedance too


low.

Use a sensor with higher


impedance.

Internal module error


occurred.

Replace the module.

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature

4DI NAMUR

Meaning

6D

00110: Wire break

9D

01001: Error

Sensor signal flutters.

Eliminate cause of error.

16D

10000: Parameterization
error

Parameter assignment
is faulty.

Correct the parameter


assignment.

26D

11010: External fault

Sensor error.

Replace the sensor.

Changeover contact
fault.

Correct the process


wiring.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-43

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Analog input module error types


The table below shows the error types on analog input modules
Table 6-11

Analog input module error types


Analog input modules

2AI U
High
Speed

2AI U Standard
2AI U High
Feature
2AI I 2WIRE
Standard

2AI TC
Standard

Error type
16
D

2AI TC
High
Feature

Meaning

10000:
Parameterization
error

not match with the


configuration.

4AI I 2WIRE
Standard

Parameterization
faulty.

2AI I 2WIRE High


Speed
2AI I 4WIRE
Standard

2AI RTD
Standard
-----

2AI RTD High


Feature
---

Correction of the
parameterization
(diagnostics wire failure
only for the allowed
measuring range
parameterized).

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error


has occurred
(diagnostic message
on channel 0 applies
to the whole module).

Replace the module.

7D

00111: Upper value


limit exceeded

Value is above the


overcontrol range.

Correct the
module/actuator tuning.

8D

01000: Lower value


limit fallen below

Value is below the


undercontrol range.

Correct the
module/actuator tuning.

6D

00110:
Wire break1

Line to the sensor


interrupted.

Correct the process


wiring.

21

10101:
Reference channel
error2

Error on the reference


channel

Check the reference


module
(2AI RTD Standard).

2AI I 2/4WIRE
High Feature
2AI I 4WIRE High
Speed

Remedy

Module cannot
Correction of the
evaluate parameter for configuration (adjust
the channel:
configured and actual
Inserted module does upgrade)

1 In the case of the 2AI RTD High Feature reference module, a wire break is reported for the measured-current and
constant-current lines of the sensor.
2 The

following applies for the modules 2AI TC ST and 2AI TC HF:


Reference channel error is not reported if the RTD module is not parameterized in the GSD file with the PT100 climate.
This applies to IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0 or higher), IM151-7 CPU and IM151-3 PROFINET IO
(6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 or higher).)

Analog output module error types


The table below shows the error types on analog output modules.

6-44

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
Table 6-12

Analog output module error types

Analog output modules


2AO U
Standard
2AO U
High
Feature

2AO I Standard

Error type
16D

2AO I High
Feature

Meaning

10000: Parameterization
error

Correction of the
Module cannot
evaluate parameter for configuration (adjust
configured and actual
the channel:
Inserted module does upgrade)
not match with the
configuration.
Parameterization
faulty.

---

Remedy

Correction of the
parameterization
(diagnostics wire break
only for the allowed
measuring range
parameterized).

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error


has occurred
(diagnostic message
on channel 0 applies
to the whole module).

Replace the module.

---

1D

00001: Short-circuit

Short circuit of the


actuator supply.

Correct the process


wiring.

2AO I Standard

6D

00110: Wire break

Line to the actuator


interrupted.

Correct the process


wiring.

2AO I High
Feature

1SSI error types


The table below shows the error types on 1SSI.
Table 6-13

1SSI error types


Error type

Meaning

Remedy

1D

00001: Short-circuit

Short circuit of the supply to the


absolute encoder.

Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: 01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

Load voltage from the power module is


too low.

Correct the process wiring. Check the


load voltage.

16D

10000: 10000: Parameter


assignment error

Parameters have not been assigned to


the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

26D

11010: 11010: External error

Start/Stop bit error (error absolute


encoder): Wire failure of the sensor
cable or sensor cable is not connected.
Sensor type, transmission rate, and
monoflop time do not correspond to the
sensor connected; programmable
sensors do not correspond to the
settings on the EM 1SSI electronic
module. Sensor is defective or there
are faults.

Replace the sensor; correct the


process wiring.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Correct the parameter assignment.

6-45

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types


The table below shows the error types on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module.
Table 6-14

1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types


Meaning

Remedy

1D

00001: Short-circuit

Error type

Short circuit of the sensor supply or the


actuator.

Check the wiring to the sensor. Correct


the process wiring.

5D

00101: Excess temperature

Digital output is overloaded.

Correct the process wiring.

6D

00110: Wire break

Line to the actuator interrupted.

Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

Load voltage from the power module is


too low.

Correct the process wiring. Check the


load voltage.

Parameters have not been assigned to


the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

16D

10000: Parameter assignment


error

1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types


The table below shows the error types on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module.
Table 6-15

1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types


Error type

Meaning

Remedy

1D

00001: Short circuit

Short circuit of the sensor supply or the


actuator.

Check the wiring to the sensor. Correct


the process wiring.

5D

00101: Excess temperature

Digital output is overloaded.

Correct the process wiring.

6D

00110: Wire break

Line to the actuator interrupted.

Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

16D

10000: Parameter assignment


error

Parameters have not been assigned to


the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

26D

11010: External error

Wire break/short circuit of the 5 V


sensor signals:
A, /A, B, /B, N, /N,

Correct the parameter assignment.

1STEP 5V/204kHz error types


The table below shows the error types on the 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module.
Table 6-16

1STEP 5V/204kHz error types


Error type

1D

Meaning

Remedy

00001: Short-circuit

Short circuit of the sensor supply.

Check the wiring to the switches.


Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

16D

10000: Parameter assignment


error

Parameters have not been assigned to


the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

6-46

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

2Pulse error types


The table below shows the error types on the 2PULSE electronic module.
Table 6-17

2PULSE error types


Error type

1D

Meaning

Remedy

00001: Short-circuit

Short circuit of the sensor supply or the


actuator.

Check the wiring to the switches and


actuators. Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

16D

10000: Parameter assignment


error

Parameters have not been assigned to


the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types
The table below shows the error types on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS
INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules.
Table 6-18

1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types
Error type

Meaning

Remedy

1D

00001: Short-circuit

Short circuit of the sensor supply.

Check the wiring to the sensor. Correct


the process wiring.

16D

10000: Parameterization error

Parameters have not been assigned to


the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

17D

10001: Load voltage 2L+


missing

applies only to 1POS INC/Digital and


1POS SSI/Digital: Power supply
voltage not present or too low.

Correct the process wiring. Check the


supply voltage.

26D

11010: external error

Wire break/short circuit of the sensor


signals.

Correct the process wiring.

Wire break in the sensor cable, or


sensor cable is not connected.

Replace the sensor.

Correct the parameter assignment.

Sensor is defective or there are faults.


Sensor type, transmission rate, and
monoflop time do not correspond to the
sensor connected; programmable
sensors do not correspond to the
settings on the module.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-47

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modules


The table below shows the error types on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial
interface modules.
Table 6-19

1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types


Error type

Meaning

Remedy

6D

00110: Wire break

Wire broken or disconnected.

Check the wiring to the terminals.


Check the cable to the peer.

7D

00111: Upper value limit


exceeded

Buffer overflow; message length


overflow

The P_RCV FB must be called more


frequently.

8D

01000: Lower value limit fallen


below

Message with a length of 0 sent1

Check why the communication peer is


sending frames without user data.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

16D

10000: Parameterization error

Parameters have not been assigned to


the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

22D

10110: Message error

Framing error, parity error

Check the communication settings.

EM 1SI: only for 3964(R)

4 IQ-SENSE error types


The table below shows the error types on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module.
Table 6-20

4 IQ-SENSE error types


Error type

1D

00001: Short-circuit

6D

00110: Wire break

Meaning

Remedy

Short circuit of the lines between the


electronic module and sensor

Check the wiring to the sensor. Correct


the process wiring.

Line to the sensor interrupted.

Correct the process wiring.

No sensor connected.

Connect the sensor.

Sensor does not respond.

Replace the sensor.

01000: Lower value limit fallen


below

Maintenance requirement (signal


quality <130%, function reserve),
sensor-dependent

Adjust the reflection light barrier.

9D

01001: Error

Communication error between the


electronic module and sensor

Replace the electronic module or the


sensor.

16D

10000: Parameterization error

Parameter assignment is faulty.

Correct the parameter assignment.

Inserted module does not agree with


the configuration.

Correct the configuration (align actual


and preset configuration).

Teach-in error (a new value could not


be determined/obtained)

Repeat teach-in.

8D

Clean the optical system.

Check the wiring.

Inserted sensor does not match


configured sensor.
26D

6-48

11010: external error

Function reserve lower limit violated


(signal quality <110%) or sensor error,
sensor-dependent

Correct the configuration, or insert a


different sensor type.
Adjust the reflection light barrier.
Clean the optical system.
Replace the sensor.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
Error type
27D

11011: Unclear error

6.2.7.9

Meaning

Remedy

Teach-in operation is underway.

Terminate the teach-in operation.

Alignment tool is active.

Close the alignment tool.

Interrupts

Introduction
The information in this section is applicable to the IM151-1 STANDARD
(6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO STANDARD
(6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher), and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules.

Definition
The interrupt section of the slave diagnosis provides information on the interrupt type and the
cause that led to the triggering of the interrupt. The interrupt section consists of a maximum
of 48 bytes.

Position in the diagnostic frame


The interrupt section comes after the channel-specific diagnostics (only in DPV1 mode).
Example: If 3 channel-specific diagnostics are pending, then the interrupt section starting at
byte 44

Data records
The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 44 bytes in length and is located in data
records 0 and 1:
Data record 0 (DS 0) contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current status of
an automation system. DS0 is part of the header information of OB82
(local data bytes 8 to 11).
Data record 1 (DS 1) contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in
data record 0 and, in addition, up to 40 bytes of module-specific diagnostic data.
You can read out DS0 and DS1 by means of SFC59 "RD_REC".

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-49

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Contents
The contents of the interrupt function depend on the interrupt type:
In the case of diagnostic interrupts, diagnostic data record 1 (up to 44 bytes) is sent as
the interrupt status information (starting at byte x+4).
In the case of process interrupts, the interrupt status information is 4 bytes in length.
For insert/remove interrupt, the length of the interrupt information is
5 byte for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)
0 Byte for IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher),
IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 or higher)

Structure of interrupts
If the configuration was performed with STEP 7, the interrupt data are evaluated and
transferred to the appropriate organization blocks (OBs).

6-50

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
The interrupt section for the ET 200S is structured as follows:
      


%\WH[

  

 

 

/HQJWKRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVHFWLRQLQFOE\WH[ PD[E\WHV
&RGHIRUGHYLFHVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
      

%\WH[

%'LDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW
 %3URFHVVLQWHUUXSW
%5HPRYHLQWHUUXSW
 %,QVHUWLRQLQWHUUXSW

,QWHUUXSW
W\SH

      


6ORWQXPEHUV

%\WH[

,0 67$1'$5'+,*+)($785( VHQGVLQWHUUXSW


WR6ORWRIWKHPRGXOHUHWXUQLQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
      
%\WH[

,QWHUUXSWVHTXHQFH
QXPEHU WR

'LDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW %DWOHDVWRQHHUURULVSHQGLQJ
 %JRLQJHUURU
%5HVHUYHG
3URFHVVLQWHUUXSW

 %

5HPRYHLQWHUUXSW

 %IRU,0+,*+)($785(
 (6%$$%
%IRU,067$1'$5',0)267$1'$5'
DQG,0+,*+)($785(
 (6%$$%
 %FRUUHFWPRGXOHLQVHUWHG
%ZURQJPRGXOHLQVHUWHG

,QVHUWLRQLQWHUUXSW

%\WH[WR

%\WH[

%\WH[

'LDJQRVWLFGDWD
FRQWHQWVRIGDWD
UHFRUG

3URFHVV
LQWHUUXSWGDWD

Figure 6-14

%\WH[
5HPRYHLQVHUWLRQLQWHUUXSWGDWDIRU
,0+,*+)($785(
(6%$$%
QRWZLWK
,067$1'$5'
,0)267$1'$5'DQG
,0+,*+)($785(
(6%$$%

Structure of the interrupt status of the interrupt section

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-51

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7

      
%\WH[

   

,QFRPLQJGLDJQRVLV%
*RLQJGLDJQRVLV %

0RGXOHSUREOHP LHHUURUGHWHFWHG
,QWHUQDOHUURULQPRGXOH
([WHUQDOHUURU0RGXOHQRWUHVSRQGLQJ
&KDQQHOHUURULQPRGXOH

      
%\WH[

 
0RGXOHFODVV
 %IRU,0 67$1'$5'+,*+)($785(
%IRUGLJLWDOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
%IRUDQDORJHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
 %IRUSURFHVVUHODWHGPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
%IRUSRZHUPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH DOZD\V
8VHULQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH DOZD\V



$OZD\V

%\WH[

%\WH[

Figure 6-15

6-52


$OZD\V

Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic interrupt of the modules


      
%\WH[


&KDQQHOW\SH
%+,QSXWFKDQQHO
&+2XWSXWFKDQQHO
'+3URFHVVUHODWHGPRGXOHPRWRUVWDUWHUSRZHUPRGXOHIDLOVDIHPRGXOH

%\WH[

/HQJWKRIWKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV

%\WH[

1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVSHUPRGXOH

%\WH[
'LDJQRVWLFHYHQWRQFKDQQHORIWKHPRGXOH
'LDJQRVWLFHYHQWRQFKDQQHORIWKHPRGXOH
'LDJQRVWLFHYHQWRQFKDQQHORIWKHPRGXOH
'LDJQRVWLFHYHQWRQFKDQQHORIWKHPRGXOH
%\WH[

 

    


6KRUWFLUFXLW

2YHUORDG
2YHUWHPSHUDWXUH
:LUHEUHDN
9LRODWLRQRIKLOLPLW
%\WH[

       
9LRODWLRQRIOROLPLW
(UURU

%\WH[

       
3DUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWHUURU
6HQVRURUORDGYROWDJHPLVVLQJ
)XVHGHIHFW
&RPPXQLFDWLRQSUREOHP
5HIHUHQFHFKDQQHOHUURU
0HVVDJHHUURU

%\WH[

       
$FWXDWRUVKXWGRZQ
6DIHW\UHODWHGVKXWGRZQ
([WHUQDOIDXOW
8QFOHDUHUURU

%\WH[WR[HUURUW\SHRQFKDQQHOVHHE\WHV[WR[
%\WH[WR[HUURUW\SHRQFKDQQHOVHHE\WHV[WR[
%\WH[WR[HUURUW\SHRQFKDQQHOVHHE\WHV[WR[

Figure 6-16

Structure starting at byte x+8 for diagnostics frame

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-53

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Example of a diagnostic interrupt


([DPSOH
7KH',HOHFWURQLFPRGXOHUHSRUWVWKHVKRUWFLUFXLWGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWRQFKDQQHO

%\WH[

      

   

 

/HQJWKRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVHFWLRQ E\WHV
      
%\WH[

  

   

'LDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW
       
%\WH[

  

 

 

6ORWQXPEHU

%\WH[

      

    

 

7KHUHLVDWOHDVWHUURU
,QWHUUXSWVHTXHQFHQXPEHU 

%\WH[

      

 

  

 

&KDQQHOHUURU

%\WH[

      

  

  

'LJLWDOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH
%\WH[DQG[DOZD\V

Figure 6-17

6-54

Example of a diagnostic interrupt

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
      
%\WH[

   

  

,QSXWFKDQQHO % +

%\WH[

       
       

/HQJWKRIWKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV ELWV

%\WH[

      

  

 

1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVSHUPRGXOH 
      
%\WH[

   

  
'LDJQRVWLFHYHQWRQFKDQQHO

%\WH[WR[ FKDQQHO
%\WH[WR[ FKDQQHO

%\WH[

      

     

%LW[ HUURUW\SHRQFKDQQHO VKRUWFLUFXLW

%\WH[WR[ FKDQQHO
%\WH[WR[ FKDQQHO

Figure 6-18

Example of a diagnostic interrupt (continued)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-55

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Process interrupt of digital input modules


      

%\WH[

5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
%\WH[[DQG[DOZD\V +

Figure 6-19

Structure starting at byte x+4 for process interrupt (digital input)

Process interrupt of analog input modules


      

%\WH[

/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO
8SSHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO

      

%\WH[

/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHQRWPHW&KDQQHO
8SSHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO

%\WH[DQG[DOZD\V +

Figure 6-20

6-56

Structure starting at byte x+4 and byte x+5 for process interrupt (analog input)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Insert/remove interrupt from IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (only 6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)


%\WH[
LUUHOHYDQW

%\WH[
%\WH[
    

 

6.),' 67(3

%\WH[

7\SH,'RIWKHPRGXOHKLJKE\WH

%\WH[

7\SH,'RIWKHPRGXOHORZE\WH

/HJHQG7\SH,'RIDUHPRYHGPRGXOH)&+ HPSW\VORW

Figure 6-21

Structure starting at byte x+4 for remove/insert interrupt

Byte x+4 to x+8 contains the identifier of the module that has been removed or inserted.
The interrupt type in byte x+1 indicates whether the modules have been removed or
inserted.

6.2.7.10

Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

Invalid configuration states


The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200S lead to station failure of the
ET 200S or prevent data exchange from occurring. These responses occur irrespective of
whether the IM parameters "Operation at preset <> actual configuration", "Replace modules
during operation", and "Startup when expected <> actual configuration" have been enabled.
Two missing modules
Terminating module missing
Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration
Module missing in slot 1 (in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0)
Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)

Note
Starting at IM151-1 BASIC / IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0),
IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: If one module is missing (gap)
and the ET 200S POWER ON is switched, then the station does not start up.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-57

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics
The following diagnostics can be used to identify all invalid configuration states:
Interface module

Identifier-related diagnostics

IM151-1 BASIC

All 12 bits set

IM151-1 STANDARD
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

All 63 bits set

6-58

Module status

01B: "Module error, invalid reference data" for all


modules (slots) up to cause of the malfunction
11B: "no module, invalid reference data" after
the cause of the malfunction

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

6.3

6.3

Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

6.3.1

Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS IO

6.3.1.1

Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFINET IO

Introduction
The IM151-3 PN interface module must be provided with a device name (see chapter on
installation).
Configuration involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.
Configuring: Systematic ordering of the individual ET 200S modules (setup).
Parameterizing: Determining the parameters from ET 200S with the configuration
software.

Note
The ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog of HW Config:
IM151-3 PN: STEP 7 V5.3 and Service Pack 1 or higher
The STEP 7 online help provides additional information on the procedure.

GSD file
You configure the ET 200S using the GSD file. This file enables you to integrate the
ET 200S in your system as an IO device. You can download the GSD file as follows:
On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd
The following GSD file is available for the IM151-3 PN interface module:
GSDML-V1.0-Siemens-ET200S-"Date in yyyymmdd".xml

6.3.1.2

Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software

Introduction
The instructions below describe how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 V5.3 Service
Pack 1 or higher.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-59

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software


To integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 into the configuration software, proceed as follows:
1. Start STEP 7, and select "Options > Install New GSD File" in HW Config.
2. In the next dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK."
Result: The IO device is displayed in the PROFINET IO directory in the hardware catalog.
3. Configure the ET 200S using STEP 7 (refer to STEP 7 integrated help).

6.3.1.3

Combine modules for the configuration

Introduction
The IM151-3 PN has a maximum address scope of 256 byte for inputs and 256 bytes for
outputs.
For a better utilization of the available address space of the IO controller, you can combine
multiple electronic modules/ load branches within a byte in the input or output area of the
system image. This occurs though a systematic arrangement and identification of the
ET 200S electronic modules/ motor starters.

Note
The combination is only possible with the IM151-3 PN after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 and
STEP 7 V5.3 SP 2.

You can find a specification of the required address space for individual modules in the
appendix.
You can combine the following device types within a byte:
Digital input modules
Digital output modules
Motor starters (direct starters and oscillating starters)
Optional other devices may be connected between combinable devices.
The combination procedure is identical to PROFIBUS DP.

6-60

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts


The combination of devices takes place during the configuration. By selecting a device label
without "*", you open a byte. By selecting a device with "*", you fill the byte until all bits are
occupied.
For the generation of insert/remove interrupts results in the following asymmetrical behavior:
%\WH[
0RGXOH 0RGXOH 0RGXOH
ZLWKRXW ZLWK
ZLWK


,IUHPRYHGWKHQRQO\WKHUHPRYHGPRGXOHZLOOIDLO
DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG
,IUHPRYHGWKHQDOOPRGXOHVWKDWDUHFRPELQHGLQWKLVE\WH
FDQQRORQJHUEHVXSSOLHGZLWKWKHUHIHUHQFHGDWD

Figure 6-22

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts

Further information
You can find further information on combining modules for the configuration in chapter
ET200S configuration on the PROFIBUS DP.

See also
Grouping modules for configuration (Page 6-4)

6.3.2

Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO

Software requirements
Table 6-21

Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO

Configuration software
used

STEP 7
Configuration software for
a different IO controller

Version
Version 5.3 Service
Pack 1 or higher

Notes
You use HW Config and the supplied GSD file.
You need the GSD file of ET 200S.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-61

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Requirements for commissioning


The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on
PROFINET IO:
IO device installed
IO device wired
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card inserted, IO device configured with device names
(configured and parameterized)
Supply voltage for the IO controller is switched on (see manual for the IO controller)
IO controller is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the IO controller)

Commissioning the ET 200S


To commission the IO device, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the voltage supply for the IO device (see relevant section in this manual).
2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.

Startup of the ET 200S

Switch on the supply voltage for


the IO device

IO device sets outputs to


"0" and accepts the
configured device name from the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
The "ON" LED comes on
"BF" LED flashes.
(with connection to the switch)
BF LED lights up
(without connection to the switch)

IO device receives
connect telegram and
parameter data
from IO controller

"BF" LED off;


inputs and outputs
enabled;
data transfer possible.

Figure 6-23

6-62

Startup of the ET 200S on the PROFINET IO

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Note
The IM151-3 PN interface modules support the default startup.
The following conditions then apply:
The preset parameters are used (refer to parameters for the electronic modules).
All supply voltages at the power modules must be switched on.

6.3.3

Diagnostics using LED display

Interface module
LED display on the interface module IM151-3 PN (front door opened):

6)

%)

21

/,1.

5;7;

(76

Group error (red)

Bus fault (red)

Supply voltage (green)


under the front door:

IO controller not available (green)

Data exchange (yellow)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-63

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on IM151-3 PN interface module


Table 6-22

Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN


LEDs

SF

BF

Meaning

Remedy

ON

Off

Off

Off

There is no voltage at the interface module, or


the interface module has a hardware defect.

Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 V


on the interface module.

On

There is voltage at the interface module.

Flashing On

Incorrect or no connect telegram - no data


exchange between the IO controller and the
interface module (IO device) takes place, but
the device is physically linked with a switch.

Causes:
Device name is incorrect
Configuration error
Parameter assignment error
*

On

On

The IO device is not linked with a switch

On

On

The designed configuration of the ET 200S


does not match the actual configuration.

Check the interface module.


Check the configuration and parameter
assignment.
Check the device name.
Assign a valid device name to the interface
module.

Establish a connection to the IO controller


(via a switch).
Assign a valid device name to the interface
module.
Check the bus configuration.
Check that the bus connector is correctly
inserted.
Check whether the bus cable to the IO
controller has been disconnected.

Check the configuration of the ET 200S to


determine whether a module is missing or
defective or whether an unconfigured module
is inserted.
Check the configuration (e.g., with STEP 7),
and correct the parameter assignment error.

There is an error in an I/O module, or the


interface module is defective.

Replace the interface module, or contact your


Siemens representative.

Incoming diagnostic
On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is


inserted.
The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
is full or does not have enough storage
space for the device name.
No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
is inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card from Siemens).

Data exchange is taking place between the IO


controller and the ET 200S.

Before switching on the power supply voltage,


insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
in the IM151-3 PN.

The preset configuration and actual


configuration of the ET 200S match.
On

On

Off

Flashing Off
0.5 Hz

6-64

Off

FW update is running
FW update successfully completed

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
LEDs
SF

BF

Meaning

Remedy

ON

On

Flashing Off
0.5 Hz

External error during FW update


(e.g., incorrect FW)

Use the proper FW for the update

On

Flashing Off
2 Hz

Internal error during FW update


(e.g., read/write error)

Repeat FW update

LINK

RX/TX

Off

Off

There is no connection to the switch/IO


controller
(no IO controller is available on the network)

On

Autonegotiation is complete and PROFINET


transmission rate is accepted

On

On

Transmission/reception is in progress

No uniform transmission rate


Autonegotiation not successful

* Not applicable

Power modules, electronic modules, technology modules


The use of LED displays for diagnostics for power modules, electronic modules, and
technology modules is the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.

6.3.4

Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules

Actions after a diagnostic message


Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
The SF LED on the interface module lights up.
Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible.
Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic interrupts and can be read using data records.
After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is stored in the diagnostic buffer of
the IO controller.
OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the IO controller goes to STOP mode.
Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).

Causes of errors and corrective actions


The causes of the errors and the correction actions to be taken when specific diagnostic
messages appear are described later on in this manual.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-65

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

6.3.5

Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S

Introduction
Interrupts are triggered by the IO device when certain errors occur. Interrupt evaluation
differs according to the IO controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with IO controller


The ET 200S supports the following interrupts:
Diagnostic interrupts
Process interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
In case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the IO
controller (see information on program design in the System Software for S7-300/ S7-400
programming manual).
You can obtain information on the cause of the error and the error type using the OB number
and the start information.
You can obtain detailed information on the error event in the error OB with SFB 54 RALRM
(read supplementary interrupt information)

Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt


When an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break) is registered , the module triggers a
diagnostic interrupt if "Enable: Diagnostic interrupt" is set.
The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB82 diagnostic
block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of
OB82.

Triggering of a process interrupt


When a process interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and
processes the OB40 process interrupt block. The event that caused the interrupt to be
triggered is entered in the start information of OB40.

Triggering of an insert/remove-module interrupt


The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnostic
block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of
OB83.

6-66

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Diagnostic "Process interrupt lost"


For the modules
2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0),
4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0 and
4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.

Note
If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.

6.3.6

Differences in the replacement value behavior

Replacement value behavior station granular with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0


If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 in the IO device, the following
replacement value behavior is displayed:
All output modules output their parameterized replacement values or 0 on their outputs.

Replacement value behavior slot granular starting with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0


If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 in the IO device, the following
replacement value behavior is displayed:
All outputs whose reference data companion are "Bad", output their parameterized
replacement values or 0 on their outputs.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-67

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

6.3.7

Diagnostics with STEP 7

6.3.7.1

Reading out the diagnostics

Options for reading out the diagnostics


Table 6-23

Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation system
with
IO controller
SIMATIC S7

6.3.7.2

Block or
tab in STEP 7

Application

Reference

In HW Config via
"Station > Open
ONLINE"

Device diagnostics in
form of plain text on
STEP 7 interface (in the
Quick View, Diagnostics
View, or Module
Information windows)

"Diagnosing hardware" in

SFB 52
"RDREC"

Reading data records


from the IO device

For SFBs, refer to STEP 7


online help (system

SFB 54
"RALRM"

Receiving interrupts from


the IO device

For SFBs, refer to STEP 7


online help (system

STEP 7 online help

functions/system function
blocks)

functions/system function
blocks)

Channel diagnostics

Definition
The channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. Each data
record contains 10 bytes.
Diagnostics can be read for all of the following: a submodule slot, a slot, the slots in a device
that are assigned to an IO controller, and a device. The determination is reached via the data
record number:

6-68

800AH

Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot

800BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)

800CH

Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)

C00AH

Channel diagnostics for a slot

C00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)

C00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)

E002H

Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO


controller assigned IO device

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
E00AH

Channel diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO


controller

E00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned


channel in an IO device (coming)

E00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned


channels in an IO device (coming and going)

F00AH

Channel diagnostics for a device

F00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)

F00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and


going)

AFF0H to
AFFFH

Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.

The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).

Structure of diagnostic data records


You can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO.
The data records that the ET 200S supports are based on the PROFINET IO - Application
Layer Service Definition V2.0 standard.
You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-69

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Channel diagnostics
The channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface
module:

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

      

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+
      

%\WHDQG
'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK
      

%\WHDQG
9HUVLRQ
      

%\WHDQG
6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
      

%\WHDQG
6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WHDQG

      

%LWQR

,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVRXUFH+6XEPRGXOH

%\WH

%LWQR

5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW

%\WH

 

      

%LWQR

%LWQR

%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+ELV)))+5HVHUYHG
+'LDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHIRUVXEPRGXOHLVSHQGLQJ
+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
+WR))))+5HVHUYHG

Figure 6-24

6-70

Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

      

%LWQR

%LWQR

%\WHDQG
&KDQQHOQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW


%\WH

%LWQR

5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
&KDQQHOW\SH
5HVHUYHG
,QSXWFKDQQHO
2XWSXWFKDQQHO
,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO


%LWQR

%\WH
&KDQQHOW\SH
+IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG
+%LW 
+'RXEOHZRUG
+ELWV
+GRXEOHZRUGV
+ELWV
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+%\WH
      

%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+5HVHUYHG 

+)XVHEXUQWWKURXJKWULJJHUHG
+6KRUWFLUFXLW

+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
+8QGHUYROWDJH

+*URXQGIDXOW
+2YHUYROWDJH
+5HIHUHQFHSRLQWQRORQJHUDYDLODEOH
+2YHUORDG 

+6DPSOLQJIDXOW
+7HPSHUDWXUHULVH

+7KUHVKROGYDOXHH[FHHGHGIDOOHQEHORZ
+:LUHEUHDN 

+2XWSXWVZLWFKHGRII
+8SSHUOLPLWYLRODWLRQ +6HFXULW\UHOHYDQWHUURU
+/RZHUOLPLWYLRODWLRQ $+H[WHUQDOHUURU
+(UURU


%+WR)+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
$+WR)+5HVHUYHG
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQW+WR)))+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
+3RZHUVXSSO\HUURU +WR))))+5HVHUYHG

Figure 6-25

Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN

The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnostic
message.

Error types of the other modules


The error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules,
and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-71

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

6.3.7.3

Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO

Incorrect configuration states


The following incorrect structure states of the ET 200S lead to a malfunction of the IO device
ET 200S or prevent the entry in the data exchange:
starting with 2 missing modules
Terminating module missing
Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration
Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)

Note
If one module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the IO device will not
start up.

6.3.7.4

Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus

Special diagnostics for bus interruption


If the ET 200S does not start up or data exchange is terminated, the cause can be a
defective terminal module. The defective terminal module causes the ET 200S backplane
bus to be physically interrupted.
The IM151-3 PN (slot 0) has a manufacturer-specific diagnostic consisting of 35 bytes for
locating a bus interruption. The module status and the identifier-related diagnostics are
mapped within this diagnostic, as is the familiar case with PROFIBUS DP.
An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus.
The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH is
available for this purpose.

6-72

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Composition of manufacturer-specific diagnostics


Content of manufacturer-specific diagnostics:

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

      

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+
      

%\WHDQG
'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK
      

%\WHDQG
9HUVLRQ
      

%\WHDQG
6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
      

%\WHDQG
6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WHDQG

      

%LWQR

,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVRXUFH+6XEPRGXOH

%\WH

%LWQR

5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW

%\WH

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

 

      

%LWQR

(UURUW\SH
+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV

Figure 6-26

Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on


PROFINET IO

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-73

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

      

%LWQR

%LWQR

%\WHDQG
&KDQQHOQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW


%\WH

%LWQR

5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
&KDQQHOW\SH
5HVHUYHG
,QSXWFKDQQHO
2XWSXWFKDQQHO
,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO


%LWQR

%\WH
&KDQQHOW\SH
+IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG
+%LW 
+'RXEOHZRUG
+ELWV
+GRXEOHZRUGV
+ELWV
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+%\WH
      

%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+5HVHUYHG 

+)XVHEXUQWWKURXJKWULJJHUHG
+6KRUWFLUFXLW

+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
+8QGHUYROWDJH

+*URXQGIDXOW
+2YHUYROWDJH
+5HIHUHQFHSRLQWQRORQJHUDYDLODEOH
+2YHUORDG 

+6DPSOLQJIDXOW
+7HPSHUDWXUHULVH

+7KUHVKROGYDOXHH[FHHGHGIDOOHQEHORZ
+:LUHEUHDN 

+2XWSXWVZLWFKHGRII
+8SSHUOLPLWYLRODWLRQ +6HFXULW\UHOHYDQWHUURU
+/RZHUOLPLWYLRODWLRQ $+H[WHUQDOHUURU
+(UURU


%+WR)+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
$+WR)+5HVHUYHG
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQW+WR)))+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
+3RZHUVXSSO\HUURU +WR))))+5HVHUYHG

Figure 6-27

Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the
PROFINET IO

The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnostic
message.

6-74

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

6.3.7.5

Failure of the load voltage of the power module

Failure of the load voltage


If there is a failure of the load voltage of the power module, electronic modules with their own
controller (including analog and technology modules) exhibit the following behavior:
If such a module is removed during the load voltage failure, a remove-module interrupt is
generated.
If such a module is inserted during the load voltage failure, the associated insert module
interrupt is generated once the load voltage is restored and the module has powered up.

Restoration of the load voltage


After the load voltage is restored and the electronic modules with their own controller are
powered up, the IM151-3 PN interface module reassigns parameters for these modules with
the saved startup parameters.

Note
If parameters have been reassigned for an electronic module with its own controller by
means of the user program, the reassigned data are no longer available after the load
voltage is restored.

6.3.7.6

STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device

Diagnostics after IO controller STOP


If diagnostics are reported by the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP mode, the
corresponding organization blocks are not started after startup of the IO controller. You must
create an image of the device state in OB100.

Diagnostics after restoration of the IO device


When an IO device is restored, you must use SFB 52 to read the E00CH data record. There,
you will find complete diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO
controller.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

6-75

Commissioning and Diagnostics


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

6-76

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

General technical specifications


7.1

7.1

Standards, certifications, and approvals

Introduction
The general technical specifications comprise the standards and test values met by the
ET 200S distributed I/O system, as well as the criteria used to test the
ET 200S distributed I/O system.

CE certification

The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and protection target/goals of
the following EC guidelines and matches the harmonized European standards (EN) that
were published for the memory-programmable controllers in the official journals of the
European communities.
73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment for Use within Fixed Voltage Ranges" (Low-Voltage
Directive)
89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the responsible authorities at the
following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
A&D AS RD ST Type Test
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Federal Republic of Germany

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

7-1

General technical specifications


7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals

UL approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with


UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval

Canadian Standards Association in accordance with


C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to


UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Industrial Control Equipment)
or

HAZ. LOC.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to


UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)

7-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

General technical specifications


7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
The motor starters ET 200S have no cUlus for HAZ. LOC.

Note
You can find the currently valid certificates and approvals on the type plate of each module.

FM approval

Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with


Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
The ET 200S motor starters are not FM-approved. All other modules of the ET 200S are
FM-approved.

In accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;


type of protection "n")
II 3 G EEx nA II T4 to T5

Warning
Personal injury and property damage can occur.
Personal injury and property damage can occur can occur in hazardous areas if you
disconnect plug-in connections while an ET 200S is in operation.
In hazardous areas, always deenergize the ET 200S before disconnecting plug-in
connections.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

7-3

General technical specifications


7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals

Warning
Warning Explosion Hazard
Substitution of components may impair the suitability for Class I, Div. 2.

Warning
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D or in non-hazardous
locations only.

Mark for Australia

The ET 200S distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

IEC 61131
The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and criteria of the standard
IEC 61131-2 (memory programmable controllers, part 2: equipment requirements and
verifications).

PROFIBUS standard
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.

Marine type approval


Classification organizations:
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Use in industrial environment


SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environment.

7-4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

General technical specifications


7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals
Table 7-1

Use in industrial environment

Area of application

Requirement for
Emitted interference

Industry

EN 61000-6-4: 2001 2001

Interference immunity
EN 61000-6-2 : 2001 2001

Use in residential areas


If you use the ET 200S in residential areas, you must ensure limit class B in accordance with
EN 55011 with respect to emission of radio interference.
Suitable measures for achieving a limit class B radio interference level are:
Installation of the ET 200S in grounded control cabinets/control boxes
Use of filters in supply lines

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

7-5

General technical specifications


7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

7.2

7.2

Electromagnetic compatibility

Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorily
in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this environment.
The ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the European Union's EMC
law, for example. This requires that the ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the
specifications and directives concerning electrical installation.

Pulse-shaped interferences
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system relative to pulse-shaped interferences.
Pulse-shaped interference

Tested with

Corresponds to severity

Electrostatic discharge

8 kV

3 (air discharge)

in accordance with
IEC 61000-4-2

4 kV

2 (contact discharge)

Burst pulses (rapid, transient


interferences) in accordance with
IEC 61000-4-4.

2 kV (supply line)
2 kV (signal line)

3
3

Surge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5


Only with lightning protection elements (see the DP master manual and
the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks description)

Asymmetrical interconnection

2 kV (supply line)
2 kV (signal line/data line)

Symmetrical interconnection

1 kV (supply line)

1 kV (signal line/data line)

7-6

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

General technical specifications


7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Sinusoidal interferences
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system relative to sinusoidal interferences.
RF radiation in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic RF field
Amplitude-modulated
80 MHz to 1000 MHz

Pulse-modulated
900 MHz 5 MHz

0.15 MHz to 80 MHz

50% ED

80% AM (1 kHz)

200 Hz repetition rate

150 source impedance

10 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)

RF coupling in accordance with


IEC 61000-4-6

10 Veff unmodulated

Emission of radio interferences


Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit class A,
Group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).
Frequency

Emitted interference

From 30 MHz to 230 MHz

< 40 dB (V/m)Q

From 230 MHz to 1000 MHz

< 47 dB (V/m)Q

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

7-7

General technical specifications


7.3 Transport and storage conditions

7.3

7.3

Transport and storage conditions

Transport and storage conditions


The ET 200S distributed I/O system surpasses the transport and storage requirements of
IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to modules that are transported and stored
in their original packaging.

7.4

7.4

Type of condition

Permitted range

Free fall

1 m

Temperature

From -40C to +70 C

Temperature change

20 K/h

Air pressure

From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m)

Relative humidity

From 5% to 95%, without condensation

Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Climatic environmental conditions


The following climatic environmental conditions apply:
Environmental conditions

Areas of application

Remarks

Temperature

From 0C to 60C

For horizontal installation

From 0C to 40C

For all other mounting positions

From 0C to 55C (see restrictions below)*

For vertical installation

Temperature change

10 K/h

Relative humidity

From 15% to a maximum of 95%

Without condensation

Air pressure

From 1,080 hPa to 795 hPa

Corresponds to an altitude of
-1,000 m to 2,000 m

Contaminant concentration

SO2: < 0.5 ppm;


rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation

Test:
10 ppm; 4 days
1 ppm; 4 days

* Restrictions for area of application: 0 to 55C, vertically mounted


This area of application (0C to 55C, vertically-mounted) is permitted for the following
modules only:
IM151-1 STANDARD: 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0
PM-E DC24V: 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
2DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0

7-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

General technical specifications


7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
2DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
4DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0
4DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0
2DO DC24V/0,5A ST: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0
2DO DC24V/0,5A HF: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
4DO DC24V/0,5A: 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0
2DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0
2DO DC24V/2A HF: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0
4DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0
2RO NO DC24..120V/5A AC24..230V/5A: 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0

Note
None of the supply and load voltages of the ET 200S are permitted to exceed 24 VDC.
This voltage limit must be ensured.

Mechanical environmental conditions


The mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the form of
sinusoidal vibrations.
ET 200S modules

Frequency range

All modules except motor starters 10 f 58 Hz


58 f 150 Hz

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Constant

Intermittent

0.15 mm amplitude

0.35 mm amplitude

2 g constant acceleration

5 g constant acceleration

7-9

General technical specifications


7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Testing mechanical environmental conditions


The following table provides information on the type and extent of tests for mechanical
environmental conditions.
Test for ...

Test standard

Terminal modules and electronic modules

Vibrations

Vibration test in
accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6

Vibration type: Frequency sweep with a rate of change of 1


octave/minute.
10 Hz f 58 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.35 mm
58 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 5 g
Vibration duration: 20 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3
mutually vertical axes

Shock

Repetitive shock

7-10

Shock, tested in
accordance with
IEC 60068-2-27
Shock, tested in
accordance with
IEC 60068-29

Type of shock: Half-sine


Strength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3
mutually vertical axes
Type of shock: Half-sine
Strength of shock: 25g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 1000 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3
mutually vertical axes

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

General technical specifications


7.5 Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S

7.5

7.5

Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of


protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S

Test voltage
Insulation resistance is demonstrated during the type test with the following test voltage in
accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with a rated voltage of Ue relative to
other circuits or ground

Test voltage

<50 V

500 VDC

<150 V

2,500 VDC

<250 V

4000 VDC

Pollution degree/overvoltage category in accordance with IEC 61131


Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category
When UN = 120/230 VAC: III
When UN = 24 VDC: II

Protection class
Protection class I in accordance with IEC 60536

Degree of protection IP 20
Degree of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all ET 200S modules, that is:
Protection against contact with standard test probes
Protection against foreign bodies with a diameter greater than 12.5 mm
No special protection against water

Rated voltage for operation


The ET 200S distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and corresponding
tolerances shown in the following table.
ET 200S modules

Rated voltage

Tolerance range

All modules except motor starters

24 VDC

20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC 1


18.5 VDC to 30.2 VDC 2

120 VAC

93 VAC to 132 VAC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)

230 VAC

187 VAC to 264 VAC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)

Static value: Generation as functional extra-low voltage with safety isolation in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41

Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g., at three-phase bridge rectifier

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

7-11

General technical specifications


7.6 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter

7.6

7.6

Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC


frequency converter

Variations in general technical specifications


The table below presents the variations in the general technical specifications for the
ET 200S FC frequency converter compared to the ET 200S.
Table 7-2

Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter


Section

Variations

Standards, certifications, and approvals

The frequency converter is not


cULus-approved for hazardous locations
FM-approved (Factory Mutual Research)
Marine type-approved

Transport and storage conditions

Free fall: 0.35 m

Climatic environmental conditions

Temperature for horizontal installation:


From 0 C to 60 C
Temperature for vertical installation:
From 0 C to 40 C

Mechanical environmental conditions


Rated voltage for operation
Use in Zone 2

7-12

See operating instructions for ET 200S FC


Frequency Converter (6SL3 298-0CA12-0xP0)
The ET 200S FC frequency converter is not
approved for use in hazardous area Zone 2.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.1

8.1.1

8.1

Parameters for interface modules

Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module

Overview
Table 8-1

Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module

IM151-1 BASIC

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Operation at Preset <> Actual


configuration

Disable/enable

Disable

ET 200S

Identifier-related diagnostics

Disable/enable

Enable

ET 200S

Module status

Disable/enable

Enable

ET 200S

Channel-specific diagnostics

Disable/enable

Enable

ET 200S

Format of analog values

SIMATIC S7/
SIMATIC S5

S7

ET 200S

Interference frequency
suppression

50 Hz / 60 Hz

50 Hz

ET 200S

Reference junction slot

None / 2 to 12

None

ET 200S

Reference junction input

RTD on channel 0/
RTD on channel 1

ET 200S

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-1

Interface modules
8.1 Parameters for interface modules

8.1.2

Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD


and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Overview
Table 8-2

Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and


IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

IM151-1 STANDARD/ HIGH


FEATURE

Value range

Default4

Applicability

DP interrupt mode

DPV0/DPV1

DPV0

ET 200S

Bus length

1m/>1m

1m

ET 200S

Operation at preset <> actual


configuration1

Disable/enable

Disable

ET 200S

Diagnostic interrupt3

Disable/enable

Disable

ET 200S

Hardware interrupt3

Disable/enable

Disable

ET 200S

Insert/remove-module interrupt2

Disable/enable

Disable

ET 200S

ID-related
diagnostics

Disable/enable

Enable

ET 200S

Module status

Disable/enable

Enable

ET 200S

Channel-specific diagnostics

Disable/enable

Enable

ET 200S

Option handling, general

Disable/enable

Disable

ET 200S

Option handling: Slot 2 to 63

Disable/enable

Disable

Module

Analog-value format

SIMATIC S7/
SIMATIC S5

S7

ET 200S

Interference frequency
suppression

50 Hz/60 Hz

50 Hz

ET 200S

Reference junction slot

None/2 to 63

None

ET 200S

Reference junction slot input

RTD on channel 0/
RTD on channel 1

ET 200S

Synchronize slave on DP cycle5 enable/disable

disable

ET 200S

Time Ti (read process values)5

Minimum/Maximum

Standard value

ET 200S

Time To (output process


values)5

Minimum/Maximum

Standard value

ET 200S

Note also the Option Handling parameter

In the GSD file, the default setting of the parameter is "Disable".

Parameter can only be assigned in DPV1 mode.

The default settings are applicable for the default startup (if no other parameters are specified by
the DP master).

5 Only

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

See also
Assigning parameters for option handling (Page 3-34)

8-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.1 Parameters for interface modules

8.1.3

Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module

Overview
Table 8-3

Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module


IM151-3 PN

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Bus length

1m/>1m

1m

ET 200S

Interference frequency
suppression

50 Hz / 60 Hz

50Hz

ET 200S

Reference junction slot

None / 2 to 63

None

ET 200S

Reference junction input

RTD on channel 0/
RTD on channel 1

ET 200S

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-3

Interface modules
8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules

8.2

8.2

8.2.1

Parameter description for the interface modules

DP interrupt mode

Note
This parameter only used for IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher),
IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.

Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable DPV1 operation of the ET 200S. If DPV1
operation is enabled, data records and interrupts are supported (can be assigned
parameters) by means of Class 1 and Class 2 services.
Requirement:
The DP master also support DPV1.

8.2.2

Bus length

Description
1 m: Default setting - the maximum bus length is 1 m.
> 1 m: The bus length of the ET 200S is > 1 m up to a maximum of 2 m. This setting will,
however, increase the response time of the ET 200S.

8.2.3

Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration

Description
If the parameter is enabled and:
Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure
of the ET 200S.
The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, the ET 200S remains
engaged in data transfer with the DP master.

8-4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules
If the parameter is disabled and:
Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the
ET 200S.
The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, there is no data transfer
between the DP master and the ET 200S. Exception: Option handling with RESERVE
modules.

8.2.4

Option handling, general

Description
Using this parameter you can enable or disable the option handling for the entire ET 200S.

8.2.5

Option handling: slots 2 to 63

Description
Using this parameter you can enable or disable the checking of the configuration.
Slots 2 to 63 are enabled: Instead of the configured electronic module you can also insert
a RESERVE module in the relevant slot without diagnostics being reported.
Slots 2 to 63 are disabled: Only the configured module can be located on the relevant
slot. RESERVE modules are treated as incorrect modules. Depending on the setting of
the "Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration" parameter, the ET 200S will either fail
or remain in data transfer.

8.2.6

Diagnostic interrupt

Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts
are supported
On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode.
On PROFINET IO.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-5

Interface modules
8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules

8.2.7

Hardware interrupt

Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable hardware interrupts. Hardware interrupts are
supported
On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode.
On PROFINET IO.

8.2.8

Insert/remove-module interrupt

Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable insert/remove-module interrupts.
Insert/remove-module interrupts are supported
On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode.
On PROFINET IO.

8.2.9

Analog-value format

Description
Here you set the number format for all analog electronic modules.

8.2.10

Interference frequency suppression

Description
The frequency of your alternating voltage system can affect measured values negatively,
particularly in the case of both measurements in small voltage ranges and thermocouples.
Specify here the dominant line frequency in your system (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
The interference frequency suppression parameter is valid for all analog electronic modules.
The integration time and conversion time of the individual modules are also set by means of
this parameter. See the technical specifications of the analog electronic modules.

8-6

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules

8.2.11

Reference junction slot

Description
This parameter allows you to assign a slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the channel for
measuring the reference temperature is located (calculation of the compensation value).

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-8)

8.2.12

Reference junction input

Description
This parameter allows you to set the channel (0/1) for measuring the reference temperature
(calculation of the compensation value) for the assigned slot.

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-8)

8.2.13

Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle

Description
You can use this parameter to enable or disable isochronous operation.
If you enable isochronous operation, the I/O of the ET 200S are synchronized with the global
control frame of the master (as an equidistance cycle).

8.2.14

Time Ti (read in process values)

Description
This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP
cycle" parameter.
Ti is the time reserved for reading in the input data at the ET 200S. At the beginning of Ti,
the input data is converted at the terminals and stored in a buffer via the backplane bus of
the ET 200S. Ti ends at the beginning of the next, equidistant DP cycle (i.e. with the global
control frame).

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-7

Interface modules
8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules
At this point, the most recent, most up-to-date input data must be available to be read in on
the PROFIBUS subnet. The time Ti must take into account the processing and delay times in
the modules and in the backplane bus of the ET 200S and, in the case of modular slaves, is
therefore dependent on the configuration.
The time Ti can only be set in the specified increments between the minimum and maximum
values. Normally, the default values should be accepted.

8.2.15

Time To (output process values)

Description
This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP
cycle" parameter.
The end of the To time is the point at which the output data is switched to the module
terminals in its converted form. The time To includes the following:
Distribution of the output data via the PROFIBUS DP bus system to the slaves
(= cyclic master- slave data exchange)
Distribution of the output data to the modules via the backplane bus of the slave
Conversion and transfer of the output data to the output terminals of the module
To starts with the arrival of the global control frame. Like Ti, the time can be set only in the
specified increments between the minimum and maximum values displayed. Normally, you
should accept the default values.

8-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)

8.3

8.3

IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0

Features
The IM151-1 BASIC interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface.
It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.
It supplies the backplane bus.
The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches.
If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 BASIC interface module is also
disconnected.
The maximum address space is 88 bytes for inputs and 88 bytes for outputs.
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 BASIC to the rail
(protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an
ungrounded configuration.
Operation as a DPV0 slave
A maximum of 12 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 BASIC.
The maximum bus length is not relevant.

Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module
for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:
Table 8-4

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module


View






Signal name







Designation

RxD/TxD-P

Data line B

RTS

Request To Send

M5V2

Data reference potential (station)

P5V2

Supply plus (station)

RxD/TxD-N

Data line A

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-9

Interface modules
8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)
View
/ / 0 0

Signal name

Designation

1L+

24 VDC

2L+

24 VDC (for loop through)

1M

Chassis ground

2M

Ground (for loop through)

Block diagram

6)

%)

21

(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ

352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQ
$
$
%
%

%DFNSODQHEXV

(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

352),%86
DGGUHVV
,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\

Figure 8-1

8-10

 3
 3
 3
 3

Block diagram for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimension W x H x D (mm)

45 x 119.5 x 75

Weight

Approx. 150 g
Data for specific modules

Transmission rate

9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6;


12 Mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

RS 485

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

80F3H

Direct data exchange

Yes

Isochronous operation

No

Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP


interface (5, 6)

80 mA

Voltages, currents, potentials


Rated supply voltage of the electronic
components (1L+)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Power failure bypass

No

Isolation

Between the backplane bus and electronic


components

No

Between the PROFIBUS DP and electronic


components

Yes

Between the supply voltage and electronic


components

No

Permitted potential difference (to the rail)

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption from rated supply voltage


(1L+)

Approx. 70 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 1.5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

None

Diagnostic function

Yes

Group error
PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LED


red "BF" LED

Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the


electronics

Green "ON" LED

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-11

Interface modules
8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

8.4

8.4

IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0

Features
The IM151-1 STANDARD interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface.
It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.
It supplies the backplane bus.
The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches.
Switching off the DC 24 V power supply voltage also switches off the interface module
IM151-1 STANDARD.
The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs.
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 STANDARD to the
rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting
an ungrounded configuration.
Operation as a DPV0 slave
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 STANDARD.
The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set).
Supports option handling and status byte for power modules.
Additional features as compared to the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (up to
6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0):
Operation as a DPV1 slave
Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):
Class 2 services and class 1 services
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
Identification data

8-12

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface
module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:
Table 8-5

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module


View

Signal name












Designation

RxD/TxD-P

Data line B

RTS

Request To Send

M5V2

Data reference potential (station)

P5V2

Supply plus (station)

RxD/TxD-N

Data line A

9
/ / 0 0

1L+

24 VDC

2L+

24 VDC (for loop through)

1M

Chassis ground

2M

Ground (for loop through)

Block diagram
6)

%)

21

(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ

352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQ
$
$
%
%

%DFNSODQHEXV

(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

352),%86
DGGUHVV

,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\

Figure 8-2

 3
 3
 3
 3

Block diagram for the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-13

Interface modules
8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimension W x H x D (mm)

45 x 119.5 x 75

Weight

Approx. 150 g
Data for specific modules

Transmission rate

9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6;


12 Mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

RS 485

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

806AH

Direct data exchange

Yes

Isochronous operation

No

Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP


interface (5, 6)

80 mA

Voltages, currents, potentials


Rated supply voltage of the electronic
components (1L+)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Power failure bypass

Min. 20 ms

Isolation

Between the backplane bus and


electronic components

No

Between the PROFIBUS DP and


electronic components

Yes

Between the supply voltage and


electronic components

No

Permitted potential difference (to the rail)

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption from rated supply


voltage (1L+)

Approx. 200 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 3.3 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

8-14

Interrupts

yes

Diagnostic function

yes

Group error
PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LED

Monitoring of the power supply voltage of


the electronics

Green "ON" LED

Red "BF" LED

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 STANDARD


With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-1 STANDARD (via accessible nodes).
To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
The IM151-1 STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be
accessible online.
The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your
programming device (PG)/PC.
You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note
We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-15

Interface modules
8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)

8.5

8.5

IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0

Features
The IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the fiber-optic cable interface
It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.
It supplies the backplane bus.
The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches.
If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface
module is also disconnected.
The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs.
The reference potential M of the supply voltage of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD to the rail
(protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an
ungrounded configuration.
Operation as a DPV0 slave
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 FO STANDARD.
The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set).
Supports option handling and status byte for power modules.
Additional characteristics compared to the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD
(up to 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0):
Operation as a DPV1
Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):
Class 2 services and class 1 services
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
insert/remove interrupts
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
Identification data

8-16

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)

Terminal assignment
In the following table you will find the terminal assignment of the interface module
IM151-1 FO STANDARD for the DC 24V power supply and PROFIBUS DP with fiber optic
interface:
Table 8-6

Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD


View

5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV

Signal name

Designation

5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV

)LEHURSWLFLQWHUIDFH

7UDQVPLWWHU

7UDQVPLWWHU

/ / 0 0

1L+

24 VDC

2L+

24 VDC (for loop through)

1M

Chassis ground

2M

Ground (for loop through)

Block diagram
352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQ ILEHURSWLFV
6)

%)

21

%DFNSODQHEXV

(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

352),%86
DGGUHVV
,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\

Figure 8-3

$
%
$
%

)LEHU
RSWLF
LQWHUIDFH

 3
 3
 3
 3

Block diagram for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-17

Interface modules
8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

45 119.5 75

Weight

Approx. 150 g
Data for specific modules

Transmission rate

9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps,


1.5; 12 mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

Fiber-optic cable

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

806BH

Direct data exchange

Yes

Isochronous operation

No
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage of the electronic


components (1L+)1

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Power failure bypass

Min. 20 ms

Isolation

Between the backplane bus and electronic


components

No

Between the supply voltage and electronic


components

No

Current consumption from rated supply voltage


(1L+)

Power supply for the ET 200S backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Approx. 200 mA
Max. 700 mA
Typ. 3.3 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

8-18

Interrupts

yes

Diagnostic function

yes

Group error
PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LED


red "BF" LED

Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the


electronics

Green "ON" LED

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)

Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD


With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-1 FO STANDARD (via accessible nodes).
To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
The IM151-1 FO STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be
accessible online.
The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your
programming device (PG)/PC.
You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note
We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-19

Interface modules
8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

8.6

8.6

Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0

Features
The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module has the following features:
Links the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.
prepares the data for the populated electronic modules and motor starters.
Supplies the backplane bus.
synchronizable with the DP cycle (cycle synchronization).
Via switch, the PROFIBUS DP address is adjustable from ET 200S.
If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
module is also disconnected.
The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs.
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE to
the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus
permitting a floating configuration.
Operation as a DPV0 slave
Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):
Class 2 services
Operation as a DPV1 slave
Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):
Class 2 services and class 1 services
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.
6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 and higher:
The maximum bus length on the backplane bus amounts to 2 m.
Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y switching
Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication via PROFIBUS DP. You saw the
description of this function in the manual S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and
Programming.
Use of fault-secure RESERVE modules
Supports option handling and status byte for power modules
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP with HW config possible.
Identification Data

8-20

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE
The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE:
Module

Up to order number

Up to product version

1Count 24V/100kHz

6ES7138-4DA02-0AB0

1Count 5V/500kHz

6ES7138-4DE00-0AB0

1SSI

6ES7138-4DB00-0AB0

1STEP 5V/204kHz

6ES7138-4DC00-0AB0

1SI serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0

Modbus/USS serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0

2AI U; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0

2AI I 2/4DMU; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0

2AO U; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7135-4LB00-0AB0

Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:
Table 8-7

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module


View






Signal name







Designation

1 -

2 -

3 RxD/TxD-P

Data line B

4 RTS

Request To Send

5 M5V2

Data reference potential (station)

6 P5V2

Supply plus (station)

7 -

8 RxD/TxD-N

Data line A

9
/ / 0 0

1L+

24 VDC

2L+

24 VDC (for loop through)

1M

Chassis ground

2M

Ground (for loop through)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-21

Interface modules
8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

Block diagram

6)

%)

21

(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ

352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQ
$
$
%
%

%DFNSODQHEXV

(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

352),%86
DGGUHVV
 3
 3
 3
 3

,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\

Figure 8-4

Block diagram for the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

45 119.5 75

Weight

Approx. 150 g
Data for specific modules

Transmission rate

9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps, 1.5; 3; 6;


12 Mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

RS 485

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

80E0H

Direct data exchange

Yes

Isochronous operation

Yes1

Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP


interface (5, 6)

80 mA

Voltages, currents, potentials


Rated supply voltage of the electronic
components (1L+)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Power failure bypass

Min. 20 ms

Isolation

8-22

Between the backplane bus and


electronic components

No

Between the PROFIBUS DP and


electronic components

Yes

Between the supply voltage and


electronic components

No

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
Permitted potential difference (to the rail)

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption from rated supply


voltage (1L+)

Approx. 200 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 3.3 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

Yes

Diagnostic function

Yes

Group error
PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LED

Monitoring of the power supply voltage of


the electronics

Green "ON" LED

Red "BF" LED

As of 1.5 Mbps

Update of firmware for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE


As of STEP 7 V5.1, ServicePack 3, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.
To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the station whose firmware is to be updated is
accessible online.
The files with the current firmware version are available in the file system of your
programming device (PG)/PC.
You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note
Be sure to use the correct firmware version for the interface module you are using for the
update. An interface module with an older issue date can not be updated with the firmware
version for an interface module with a newer issue date and vice versa.

Note
We recommend you update the firmware using PROFIBUS DP.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-23

Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

8.7

8.7.1

8.7

Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module

Order number
6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0

Features
The IM151-3 PN interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS IO
It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.
It supplies the backplane bus.
Adoption of the device name and backup on SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Firmware update via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-3 PN to the mounting
rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting
an ungrounded configuration.
Supported Ethernet services
Network diagnostics (SNMP)
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
The maximum address scope amounts to 256 byte I/O data.
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-3 PN.
The maximum bus length on the backplane bus is 2 m.
Summary of modules within a byte (packing).
Data sets for I/O devices

8-24

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Compatibility of the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)


Note
Firmware version of the controller used
In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware
versions listed in the tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) independently of the controller firmware version.

The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0):
CPU
Controller

CP

SOFTNET PNIO

315-2 PN/DP
317-2 PN/DP

443-1

343-1

SIMATIC NET-CD

V2.3.2

V2.2

2.0

V 6.3 Hotfix 1

Firmware version

Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 PN


The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151-3 PN:
Module

Up to order number

Up to product version

2AO U; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0

2AO I; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0

1SI serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0

Modbus/USS serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-25

Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module for
the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFINET IO:
Table 8-8

Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module


View
6KLHOG

/ / 0 0

Signal name

Designation

1 TD

Transmit Data +

2 TD_N

Transmit Data

3 RD

Receive Data +

4 GND

Ground

5 GND

Ground

6 RD_N

Receive Data

7 GND

Ground

8 GND

Ground

1L+

24 VDC

2L+

24 VDC (for loop through)

1M

Chassis ground

2M

Ground (for loop through)

Block diagram
,VRODWLRQ
/,1.

5;7;

6)

%)

21

%DFNSODQHEXV

(OHFWURQLFFRPSRQHQWV

8-26

5-

P&
6,0$7,&0LFUR
0HPRU\&DUG

,QWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 8-5

352),1(7
FRQQHFWLRQ

 3
 3
 3
 3

Block diagram for the IM151-3 PN interface module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

45 x 119.5 x 75

Weight

Approx. 135 g
Data for specific modules

Transmission rate

100 Mbps full duplex

Transmission method

100BASE-TX

Autonegotiation

Yes

Bus protocol

PROFINET IO + TCP/IP

Supported Ethernet services

PROFINET IO (device),
TCP/IP Protocol Suite:
ping
arp
Network diagnostics (SNMP) / MIB-2

PROFINET interface

RJ45

Vendor ID

002AH

Device ID

0301H
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage of the electronic


components (1L+)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Power failure bypass

Min. 20 ms

Isolation

Between the backplane bus and electronic


components

No

Between Ethernet and electronic components

Yes

Between the supply voltage and electronic


components

No

Permitted potential difference (to the rail)

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption from rated supply voltage


(1L+)

Approx. 200 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Approx. 2 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

Yes

Diagnostic function

Yes

Group error
PROFINET IO bus monitoring

Red "SF" LED

Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the


electronics

Green "ON" LED

Existing connection to network

Green "LINK" LED

Send/receive via network

Yellow "RX/TX" LED

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Red "BF" LED

8-27

Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

8.7.2

SNMP
The IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/W
objects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device.
Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 and
higher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" button
under "Reset to default settings".
After exchange with a factory-new device, the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set to
default settings.

8.7.3

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN

Insertion of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card


A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is used as storage medium for the IM151-3 PN. The
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be used as a portable data medium..
The following data are saved on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
Technology data (device names)
Data for a firmware update

Note
On one SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, you can save either technology data or update
data.

Life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card


The life of an SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends substantially on the following factors:
Number of deletion or programming operations
External factors, such as ambient temperature
At an ambient temperature up to 60 C, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has a useful life of
10 years at maximum 100,000 write/delete operations.

Caution
Possible data loss
If the maximum number of write/delete operations is exceeded, data loss is possible.

8-28

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Applicable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards


The following memory modules are available for use:
Table 8-9

Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards


Type

Order numbers

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k

6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 128k

6ES7953-8LG11-0AA0

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 512k

6ES7953-8LJ11-0AA0

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 2M

6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 4M

6ES7953-8LM11-0AA0

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 8M

6ES7953-8LP11-0AA0

For storage of the device name, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k sufficient. For a
firmware update the SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards with 2 MB or higher are required.

Inserting/replacing the card


The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card designed so that it can also be removed and inserted
under power. The beveled corner of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card prevents it from being
inserted the wrong way around (reverse polarity protection).
The module slot on the IM 151-3 PN is located behind the front door. The front door has a
protruding edge for opening.
The socket of the module slot has an ejector enabling you to remove the card. To eject the
card, push in the ejector with a small screwdriver or ball-point pen.
Position of the module slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card on the IM151-3 PN:

2
3

(6/[$$
6,(0(16

6,0$7,&

0LFUR
0HPRU\
&DUG

(76

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Module slot

Ejector

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

8-29

Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

8.7.4

Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN

Introduction
Starting with STEP 7 V5.3, Service Pack 1, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-3 PN.
You receive three files (*.upd) with the current firmware for the update of the firmware.
For performing the update use the file "header.upd".

Procedure
You perform the firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update.
1. Transfer the update files using STEP 7 and your programming device to an empty
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ( 2 MB).
2. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with
FW update.
3. Switch on the power.
IM151-3 PN recognizes the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the FW update
automatically and starts the FW update. During the FW update, the SF and BF LEDs are
illuminated, and the ON LED is off.
Once the FW update is complete, the BF LED flashes at 0.5 Hz.
4. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
with FW update.
5. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the device names and switch on the power
supply again.
The IM 151-3 PN powers up with the new firmware and is now ready for operation.

8-30

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.1

9.1

Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic


modules

Assignment of the terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules


The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different power
modules:
Table 9-1

Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules

Power modules

TM-P terminal modules for power modules

Screw terminal

15S23-A1

15S23-A0

15S22-01

30S44-A0

F30S47-F1

Order number
6ES7193...

4CC20-0AA0

4CD20-0AA0

4CE00-0AA0

4CK20-0AA0

3RK1 903-3AA00

Spring terminal

15C23-A1

15C23-A0

15C22-01

30C44-A0

---

Order number
6ES7193...

4CC30-0AA0

4CD30-0AA0

4CE10-0AA0

4CK30-0AA0
---

Fast Connect

15N23-A1

15N23-A0

15N22-01

Order number
6ES7193...

4CC70-0AA0

4CD70-0AA0

4CE60-0AA0

PM-E 24 VDC

PM-E 24 to 48
VDC

PM-E 24-48 VDC/


120-230 VAC

PM-E F pm 24
VDC
PROFIsafe*

PM-E F pp 24
VDC
PROFIsafe*

PM-D F 24 VDC
PROFISafe *

* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different
terminal modules:

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-1

Terminal modules
9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules
Table 9-2

Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules

Electronic modules
Screw terminal
Order number
6ES7193...

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules


15S26-A1
4CA400AA0

15S24-A1
4CA200AA0

15S24-01
4CB200AA0

15S23-01
4CB000AA0

15S24-AT
4CL200AA0

30S44-01
4CG200AA0

30S46-A1
4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1

Order number
6ES7193...

4CA500AA0

4CA300AA0

4CB300AA0

4CB100AA0

4CL300AA0

4CG300AA0

4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---

Order number
6ES7193...

4CA800AA0

4CA700AA0

4CB700AA0

4CB600AA0

4DI UC24..48V HF

4DI NAMUR

2DI 120 VAC Standard

2DI 230 VAC Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard

2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A

2RO NO 24 to 120
VDC/5 A 24 to 230
VAC/5 A

2DI 24 VDC Standard


2DI 24 VDC High
Feature
4DI 24 VDC Standard
4DI 24 VDC High
Feature
4DI 24 VDC/SRC
Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
High Feature
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A
Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High
Feature
4DO 24 VDC/2 A
Standard

2RO NO/NC 24 to 48
VDC/5 A 24 to 230
VAC/5 A
2AI U Standard
2AI U High Feature
2AI U High Speed
2AI I 2WIRE Standard
2AI I 2WIRE High
Speed

9-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules
Electronic modules
Screw terminal
Order number
6ES7193...

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules


15S26-A1
4CA400AA0

15S24-A1
4CA200AA0

15S24-01
4CB200AA0

15S23-01
4CB000AA0

15S24-AT
4CL200AA0

30S44-01
4CG200AA0

30S46-A1
4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1

Order number
6ES7193...

4CA500AA0

4CA300AA0

4CB300AA0

4CB100AA0

4CL300AA0

4CG300AA0

4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---

Order number
6ES7193...

4CA800AA0

4CA700AA0

4CB700AA0

4CB600AA0

4AI I 2WIRE Standard

2AI 2/4WIRE High


Feature

2AI I 4WIRE Standard,


2AI I 4WIRE High
Speed

2AI RTD Standard

2AI RTD High Feature

2AI TC Standard

2AI TC High Feature


2AO U Standard

2AO U High Feature


2AO I Standard

2AO I High Feature


4 IQ-SENSE

1COUNT 24V/100kHz

1SSI

1STEP 5V/204kHz

2PULSE

1COUNT 5V/500kHz

1POS INC/Digital

1POS SSI/Digital

1POS INC/Analog

1POS SSI/Analog

1SI 3964/ASCII

1SI Modbus/USS

4/8 F-DI 24 VDC


PROFIsafe*

4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A
PROFIsafe*

RESERVE (width 15
mm)

RESERVE (width 30
mm)

* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-3

Terminal modules
9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)

9.2

9.2

TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal


modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features
Terminal module for power module
Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A1
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A1
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A1
2 x 3 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1,
and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules:
Table 9-3

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1


terminal modules
View

Terminal
2 L+/L

AUX1
A A
4 8

L+/L
2

M/N
AUX1 A
4

9-4

L+/L

Designation

3 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted power module


and associated potential group

A AUX1
4

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the


maximum rated load voltage of the module

6 L+/L
7 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted power module


and associated potential group

A AUX1
8

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the


maximum rated load voltage of the module

M/N

A AUX1
8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal
modules
1
2
PM-E

3
A
4

7
A
8

3
4
5

Backplane bus

Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules

Terminals with connection to the power module

Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any


kind

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect
Weight

15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2x3

9-5

Terminal modules
9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)

9.3

9.3

TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal


modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features
Terminal module for power module
Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A0
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A0
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A0
2 x 3 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
This table shows the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and
TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules.
Table 9-4

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0


terminal modules
View

Terminal

AUX1
A A
4 8

L+/L
2

M/N
3
AUX1 A
4

9-6

L+/L
M/N

L+/L

M/ N

Designation
Rated load voltage for inserted power
module and associated potential group

A AUX1
4

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up


to the maximum rated load voltage of the
module

L+/L

M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted power


module and associated potential group

A AUX1
8

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up


to the maximum rated load voltage of the
module

A AUX1
8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal
modules

1
2

PM-E

3
A
4

7
A
8

3
4
5

Backplane bus

Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules

Terminals with connection to the power module

Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any


kind

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect
Weight

15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2x3

9-7

Terminal modules
9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)

9.4

9.4

TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal


modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features
Terminal module for power module
Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S22-01
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C22-01
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N22-01
2 x 2 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01,
and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-5

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01


terminal modules
View

Signal name
2 L+/L
3 M/ N
6 L+/L
7 M/ N

Designation
Rated load voltage for inserted power
module and associated potential group
Rated load voltage for inserted power
module and associated potential group

AUX1
L+/L

L+/L
2

M/N

9-8

M/N

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal
modules
1
2
PM-E

2
3

Backplane bus

Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules

Terminals with connection to the power module

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect

15 x 119.5 x 43

Weight

Approx. 55 g

15 x 142 x 43
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2x2

9-9

Terminal modules
9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)

9.5

9.5

TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features
Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module
Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module
Wiring of the fail-safe digital outputs of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe
Prewiring possible
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

9-10

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and
TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module:
Table 9-6

Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module


View

Terminal
2

1
3

1
60

1
4

3
A
4

1
71
A1
82

1
5
1
6

A A
4 8

24 VDC

Designation
Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power
module, associated potential group. DO 0 and
DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses

Chassis ground

A
4

AUX 1

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the


maximum rated load voltage of the module

24 VDC

Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power


module, associated potential group. DO 0 and
DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses

Chassis ground

A
8

AUX 1

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the


maximum rated load voltage of the module

DO 0 P

10

DO 0 M

Connections for fail-safe digital output 0


(switching to P/M potential)

11

DO 2 P

12

DO 2 M

Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe


switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2.
P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and
DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the

ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).


13

DO 1 P

14

DO 1 M

15

DO 2 P

16

DO 2M

Connections for fail-safe digital output 0


(switching to P/M potential)
Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe
switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2.
P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and
DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the

ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).

Caution
If high currents occur at DO 2 P and DO 2 M, you must wire terminals 11 and 15 (DO 2 P)
and 12 and 16 (DO 2 M) in parallel. Otherwise, the temperature of the terminals cannot be
prevented from rising due to the current load.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-11

Terminal modules
9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module

1
2

(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0




 








$


$








4
5

Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any


kind

Infeed of the AUX1 bus by means of terminals A4 and A8

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

30 x 132 x 43

Weight

Approx. 116 g (TM-P30S44-A0)


Approx. 100 g (TM-P30C44-A0)
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

14

Description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module


You can find a description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module you can use
with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules
manual.

9-12

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)

9.6

9.6

TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC)


(3RK1 903-3AA00)

Order number
3RK1 903-3AA00 (screw-type terminal)

Features
Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-D F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module
Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the terminal module TM-PF30S47-F1:
Table 9-7

Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module


View

Terminal

2
0

2
7

2
1

2
8

Designation

20

24 VDC

Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted


power module and voltage buses SG 1 to
SG 6 and U 1

21

Chassis ground

27

24 VDC

Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted


power module and voltage buses SG 1 to
SG 6 and U 1

28

Chassis ground

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-13

Terminal modules
9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)

Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module

1
2
(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0













Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

30 196,5 102

Weight

Approx. 300 g
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

9-14

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

9.7

9.7

TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal


terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features
Universal terminal module for the electronic modules
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S26-A1
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C26-A1
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N26-A1
2 x 6 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-15

Terminal modules
9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Pin assignment
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1
terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules:
Table 9-8

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1


terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules
View

4
A
4
A
3

8
A
8
A
7

Terminal

Designation

DI0/DO0

DI: Digital input

DI2/DO2

DO: Digital output

24 VDC for DI0/ M for DO0

24 VDC for DI2/ M for DO2

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage

DI1/DO1

DI3/DO3

24 VDC for DI1/ M for DO1

24 VDC for DI3/ M for DO3

A
4

AUX1 bus implemented. Connection to terminals A4, A8


and A3, A7.

M: Ground load power


supply

A
3
A
8
A
7

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1


terminal modules with the 2-channel electronic modules and technology modules:
The terminal assignment of terminals 1 to 8 corresponds to that of the TM-E15S24-01,
TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules. You will find the various terminal
assignments in the technical specifications of the different electronic modules.
You can obtain the terminal assignment of terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7 from the above
table.

9-16

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal
modules

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0

$ $
$ $

Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect

15 157 43

Weight

Approx. 70 g (TM-E15C26-A1)

15 202 43
Approx. 83 g (TM-E15S26-A1)
Approx. 95 g (TM-E15NS26-A1)
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2x6

9-17

Terminal modules
9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

9.8

9.8

TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal


modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features
Terminal module for electronic modules
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-A1
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-A1
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-A1
2 x 4 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1,
and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules:
Table 9-9

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1


terminal modules
View

Terminal
1
2

Designation

The assignment depends on which electronic module is


inserted

9-18

A
4

AUX1

The assignment depends on which electronic module is


inserted

A
4

A
8

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up


to the maximum rated load voltage of the
module

7
A
8

AUX1

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up


to the maximum rated load voltage of the
module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal
modules

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0

$


$


3
4
5

Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Use of terminals 4 and 8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals 4 and 8

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect
Weight

15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-A1 and
TM-E15C24-A1)
Approx. 72 g(TM-E15N24-A1)
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2x4

9-19

Terminal modules
9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

9.9

9.9

TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal


modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features
Terminal module for electronic modules
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-01
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-01
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-01
2 x 4 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01,
and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-10

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01


terminal modules
View

Terminal

Designation

1 The assignment depends on which electronic module is


inserted
2
No access to the AUX1 bus.
3
Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for
4 unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential
5 corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.

9-20

6
7
8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal
modules

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0

Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect
Weight

15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-01 and
TM-E15C24-01)
Approx. 72 g (TM-E15N24-01)
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2x4

9-21

Terminal modules
9.10 TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

9.10

9.10

TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal


modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features
Terminal module for electronic modules
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S23-01
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C23-01
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N23-01
2 x 3 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01,
and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-11

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01


terminal modules
View

Terminal

Designation

The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted

No access to the AUX1 bus.

3
5
6

9-22

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.10 TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal
modules
1
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0









Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect
Weight

15 120 43
15 142 43
Approx. 55 g (TM-E15S23-01 and
TM-E15C23-01)
Approx. 60 g (TM-E15N23-01)
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

2x3

9-23

Terminal modules
9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)

9.11

9.11

TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features
Terminal module for the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module

Caution
You can only insert the 2AI TC HF electronic module into the
TM-E15S24-AT/TM-E15C24-AT terminal module. Inserting another electronic module
can result in the destruction of the internal reference junction of the terminal module.

Terminal module has an internal reference junction for temperature compensation.


Temperature compensation is thus possible directly at the reference junction of the
thermocouples.
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-AT
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-AT
2 x 2 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8

9-24

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of terminal module TM-E15S24-AT and
TM-E15C24-AT:
Table 9-12

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module


View

Terminal

Designation

1 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF


2
3 Not available
4
5 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF
1

6
7 Not available
8

Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-P15C24-AT terminal module

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0







Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-25

Terminal modules
9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)
Weight

15 132 43
Approx. 55 g
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

2x2

See also
2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) (Page 12-91)

9-26

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)

9.12

9.12

TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features
Terminal module for electronic modules with a width of 30 mm and fail-safe electronic
modules
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S44-01
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C44-01
4 x 4 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16.

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and
TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-13

Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module


View

Terminal
1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

59
1
60
1
71
1
82

1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6

Designation

The assignment depends on which electronic module is


inserted
No access to the AUX1 bus.
Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for
unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential
corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-27

Terminal modules
9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module

1
2

(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0

 







 














Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

30 132 43

Weight

Approx. 110 g (TM-E30C44-01)


Approx. 125 g (TM-E30S44-01)
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

9-28

4x4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

9.13

9.13

TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules


(6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

Order numbers
6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features
Terminal module for the fail-safe electronic modules 4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PRFOFIsafe and
4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A PROFIsafe.
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S46-A1
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C46-A1
6 x 4 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16,
A11, A15.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-29

Terminal modules
9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S46-A1 and
TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules:
Table 9-14

Terminal assignment of the terminal module


View

1
2
3
4
A
4
A
3

9-30

59
1
60
1
71
1
82
AA
1
82
AA
1
71

Terminal

1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
A
1
6
A
1
5

F-DI

F-DO

Designation

DI 0

DO 0 P

DI: Digital input

Vs1

DO 0 M

DI 2

Vs1

DO P and DO M: Connection for


fail-safe digital output (switching
to P/M potential)

DI 1

DO 1 P

Vs1

DO 1 M

DI 3

Vs1

DI 4

DO 2 P

10

Vs2

DO 2 M

11

DI 6

12

Vs2

13

DI 5

DO 3 P

14

Vs2

DO 3 M

15

DI 7

16

Vs 2

A4, A3,
A8, A7

AUX1

AUX1 bus implemented.


Connection to terminals A4, A8
and A3, A7.

A12, A11,
A16, A15

AUX1

AUX1 bus implemented.


Connection to terminals A12, A11
and A16, A15.

Vs1: Internal sensor supply 1 for


DI 0 to DI 3
Vs2: Internal sensor supply 2 for
DI 4 to DI 7

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules
9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal module

1
2

(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0

 




 










$$


$$





$


$





$


$


4
5

Backplane bus

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

Connection of terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16, A11, A15 as productive conductor
terminals or potential terminals of any kind

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A3, A8, A7 and A12, A11, A16,
A15

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

30 x 157 x 43

Weight

Approx. 158 g (TM-E30S46-A1)


Approx. 131 g (TM-E30C46-A1)
Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

6x4

Description of the electronic modules


You can find a description of the 4/8 F-DI 24VDC PROFIsafe and 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A
PROFIsafe electronic modules you can use with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S
Distributed I/O Module, Fail-Safe Modules manual.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

9-31

Terminal modules
9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

9-32

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

10

Power modules
10.1

10.1

Parameters for power modules

Parameters
The following table contains the parameters of the power modules.
Table 10-1

Parameters for power modules


Value range

Power module

Default setting

Applicability

PM-E24 VDC

PM-E 24 to 48
VDC

PM-E 24 to 48
VDC/24 to 230 VAC

Diagnostics: No
load voltage

Diagnostics: No
load voltage

Diagnostics: No load
voltage

Disable/enable

Disable

Power module

---

---

Diagnostics: Fuse
blown

Disable/enable

Disable

Power module

---

---

Voltage type

DC/AC

DC

Power module

The parameters are explained below.

Diagnostics: No load voltage


You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about missing load voltage.
In the absence of load voltage, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is
forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential
group come on.

Diagnostics: Fuse blown


You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about a blown fuse.
In the event of a blown fuse, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is
forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential
group come on.

Voltage type
You use this parameter to select the load voltage connected to the power module: DC
voltage or AC voltage.
The correct diagnosis is thus provided in the event of missing load voltage or a blown fuse.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

10-1

Power modules
10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

10.2

10.2

PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0

Features
The PM-E 24 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic
modules in the potential group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P
terminal module.
You can use any electronic module in the potential group of the PM-E 24 VDC power
module except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard and 2DO 24-230
VAC/1 A.

Caution
Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24 VDC to the TM-P terminal module of
the power module.
The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic
modules in the potential group.

The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input
image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has
been enabled.

Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module for
the different terminal modules:
Table 10-2

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module


View

Pin assignment

Remarks
24 VDC: Rated load voltage

7036$DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable
as any voltage bus up to the level
of the load voltage.

$8;
$ $
 

9'&

9'&

$8;

$


$


$8;

9'&

10-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Power modules
10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
24 VDC: Rated load voltage
M: Chassis ground

7036$DQG30(9'&

AUX1: Ground terminal or usable


as any voltage bus up to the level
of the load voltage.
AUX1 is used as PE.

$8;
$


9'&

$


9'&

$


$


$8;

9'&
0
$8;

7036DQG30(9'&

24 VDC: Rated load voltage


M: Chassis ground

$8;

9'&

9'&

9'&

Block diagram

3:5

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

/RDG
YROWDJH
PRQLWRULQJ






9'&
3
3

Figure 10-1

Block diagram of the PM-E 24 VDC power module

Technical specifications

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

10-3

Power modules
10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Dimensions and weight


Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage

24 VDC

Overvoltage protection

No

Protection with automatic circuit breakers

Yes, type C tripping characteristics

Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60 C)

10 A

Short-circuit protection

No

Isolation

Between rated load voltage and backplane


bus

Yes

Between the power modules

Yes

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption

From the load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 4 mA
Typ. 100 mW

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Diagnostic function

10-4

Yes

Group error
Load voltage monitoring

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic information readable

Yes

Green "PWR" LED

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Power modules
10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

10.3

10.3

PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0

Features
The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic
modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal
module.
You can use all the electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC
Standard, and 2DO 24-230 VAC/1 A in the voltage group of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power
module.
Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option
handling.
The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input
image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnosis has
been enabled.
The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module is suitable for fail-safe modules.

Caution
Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24-48 VDC to the TM-P terminal module
of the power module.
The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic
modules in the voltage group.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

10-5

Power modules
10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

Pin assignment
The following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power
module for the different terminal modules:
Table 10-3

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module


View

Pin assignment
7036$DQG30(9'&

Remarks
24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage
M: Chassis ground
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable
as any voltage bus up to the level
of the load voltage.

$8;
$


9'&

$


9'&

$


$


$8;

9'&
0
$8;

24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage


7036$DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground
$8;
$ $
 

9'&

9'&

$8;

$


$


$8;

9'&

7036DQG30(9'&

AUX1: Ground terminal or usable


as any voltage bus up to the level
of the load voltage.
AUX1 is used as PE.

24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage


M: Chassis ground

$8;

9'&

9'&

9'&

10-6

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Power modules
10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

Block diagram

3:5

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

/RDG
YROWDJH
PRQLWRULQJ






9'&
3
3

Figure 10-2

Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage

P1

Overvoltage protection

VDC
Yes
No

Protection with automatic circuit breakers

Yes, tripping characteristic B, C

Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60 C)

10 A

Short-circuit protection

No

Isolation

Between rated load voltage and backplane


bus

Between the power modules

Yes
Yes

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption

From the load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 12 mA
Typ. 500 mW

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Diagnostic function

Yes

Group error
Load voltage monitoring

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic information readable

Yes

Green "PWR" LED

See also
Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

10-7

Power modules
10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)

10.4

PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module


(6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)

10.4

Order number
6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0

Features
The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC has the following characteristic features:
Monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the voltage group. The
supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module.
Can be used universally and can be assigned parameters for DC and AC load voltage for
use with any electronic module.
Is required at least once for the ET 200S (to the right of the interface module).
Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option
handling (see Appendix).
The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input
image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has
been enabled (see Appendix).
Is additionally equipped with a replaceable fuse (5 mm x 20 mm).

1
2
Figure 10-3

10-8

Replacing the fuse

(1)

3-mm screwdriver

(2)

Fuse

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Power modules
10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)

Note
The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) is not a direct
replacement for the device with the order number 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 for AC applications
because you have to select either AC or DC supply voltage. In the case of DC applications,
the new module is a direct replacement because the default setting of the new parameter is
"DC". If you want to replace the device 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 in AC applications, you have
to create a new hardware configuration and set the value "AC" for the load voltage type
parameter.
If the hardware configuration is not changed for AC applications, the SF status LED remains
on all the time. If the "No load voltage" diagnostic interrupt is enabled, several interrupts are
activated in each AC cycle. The electronic modules that are connected to the voltage group
of this PM-E continue to function normally, however.

Pin assignment

Table 10-4

The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC
power module for the different terminal modules:

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage

7036$DQG30(9'&9$&

M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as
any voltage bus up to the level of the
load voltage.

$8;
$


$


9'&/

9'&/

01

01

$8;

$


$


$8;

9'&

$&

24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage


7036$DQG30(9'&9$&

M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as
any voltage bus up to the level of the
load voltage.

$8;
$


9'&/

$



AUX1 is used as PE.

9'&/
9'&

01

01

$8;

$


$


$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

a $&

10-9

Power modules
10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage

7036DQG30(9'&9$&

M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor

$8;
9'&/
01

9'&/

9'&

$&

01

%DFNSODQHEXV

Block diagram

3
3

)6*

)XVH
PRQLWRULQJ

3:5

/RDG
YROWDJH
PRQLWRULQJ

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

01




9'&/



)XVHV

Figure 10-4

10-10

Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Power modules
10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

34 g
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage

24 to 56.7 VDC
24 to 48 VAC/120 VAC/ 230 VAC

Overvoltage protection

Yes

Max. current-carrying capacity

10 A

For 24-56.7 VDC

Up to 30 C Max. 10 A
up to 40 C: max. 9 A
up to 60 C: max. 7 A

For 24-48/120/230 VAC

up to 30 C: max. 8 A
up to 40 C: max. 7 A
up to 60 C: max. 5 A

Short-circuit protection

Yes, IEC 127-2/1, 250 V, 10 A, fast fuse


(5 x 20 mm), replaceable1

Isolation
Between rated load voltage and backplane
bus
Between the power modules

Yes

Insulation tested with

1500 VAC

Current consumption from backplane bus

Max. 9.5 mA

From load voltage L1/L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Yes

Max. 9 mA
Max. 5 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Diagnostic function

Yes

Group error
Load voltage monitoring

Red "SF" LED

Fuse

Green "FSG" LED

Diagnostic information can be displayed

Yes

Green "PWR" LED

The fuses on this module are only additional fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable for
branch circuits in accordance with the applicable national regulations for electrical engineering) is
required in the supply lines of the load circuit.
1

See also
Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

10-11

Digital Electronic Modules


11.1

11.1.1

11.1

11

Parameters for digital electronic modules

Parameters for digital input modules

Introduction
The range of digital electronic modules (EM) includes input and output modules for 24 VDC.
Input and output modules for 120/230 VAC are also available.
A relay module enables the switching of voltages for AC and DC.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-1

Digital Electronic Modules


11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules

Overview
This table shows the parameters for digital input modules:
Table 11-1

Parameters for digital input modules

2DI 24 VDC
High Feature

4DI 24 VDC
High Feature

4DI 24 to 48
VUC High
Feature

2DI/ 4DI 24 VDC


Standard
4DI 24 VDC/SRC
Standard
2DI 120 VAC Standard
4DI 230 VAC Standard

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Hardware interrupt3

---

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

---

Diagnostic
interrupt

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Input delay1

---

---

0.1 ms
0.5 ms
3 ms
15 ms

3 ms

Module

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to
M2

---

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

---

Diagnostics:
Wire break4

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

---

Diagnostics:
Fuse defect

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

---

Diagnostics:
Load voltage
missing

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

---

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Channel 0

Trigger for
hardware
interrupt,
rising edge3

Trigger for
hardware
interrupt,
rising edge3

---

Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3

The input delay applies to "0" to "1" and to "1" to "0".

Short circuit of the sensor supply.

3Can

only be assigned parameters for the IM151-1 High Feature interface module and the IM151-7 CPU

If the wire break check is activated, all the unused inputs must be stabilized to prevent them from triggering a module
wire break. To do this, connect a resistor between terminal 24/48 V (3, A4, 7, A8) and the free input. The resistor must
provide at least 0.5 mA of input current (see "Sensor Switching" in the table of technical specifications). This ensures that
sufficient current is flowing to prevent wire break detection..
4

In the off state, a sensor must provide a minimum of 0.5 mA (otherwise a wire break is detected in the off state).
Alternatively, a resistor can be connected parallel to the sensor terminals (the current must be at least. 0.5 mA).

11-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules

11.1.2

Parameters for 4DI NAMUR

List of parameters
This table shows the parameters for 4 DI NAMUR:
Table 11-2

Parameters for 4DI NAMUR

4DI NAMUR

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Diagnostic interrupt

Enable
Disable

Disable

Module

Sensor type

Channel disabled
NAMUR sensor
Open single contact
Single contact, closed,
with 10 k
NAMUR changeover
contact
Open changeover
contact
Changeover contact,
closed, with 10 k

Disable

Channel

Pulse stretching

None
0.5 s
1s
2s

None

Channel

Diagnostics

Enable
Disable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: wire break

Enable
Disable

Disable

Channel

Diagnostics: wire break

Enable
Disable

Disable

Channel

Chatter monitoring:

0.5 s
1 s to 100 s (can be set
at increments of 1 s)

0.5 s

Channel

Disable
2 to 31

Disable

Channel

No sensor supply

Monitoring window*
Chatter monitoring:
Number of signal changes

* The parameters can only be set when the number of signal changes for chatter monitoring is activated

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-3

Digital Electronic Modules


11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules

11.1.3

Parameters for digital output modules

Overview
This table shows the parameters for digital output modules:
Table 11-3

Parameters for digital output modules

2DO 24
VDC/0.50, 5
A High
Feature

2RO NO NC
24-48 VDC/5 A
24-230 VAC/ 5 A

2DO 24 to 230
VAC/
1A

Value range

Default setting Applicability

Substitute a
value
Keep last
value

Substitute a
value

Module

"0"
"1"

"0"

Channel

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

2DO/ 4DO 24
VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO/ 4DO 24
VDC/2 A
Standard

2RO NO
2DO 24
24 to 120 VDC/5 A
VDC/2 A
High Feature 24 to 230 VAC/5 A
Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP

---

Substitute value 1

-----

Diagnostics:
Wire break2

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Channel

Diagnostics:
Short-circuit
to M

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Channel

If the interface module becomes deenergized, the digital output modules will not produce substitute values. The value
that is output = 0.
1

A wire break is only detected in the switched output state.

11-4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules

11.2

11.2

11.2.1

Parameter description for the digital electronic modules

Hardware interrupt

Description
This parameter enables the hardware interrupts for the module.

11.2.2

Input delay

Description
You can use this parameter to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are
detected once the set time has elapsed.

11.2.3

Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge

Description
This parameter allows you to enable a hardware interrupt at a rising edge
(of a signal status change) for each channel.

11.2.4

Pulse stretching

Definition
Pulse stretching is a function that changes a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is
stretched to at least the assigned parameter length. If the input pulse already longer than the
assigned parameter length, the pulse is not changed.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-5

Digital Electronic Modules


11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules

The principle of pulse stretching


The following figure uses examples to illustrate how and when input pulses are changed.
3XOVHVWUHWFKLQJSDUDPHWHU 7
7IRU!HGJH

7IRU!HGJH

3URFHVVVLJQDO
SURFHVVHG
LQSXWVLJQDO

3XOVHLVVKRUWHUWKDQ7
DQGLVVWUHWFKHGWR7

3XOVHLVORQJHUWKDQ7DQG
LVWKXVQRWFKDQJHG

3URFHVVVLJQDO

SURFHVVHG
LQSXWVLJQDO

7KHVHFRQGSXOVHRXWSXWGXULQJDFWLYH
SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJLVVKLIWHGXQWLOWKH
FXUUHQWVWUHWFKLQJSHULRGKDVH[SLUHG

Figure 11-1

6KRUWSXOVHVRXWSXWZLWKLQD
SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJF\FOHDUH
LJQRUHG

Principle of pulse stretching

Note
If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this also affects the chatter monitoring
enabled for this channel. The signal with a "stretched" pulse is the input signal for chatter
monitoring. Make sure, therefore, that the parameter assignment for pulse stretching and
chatter monitoring correspond with one another. By selecting the appropriate values for the
parameters you can adapt the functions to suit your process.

11-6

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules

11.2.5

Chatter monitoring

Definition
Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports
signal characteristics that are unusual from a process engineering viewpoint, such as the
input signal fluctuating too frequently between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like these
occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process
engineering viewpoint.

Activating chatter monitoring


You activate chatter monitoring by setting the number of signal changes for chatter
monitoring to a value other than zero.

Detecting unusual signal patterns


Each input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. The
monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal
changes more often within the monitoring window than the set number of signal changes, a
chatter error is detected. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the
monitoring window is started again at the next signal change.

Reporting a chatter error


If a chatter error has occurred, the current signal status is entered in the process image and
the value of the signal is set to "invalid". A chatter error is also entered as diagnostic
information, triggering an incoming diagnostic interrupt.
You must evaluate and process the status of the value and the diagnostic information in the
user program.

Resetting a chatter error


If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, the
diagnostic entry is removed and an outgoing diagnostic interrupt is triggered. The status of
the value of the current signal in the process image is set to "valid".

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-7

Digital Electronic Modules


11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules

Principle
The following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter
monitoring.
3DUDPHWHUIRUWKHQXPEHURIVLJQDOWUDQVLWLRQV 
3DUDPHWHUIRUPRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [

[PRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [

3URFHVV
VLJQDO
'HWHFWLRQ
'LDJQRVWLFV

,QFRPLQJIOXWWHUHUURU
PRGXOHGLDJQRVLV
PHVVDJH

Figure 11-2

11-8

0RGXOHGLDJQRVWLFV
)OXWWHUHUURUJRLQJ
UHVHW

The principle of chatter monitoring

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).

11.3

11.3

2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).

Order number
6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0

Features
Digital electronic module with two inputs
Rated input voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard for the
different terminal modules:
Table 11-4

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard


View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8

70(6$DQG','&967
&+

DI: Input signal


24 VDC: Sensor supply
voltage

&+
ZLUH

', 

',

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

ZLUH

ZLUH

M: Chassis ground

$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DI: Input signal

&+

&+
ZLUH

', 

9'&

9'&

QF

ZLUH

',

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage
M: Chassis ground
Terminals 4 and 8 can be
used for unneeded wires of up
to 30 VDC.

QF

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-9

Digital Electronic Modules


11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8

70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

DI: Input signal


&+
', 

&+

ZLUH

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage

ZLUH

M: Chassis ground

',

9'&

9'&

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

&+

70(6$XQG','&967

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage

/HLWHU
', 

',

'&9

'&9

QF

QF

$8;
$8;

11-10

/HLWHU

DI: Input signal

/HLWHU

M: Chassis ground
Terminals 4 and 8 can be
used for unneeded wires of up
to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

$8;PXVVEHL/HLWHU
DXI3(JHOHJWZHUGHQ

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV




3

0

3

/

Figure 11-3




Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-11

Digital Electronic Modules


11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Data for specific modules

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

max. 600m

Shielded

max. 1000m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module)

Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

Insulation tested with

75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC

Current consumption

From supply voltage

Power dissipation of the module

Dependent on the sensor


Typ. 0.4 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display
Diagnostic functions

Green LED per channel


No
Sensor supply output

Output voltage

with load

min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current

Rated value

500 mA

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA
Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

Rated value

24 VDC

For signal "1"

15 to 30 V

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V

Input current
At signal "1"

Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)

Input delay

At "0" to "1"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

At "1" to "0"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire BEROs

Possible

11-12

Permitted bias current

Max. 1.5 mA

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)

11.4

11.4

4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0

Features
Digital electronic module with four inputs
Rated input voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard for the
different terminal modules:
Table 11-5

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard


View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

&+
&+
', 

',

',

',

9'&
$8; HJ3(

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+

ZLUH

DI: Input signal


24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

9'&
$8; HJ3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8


ZLUH

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

DI: Input signal


24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

11-13

Digital Electronic Modules


11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7

70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3


Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+

&+
&+
', 

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ0

$


$


$8; HJ0

$8; HJ0

$


$


$8; HJ0

11-14

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8


ZLUH

ZLUH

DI: Input signal


24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

3
3

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

0






/

9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-4

Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Data for specific modules

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

max. 600m

Shielded

max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module)

Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

75 VDC, 60 VAC

11-15

Digital Electronic Modules


11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)
Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption

From supply voltage

Power dissipation of the module

Dependent on the sensor


Typ. 0.7 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display
Diagnostic functions

Green LED per channel


No
Sensor supply output

Output voltage

with load

min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current

Rated value

500 mA

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA
Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

Rated value

24 VDC

For signal "1"

15 to 30 V

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V

Input current
At signal "1"

Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)

Input delay

At "0" to "1"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

At "1" to "0"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire BEROs

Possible

11-16

Permitted bias current

Max. 1.5 mA

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)

11.5

4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module


(6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)

11.5

Order number
6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0

Features
Digital electronic module with four inputs
Source input
Rated input voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard for
the different terminal modules:
Table 11-6

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard


View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

&+
&+

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

$8; HJ9'&

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7


ZLUH

DI: Input signal


M: Sensor supply voltage

$8; HJ9'&

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-17

Digital Electronic Modules


11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8

&+
&+

',

',

',

',

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

M: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+

&+
&+
', 

',

',

',

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

M: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

&+
&+

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8


ZLUH

', 

',

',

',

$8; HJ9'&

$


$


$8; HJ9'&

$8; HJ9'&

$8; HJ9'&

11-18

ZLUH

DI: Input signal


M: Sensor supply voltage

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

3
3

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV






0
/

0RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-5

Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Data for specific modules

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

max. 600 m

Shielded

max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module)

Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

Insulation tested with

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC

11-19

Digital Electronic Modules


11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)
Current consumption

From supply voltage

Power dissipation of the module

Dependent on the sensor


Typ. 0.7 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Sensor supply output

Output voltage

With load

Max. M +0.5 V

Output current

Rated value

Permitted range

500 mA
0 to 500 mA
Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

Rated value

24 VDC

For signal "1"

-15 to -30 V1

For signal "0"

30 to -5 V1

Input current
At signal "1"

Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)

Input delay

At "0" to "1"

At "1" to "0"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire BEROs

Possible

11-20

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

Permitted bias current

Max. 1.5 mA

Reference potential is L+

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)

11.6

2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module


(6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)

11.6

Order number
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with two inputs
Rated input voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature for
the different terminal modules:
Table 11-7

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature


View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8

70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
&+

&+
ZLUH

', 

',

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ3(

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

ZLUH

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage
M: Chassis ground

$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-21

Digital Electronic Modules


11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DI: Input signal

&+

&+
ZLUH


9'&

9'&

QF

ZLUH

',

', 

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage
M: Chassis ground
Terminals 4 and 8 can be
used for unneeded wires of up
to 30 VDC.

QF

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DI: Input signal

&+

&+
ZLUH

', 

ZLUH

',

9'&

9'&

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage
M: Chassis ground

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7

70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH

DI: Input signal


&+

&+
ZLUH


9'&

9'&


$


$

QF
$8;
$8;

11-22

ZLUH

ZLUH

',

', 

24 VDC: Sensor supply


voltage
M: Chassis ground
Terminals 4 and 8 can be
used for unneeded wires of up
to 30 VDC.

QF
$8;
$8;

$8;PXVWEH
RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV




6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ
3

0

3

/

Figure 11-6

3RODULW\UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ




Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

max. 600 m
max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module)

Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

Insulation tested with

75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC

Current consumption

From supply voltage

Power dissipation of the module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Dependent on the sensor


Typ. 0.4 W

11-23

Digital Electronic Modules


11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display

Green LED per channel

Interrupts

Hardware interrupt

Parameters can be assigned

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Diagnostic information can be displayed

Red "SF" LED


Yes

Sensor supply output


Output voltage

with load

Min.. L+ (-0.5V)

Output current

Rated value

500 mA

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA

Short-circuit protection

Yes, electronic1
Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

Rated value

24 VDC

For signal "1"

11 to 30 V

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V

Input current
At signal "1"

Typ. 8 mA

Input delay (parameters can be assigned)

At "0" to "1"

0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)


0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

At "1" to "0"

0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)


0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire BEROs

Possible

11-24

Permitted bias current

max. 1.5 mA

Per module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

11.7

4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module


(6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

11.7

Order number
6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with four inputs
Rated input voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature for the
different terminal modules:
Table 11-8

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature


View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ0

$


$


$8; HJ0

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

ZLUH

DI: Input signal


24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8


ZLUH

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

DI: Input signal


24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

11-25

Digital Electronic Modules


11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7

70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3


Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+

&+
&+
', 

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

11-26

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ0

$


$


$8; HJ0

$8; HJ0

$


$


$8; HJ0

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8


ZLUH

ZLUH

DI: Input signal


24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV




6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ

3
3

0

3RODULW\UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ

/






9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6DQG70(6$

Figure 11-7

Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

max. 600 m

Shielded

max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module)

Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

between the channels

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

No

11-27

Digital Electronic Modules


11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption

From supply voltage

Dependent on the sensor

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.7 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LED per channel

Interrupts

Hardware interrupt

Parameters can be assigned

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic information can be displayed

Yes

Sensor supply output


Output voltage

with load

Min.. L+ (-0.5V)

Output current

Rated value

500 mA

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA

Short-circuit protection

Yes, electronic1
Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage

Rated value

24 VDC

For signal "1"

11 to 30 V

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V

Input current
At signal "1"

Typ. 8 mA

Input delay (parameters can be assigned)

At "0" to "1"

0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)


0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

At "1" to "0"

0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)


0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire BEROs

Possible

11-28

Permitted bias current

max. 1.5 mA

Per module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)

11.8

4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module


(6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)

11.8

Order number
6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with four inputs
Rated input voltage 24-48 VAC/VDC
Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes
Diagnostics: Wire break
Diagnostics: Fuse blown
Diagnostics: Load voltage missing
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature
for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-9

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature

View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

&+
&+

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

$8; 3(

ZLUH

ZLUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
DI: Input signal
VDC sensor supply
PE: Chassis ground

$8; 3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-29

Digital Electronic Modules


11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8

&+
&+

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

VDC sensor supply

', 

',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+

&+
&+

', 

',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

ZLUH

ZLUH

DI: Input signal


VDC sensor supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

&+
&+
', 

&+
&+
',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

9$&9'&


$


$

9$&9'&


$


$

$8; 3(
$8; 3(

11-30

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8

ZLUH

ZLUH

DI: Input signal


VDC sensor supply
AUX: Terminals A4, A3, A8
DC/AC and A7 can be used
for unused cables up to
30 VDC.

$8; 3(
$8; 3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ
3
3

0

5HYHUVH
SRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQ

/

Figure 11-8






Block diagram of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D

15 81 52 (mm)

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Max. 600 m

Shielded

Max. 1000 m
Voltage, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module)

Horizontal installation
up to 60 C

Vertical installation
up to 40 C

P1

24-48 VAC/VDC

AC or DC automatically

Isolation

Between the channels

No

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-31

Digital Electronic Modules


11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
Permissible potential difference

Between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

2500 VDC

Current consumption

From the power supply L+

Dependent on the sensor

From the backplane bus

Max. 10 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.7 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LEDs per channel

Diagnostic functions
Group error display

Parameters can be assigned


Red LEDs (SF)
Sensor power supply outputs

Output voltage

With load

Min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current

Rated value

500 mA

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA

Short-circuit protection

Yes (per module)


Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage
Rated value

24 to 48 VUC

For signal "1"

-15 VDC to -57.6 VDC


15 VDC to 57.6 VDC
15 VAC to 48 VAC

For signal "0"

-6 VDC to 6 VDC 0
VAC to 5 VAC

Frequency range

47 Hz to 63 Hz

Input current
At signal "1"

From 4 mA to 10 mA

Input delay
At "0" to "1"
At "1" to "0"

Max. 15 ms
Max. 15 ms

Input characteristic curve1


Connection of two-wire BEROs

Possible

Permitted bias current

Max. 0.5 to 2 mA2


Sensor switching

Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break


monitoring
Nominal voltage
24 V (15 V to 35 V)
Nominal voltage
48 V (30 V to 60 V)

18 k
39 k

IEC 61131 does not provide technical specifications for UC modules. However, the values have
been adjusted to IEC 61131 as closely as possible.
1

11-32

Minimum load current is required in the case of wire-break monitoring.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

11.9

11.9

4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with four inputs
8.2 VDC sensor supply
Suitable for NAMUR sensors and both closed and open mechanical contacts

Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6


This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors according to
IEC 60947-5-6.
Table 11-10 Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Sensor 1:

70(6$DQG',1$085

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


Sensor 2:

&+

&+

&+

&+

', 

', 

',

9V

9V

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Sensor 3:
Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3


RU

',

$8; 3(

([DPSOHRIDFKDQQHO
FRQQHFWLRQ

Sensor 4:
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7
DI: Input signal
Vs: Sensor supply voltage

$8; 3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-33

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors to IEC 60947-5-6


This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors
according to IEC 60947-5-6.
Table 11-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6
View

Pin assignment

Changeover contact 1:

70(6DQG',1$085

&+

&+

&+

&+

', 

',

',

',

9V

9V

9V

Changeover contact 2
terminals 2, 6 and 7
DI: Input signal

12FRQWDFW

RU

Vs: Sensor supply voltage






9V

terminals 1, 5 and 3

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ
RIFKDQQHO




Remarks

1&FRQWDFW

Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k (mechanical normally open contact)
This table shows the terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k
(mechanical normally open contact).
Table 11-12 Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k (mechanical normally open contact)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Single contact 1:

70(6DQG',1$085

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


Single contact 2:

&+

&+

&+

&+

', 

',


',

9V

9V

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Single contact 3:
Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

Single contact 4:
N

',

11-34

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI
FKDQQHO

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7


DI: Input signal

Vs: Sensor supply voltage

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k (mechanical changeover contact)


This table shows the terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k
(mechanical normally open contact).
Table 11-13 Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k (mechanical changeover contact)
View

Pin assignment

Changeover contact 1:
Terminals 1, 5 and 3

70(6DQG',1$085
&+
&+

Changeover contact 2:
Terminals 2, 6 and 7

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI
&+
FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO
&+
N

',


', 

',

',

9V

9V

9V

9V

Remarks

DI: Input signal


Vs: Sensor supply voltage

Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single
contact)
This table shows the terminal assignment of an open single contact
(mechanical normally open contact with single contact).
Table 11-14 Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Single contact 1:

70(6DQG',1$085

&+

&+

&+

&+

', 

',

',

',

9V

9V

9V

9V

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ
RIFKDQQHO

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


Single contact 2:
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7
Single contact 3:

Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4


Single contact 4:
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8
DI: Input signal

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Vs: Sensor supply voltage

11-35

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact)


This table shows the terminal assignment of an open changeover contact
(mechanical changeover contact).
Table 11-15 Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Changeover contact 1:
terminals 1, 5 and 3

70(6$DQG',1$085

Changeover contact 2:
&+

&+

&+

&+


',

',

9V

9V
9V

$8;
$8;


$

terminals 2, 6 and 7
DI: Input signal
Vs: Sensor supply voltage




',

', 

9V

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI
FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO

$8;
$8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

,QSXWZLULQJ

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

w&

,QSXWV



9
33

0XOWLSOH[HU
FRPSDUDWRU




9






Figure 11-9

11-36

9V

Block diagram of the 4DI NAMUR

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g
Data for specific modules

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m

Voltage, currents, potentials


Number of inputs that can be triggered
simultaneously

Horizontal installation up to 60 C

All other mounting positions up to 40 C

Isolation

Between the channels

No

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between channels and load voltage

Yes

Between load voltage and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

Between different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with:

Channels against the backplane bus and


load voltage

500 VDC

Load voltage against the backplane bus

500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Dependent on the sensor

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 1.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LED per channel

Interrupts

Hardware interrupt
Diagnostic interrupt

No
Yes, can be set

Diagnostic functions

Group error display


Diagnostic information can be displayed

Red "SF" LED


Possible

Monitoring for

Short circuit
Wire break

I > 7 mA*
I < 0.35 mA*
Data for selecting a sensor

Input current for NAMUR sensors

At signal "1"
At signal "0"

according to NAMUR or IEC 60947-5-6


2.1 mA to 7 mA
0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

Input current for a closed contact

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-37

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

At signal "1"

2.1 mA to 7 mA

For signal "0"

0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

Input current for an open contact

At signal "1"

Typ. 8 mA

Permitted bias current

0.5 mA

Input delay

At "0" to "1"

Max. 4.6 ms

At "1" to "0"

Max. 4.6 ms

Tolerated switchover time with changeover


contacts

300 ms

Parallel connection of inputs

No
Sensor power supply outputs

Number of outputs

Output voltage

With load

Min. 8.2 V

Output current

Rated value

45 mA

Additional (redundant) supply

Not permissible

Short-circuit protection

Yes, electronic

* Only for NAMUR sensors and closed contacts.

Value status
The value status provides additional binary information on a digital input signal. The value
status is entered in the process input image at the same time as the signal, and it provides
information on the validity of the input signal. The value status is affected by:
Wire break check/short circuit
Flutter monitoring
Pulse extension
Validity check of changeover contact sensor types
Meaning of the value status:
"1": input signal is valid
"0": Input signal is invalid

11-38

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

Assignment in the process input image


The data is transferred to the process image in two bytes (16 bits).
      

%\WH

,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO
,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO
,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO
,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO
9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO
9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO
9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO
9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO

%\WH

XQDVVLJQHG

0HDQLQJ
6LJQDOYDOLG
6LJQDOLQYDOLG

&KDQQHOQRWIRUHQFRGHUW\SHFKDQJHRYHUFRQWDFW

Figure 11-10 Assignment in the process input image for 4DI NAMUR

Diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types


When a diagnosis is made for the changeover contact sensor type, the digital electronic
module controls the switchover between two input channels. If there is no signal change in
the normally closed contact after the set switchover time (see technical specifications), the
module reports a diagnosis.

Purpose of changeover contact diagnostics


You can use the diagnosis for the following:
A diagnosis of the sensor
To make absolutely sure that there has been a switchover between a normally open
contact and normally closed contact

Principle of changeover contact diagnostics


If the digital inputs of a channel group are assigned parameters as changeover contacts, the
module carries out a diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types for this channel group.
The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is fixed at 300 ms.
If the validity check is negative, the following applies:
The module designates the value status of the normally open contact channel as invalid.
The module creates a diagnostic entry for the NO contact channel.
The module triggers a diagnostic interrupt.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-39

Digital Electronic Modules


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the NO contact channel
(channel 0 and 2). In the case of the NC contact channel (channel 1 and 3) the digital input
signal is fixed at "zero" and the value status is "invalid" because this channel is only used for
a validity check of the sensor.
Note the following points when carrying out a diagnosis for a changeover contact sensor
type:
If there is already an error on the NO contact channel (wire break, for example), the
module will not carry out a diagnosis for changeover contact errors. The diagnosis for
changeover contact errors continues to be carried out on the second channel.
You will find additional points to note in the following table:
Table 11-16 Diagnosis for changeover contacts
Changeover contact

A negative check means...

Changeover contact as
NAMUR

Short circuit or
Wire break

Closed changeover contact

Defective sensor or short circuit

Additionally:

No distinction can be made here between a defective sensor


and short circuit
Open changeover contact

11-40

Changeover contact error


or external fault (in the
case of DP diagnosis)

Attention: No distinction possible between


Signal "0" and wire break
Signal "1" and short circuit

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)

11.10

2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module


(6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)

11.10

Order number
6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with two inputs
Rated input voltage 120 VAC
Suitable for switches

Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard for the
different terminal modules:
Table 11-17 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard
View

Pin assignment

70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

&+

Channel 1:
Terminals 5 to A8
DI: Input signal

&+
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

$


$


1
$8; HJ3(

Remarks
Channel 0:
Terminals 1 to A4

ZLUH

ZLUH

L1: Sensor supply voltage


N: Neutral conductor

$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK
ZLUHVDW3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DI: Input signal
L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+

N: Neutral conductor
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

QF

ZLUH

Terminals 4 and 8 can be


used for unneeded wires of up
to 120 VAC.

QF

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-41

Digital Electronic Modules


11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DI: Input signal
L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+

N: Neutral conductor
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

ZLUH

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
DI: Input signal
L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

11-42

ZLUH

ZLUH

N: Neutral conductor
Terminals 4 and 8 can be
used for unneeded wires of up
to 120 VAC.

$8;
$8;

$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK
ZLUHVDW3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW





/




3
3

Figure 11-11 Block diagram of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 31 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Supply voltage (from the power module)

Frequency

120 VAC
47 to 63 Hz

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between Minternal and the inputs

1500 VAC

Insulation tested with

2500 VDC

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-43

Digital Electronic Modules


11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage

Rated value

120 VAC

For signal "1"

79 to 132 VAC

For signal "0"

0 to 20 VAC

Input current
At signal "1"

3 to 9 mA

Input delay

At "0" to "1"

15 ms

At "1" to "0"

25 ms

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire BEROs

No

11-44

Permitted bias current

Max. 1 mA

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)

11.11

2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module


(6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)

11.11

Order number
6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with two inputs
Rated input voltage 230 VAC
Suitable for switches

Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard for the
different terminal modules:
Table 11-18 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard
View

Pin assignment

70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

&+

Channel 1:
Terminals 5 to A8
DI: Input signal

&+
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

$


$


1
$8; HJ3(

Remarks
Channel 0:
Terminals 1 to A4

ZLUH

ZLUH

L1: Sensor supply voltage


N: Neutral conductor

$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DI: Input signal
L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+

N: Neutral conductor
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

QF

QF

ZLUH

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminals 4 and 8 can be


used for unneeded wires of up
to 230 VAC.

11-45

Digital Electronic Modules


11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DI: Input signal
L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+

N: Neutral conductor
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

ZLUH

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
DI: Input signal
L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+
ZLUH

', 

',

/

/

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

11-46

ZLUH

ZLUH

N: Neutral conductor
Terminals 4 and 8 can be
used for unneeded wires of up
to 230 VAC.

$8;
$8;

$8;PXVWEH
RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW




/




3
3

Figure 11-12 Block diagram of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 31 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Supply voltage (from the power module)

Frequency

230 VAC
47 to 63 Hz

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between Minternal and the inputs

1500 VAC

Insulation tested with

4000 VDC

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.7 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-47

Digital Electronic Modules


11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage

Rated value

230 VAC

For signal "1"

164 to 264 VAC

For signal "0"

0 to 40 VAC

Input current
At signal "1"

5 to 30 mA

Input delay

At "0" to "1"

15 ms

At "1" to "0"

45 ms

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire
BEROs

No

11-48

Permitted bias current

Max. 2 mA

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)

11.12

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)

11.12

Order number
6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0

Features
Digital electronic module with two outputs
Output current 0.5 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Supports isochronous operation

Peculiarity
When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a
mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for
approximately 50 s. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast
counters.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for
the different terminal modules:
Table 11-19 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG'29'&R$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+
'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ3(

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-49

Digital Electronic Modules


11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF
$8; HJ0
$8; HJ0

11-50

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8; HJ0
$8; HJ0

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

3
3

0
/

5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQ LQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\






Figure 11-13 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-51

Digital Electronic Modules


11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

P1

24 VDC
Yes1

Total current of the outputs (per module)

1A

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From the load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 5 mA per channel


Typ. 0.4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

At signal "1"

Min.. L+ (-1V)

Output current

At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range

0.5 A
7 mA up to 0.6 A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 0.3 mA

Output delay (for resistive load)

At "0" to "1"

Max. 200 s

At "1" to "0"

Max. 1.3 ms

Load resistor range

48 to 3.4 k

Lamp load

Max. 5 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

Yes (per module)

To increase performance

No

Control of a digital input

11-52

Yes

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
Switch rate

For resistive load

100 Hz

With inductive load

2 Hz

For lamp load

10 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof

Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the


power module

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes2

Threshold on

Typ. 0.7 to 1.8 A

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

Per channel

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-53

Digital Electronic Modules


11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

11.13

4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

11.13

Order number
6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0

Features
Digital electronic module with four outputs
Output current 0.5 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights

Peculiarity
When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a
mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for
approximately 50 s. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast
counters.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for
the different terminal modules:
Table 11-20 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

&+
&+

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+
ZLUH

'2 
'2
0
$8; HJ3(

11-54

'2

'2
0

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5


A per channel)
M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
View

Pin assignment

70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7
Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8

&+
&+

'2 

'2

'2

'2

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5


A per channel)

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

&+
&+
'2 

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+


'2

'2

'2

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5


A per channel)

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

&+
&+

&+
&+

'2 

'2

'2

'2

$8; HJ3(
$8; HJ3(

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8

ZLUH

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5


A per channel)
M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(
$8; HJ3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-55

Digital Electronic Modules


11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

0
3
3

/

5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQDQG
LQWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\





0RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-14 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

11-56

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

P1

24 VDC
Yes1

Total current of the outputs (per module)

2A

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From the load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 5 mA per channel


Typ. 0.8 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

At signal "1"

Min.. L+ (-1V)

Output current

At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range

0.5 A
7 mA up to 0.6A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 0.3 mA

Output delay (for resistive load)

At "0" to "1"

Max. 100 s

At "1" to "0"

Max. 300 s

Load resistor range

48 to 3.4 k

Lamp load

Max. 5 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

Yes (per module)

To increase performance

No

Control of a digital input

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Yes

11-57

Digital Electronic Modules


11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
Switch rate

For resistive load

100 Hz

With inductive load

2 Hz

For lamp load

10 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof

Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the


power module2

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes3

11-58

Threshold on

Typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

The module must be supplied with voltage.

Per channel

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)

11.14

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)

11.14

Order number
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with two outputs
Output current 0.5 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Supports isochronous operation

Peculiarity
When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a
mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for
approximately 50 s. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast
counters.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A High
Feature for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-21 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+
'2 

'2

9'&

9'&
0

0
$8; HJ3(

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+

ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-59

Digital Electronic Modules


11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A7
70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A3
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

11-60

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

3
3

0
/

5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\






Figure 11-15 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-61

Digital Electronic Modules


11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

P1

24 VDC
Yes1

Total current of the outputs (per module)

1A

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From the load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 5 mA per channel


Typ. 0.4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Diagnostic functions readable

Red "SF" LED


Yes
Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current

At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range

0.5 A
7 mA up to 0.6A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 0.3 mA

Output delay (for resistive load)

At "0" to "1"

At "1" to "0"

Max. 100 s
Max. 400 s

Load resistor range

48 to 3.4 k

Lamp load

Max. 2.5 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel

11-62

For redundant triggering of a load

Yes (per module)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)

To increase performance

Control of a digital input

No
Yes

Switch rate

For resistive load

100 Hz

With inductive load

2 Hz

For lamp load

10 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof

Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the


power module

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes2

Threshold on

Typ. 1.5 A

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

Per channel

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-63

Digital Electronic Modules


11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)

11.15

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)

11.15

Order number
6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0

Features
Digital electronic module with two outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights

Peculiarity
When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a
mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for
approximately 50 s. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast
counters.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for
the different terminal modules:
Table 11-22 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+
'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ3(

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

11-64

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-65

Digital Electronic Modules


11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW

3
3

0
/

5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\






Figure 11-16 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

11-66

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports clocked operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

Polarity reversal

24 VDC
Yes1

Total current of the outputs (per module)

4A

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From rated load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 5 mA per channel


Typ. 1.4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current

At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range

2A
7 mA to 2.4 A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 0.5 mA

Output delay (for resistive load)

At "0" to "1"

Max. 200 s

At "1" to "0"

Max. 1.3 ms

Load resistor range

12 to 3.4 k

Lamp load

Max. 10 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

Yes (per module)

To increase performance

No

Control of a digital input

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Yes

11-67

Digital Electronic Modules


11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
Switch rate

For resistive load

100 Hz

With inductive load

2 Hz (0.5 H)

For lamp load

10 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof

Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the


power module

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes2

11-68

Threshold on

Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

Per channel

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)

11.16

4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)

11.16

Order number
6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0

Features
Digital electronic module with four outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights

Peculiarity
When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a
mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for
approximately 50 s. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast
counters.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for
the different terminal modules:
Table 11-23 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

ZLUH

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A


per channel)
M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(

$8; HJ3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-69

Digital Electronic Modules


11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+
&+

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8

&+
&+

'2 

'2

'2

'2

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A


per channel)

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7

70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3


&+
&+
'2 

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+
&+


'2

'2

'2

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A


per channel)

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3


70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7


Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4
Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8

&+
&+
'2 

'2

'2

'2

$8; HJ3(
$8; HJ3(

11-70

&+
&+

ZLUH

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A


per channel)
M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(
$8; HJ3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW

3
3

0
/

5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\





0RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-17 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-71

Digital Electronic Modules


11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports clocked operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

Polarity reversal

24 VDC
Yes1

Total current of the outputs (per module)

4A

Isolation

between the channels

No

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From rated load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 5 mA per channel


Typ. 1.6 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current

At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range

2A
7 mA to 2.4 A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 0.5 mA

Output delay (for resistive load)

At "0" to "1"

Max. 200 s

At "1" to "0"

Max. 1.3 ms

Load resistor range

12 to 3.4 k

Lamp load

Max. 10 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

Yes (per module)

To increase performance

No

Control of a digital input

11-72

Yes

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
Switch rate

For resistive load

100 Hz

With inductive load

2 Hz (0.5 H)

For lamp load

10 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof

Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the


power module

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes2

Threshold on

Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

Per channel

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-73

Digital Electronic Modules


11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)

11.17

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)

11.17

Order number
6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with two outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Supports clocked operation

Peculiarity
When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a
mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for
approximately 50 s. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast
counters.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A High Feature
for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-24 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+
'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

$8; HJ3(

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

11-74

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+
ZLUH

'2 

'2

9'&

9'&

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-75

Digital Electronic Modules


11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW

0
3
3

/

5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\






Figure 11-18 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature

11-76

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports clocked operation

Yes

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

Polarity reversal

24 VDC
Yes1

Total current of the outputs (per module)

4A

Isolation

Between the channels

No

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

Between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From rated load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 5 mA per channel


Typ. 1.4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Diagnostic functions readable

Red "SF" LED


Yes
Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current

At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range

2A
7 mA to 2.4 A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 0.5 mA

Output delay (for resistive load)

At "0" to "1"

At "1" to "0"

Max. 100 s
Max. 400 s

Load resistor range

12 to 3.4 k

Lamp load

Max. 5 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Yes (per module)

11-77

Digital Electronic Modules


11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)

To increase performance

No

Control of a digital input

Yes

Switch rate

For resistive load

100 Hz

With inductive load

2 Hz (0.5 H)

For lamp load

10 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof

Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the


power module

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes2

11-78

Threshold on

Typ. 4 A

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

Per channel

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)

11.18

11.18

Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0

Features
Digital electronic module with two outputs
Output current 2 A per output
Rated load voltage 24-48/120/230 VAC
Substitute value
Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes
Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 to 230 VAC for the
different terminal modules:
Table 11-25 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

70(6$DQG'29$&

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+
'2 

1
$8; HJ3(

N: Neutral conductor

&+


$


$


'2

1
$8; HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHGWR3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-79

Digital Electronic Modules


11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

70(6DQG'29$&

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+
'2 

N: Neutral conductor

&+


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 230
VAC.

'2

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG'29$&

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+
'2 

N: Neutral conductor

&+


'2

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6$DQG'29$&

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)

&+
'2 
QF
1
QF
$8;
$8;

11-80

&+

N: Neutral conductor

'2

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 230
VAC.

1
QF

QF

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)

Block diagram

=&


%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

3
3

=&




1
/

Figure 11-19 Block diagram of the 2DO 24-230 VAC

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 37 g
Data for specific modules

Supports clocked operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Max. 600 m

Shielded

Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L1 (from the power module)

Frequency

24-230 VAC
47 to 63 Hz

Total current of the outputs (per module)

Up to 40 C

Max. 2 A*

Up to 60 C

Max. 1 A*

Isolation

Between the channels

Between the channels and backplane bus

Insulation tested

No
Yes
2500 VDC

Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Max. 18 mA

From rated load voltage L1 (no load)

Max. 15 mA per channel

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-81

Digital Electronic Modules


11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
Power dissipation of the module

Max. 4 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage

At signal "1"

Min. L (-1.5 V)

Output current (per channel)

At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range

2A
0.1 mA to 2.2 A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 3 mA

Output delay (for resistive load)

At "0" to "1"

At "1" to "0"

Zero cross inhibit voltage

Max. 15 ms
Max. 15 ms
Max. 25 V

Motor starter size

Up to 40 C

Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 5

Up to 60 C

Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 4

Lamp load

Max. 100 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

To increase performance

Control of a digital input

Yes (per module)


No
Possible

Switch rate

For resistive load

Max. 10 Hz

With inductive load

Max. 0.5 Hz

For lamp load

Max. 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes, by means of fuse in the power module

* Total current of the outputs (per module), see figure below

11-82

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)

Total current of the outputs


7HPSHUDWXUH

r&

r&

r&

7RWDOFXUUHQWSHUPRGXOH
$

$

$

Figure 11-20 Total current of the outputs for 2DO 24 to 230 VAC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-83

Digital Electronic Modules


11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

11.19

2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

11.19

Order number
6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0

Note
If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/PELF) on one channel of the
2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, you can only use an extra-low voltage system
(SELV/PELF) on the other channel.
As of version 2 of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A there is no longer an
internal jumper between terminals 2 and 6. If you need this jumper, you can replace it with
an external jumper between terminals 3 and 7 (see block diagram below).

Features
Digital electronic module with two relay outputs
Output current 5 A per output
Rated load voltage up to 120 VDC and up to 230 VAC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Isolated from the supply voltage

Caution
The rated supply voltage of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A is 24 VDC.
The 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A can only be located in a potential group
with 24 VDC (from the power module).

11-84

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A,
24-230 VAC/5 A (as of version 2) for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-26 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of Version 2)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

70(6$DQG5212
9'&$9$&$

&+

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
13, 14: Normally open contact
channel 0:

&+

23, 24: Normally open contact


channel 1:
Internal jumper between
terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7













$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(
$8;UDLOPXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6DQG5212
9'&$9$&$

&+

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
13, 14: Normally open contact
channel 0:

&+

23, 24: Normally open contact


channel 1:









Terminals 4 and 8 can be used


for unneeded wires up to the
load voltage used.





Internal jumper between


terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

QF

QF

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

&+

70(6DQG5212
9'&$9$&$

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7

&+

23, 24: Normally open contact


channel 1:
Internal jumper between
terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7













Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13, 14: Normally open contact


channel 0:

11-85

Digital Electronic Modules


11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

70(6$DQG5212
9'&$9$&$

&+

23, 24: Normally open contact


channel 1:
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used
for unneeded wires up to the
load voltage used.











QF

$8;
$8;

13, 14: Normally open contact


channel 0:

&+



QF

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7

Internal jumper between


terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

$8;
$8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW


 



3
3

0
/

3RODULW\UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ

)URPSURGXFWOHYHORIWKH52129'&9$&$WKHLQWHUQDO
EULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQGLVQRWLQVWDOOHG,I\RXUHTXLUHWKLVEULGJHLWFDQEH
UHSODFHGE\DQH[WHUQDOEULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQG

Figure 11-21 Block diagram of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 230 VAC/5 A

11-86

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 50 g
Data for specific modules

Supports clocked operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Shielded

Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power


module)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes

Up to 50 C

Max. 5 A

Up to 60 C

Max. 4 A

Isolation

Between the channels

Yes

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and supply voltage

Yes

Between the supply voltage and backplane


bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference

Between the supply voltage and backplane


bus

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Between channels and backplane bus

240 VAC

Between the channels and supply voltage

Insulation tested

240 VAC
Yes

Between the supply voltage and backplane


bus

500 VDC

Between channels and backplane bus

1500 VAC

Between the channels and supply voltage

1500 VAC

Current consumption
From the power supply L+

Max. 30 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.6 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Data for selecting an actuator

Output current

Continuous thermal current

Max. 5 A

Min. load current

8 mA

Min. voltage

17 V

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-87

Digital Electronic Modules


11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

No

To increase performance

No

Control of a digital input

Yes

Switch rate

For resistive load

2 Hz

With inductive load

0.5 Hz

For lamp load

2 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

No

Short-circuit protection of the output 1

No

11-88

The relay outputs must be fused externally with 6A.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts


With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table.
This table shows the switching capacity and endurance of the relay contacts:
Table 11-27 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts
Resistive load
For resistive load

Voltage
24 VDC

For inductive load in


accordance with IEC
947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15

Operating cycles
(typical)

5.0 A

0.1 million

4.0 A

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.5 million

1.0 A

1.6 million

0.5 A

4 million

0.1 A

7 million

60 VDC

0.5 A

1.6 million

120 VDC

0.2 A

1.6 million

48 VAC

2.0 A

1.6 million

60 VAC

2.0 A

1.2 million

120 VAC

5.0 A

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

5.0 A

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

2.0 A

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.2 million

0.5 A

0.5 million

60 VDC

0.5 A

0.2 million

120 VDC

0.2 A

0.5 million

48 VAC

1.0 A

0.7 million

60 VAC

1.0 A

0.5 million

120 VAC

2.0 A

0.1 million

230 VAC

For inductive load in


accordance with IEC
947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15

Current

24 VDC

230 VAC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

1.0 A

0.3 million

0.5 A

1 million

0.1 A

2 million

2.0 A

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.3 million

0.5 A

1 million

11-89

Digital Electronic Modules


11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

11.20

2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module


(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

11.20

Features
Digital electronic module with two relay outputs
Output current 5 A per output
Substitute value
Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Isolated from the supply voltage
Normally open contact and normally closed contact

Note
If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on one channel of the relay
module, you can only use an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on the other
channel.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A,
24-230 VAC/5 A for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-28 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

70(6$DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$

&+


&RPPRQ

12FRQWDFW

12FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

1, 2: normally open contact


channel 0
1, 3: normally closed contact
channel 0

&+

&RPPRQ

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7

5, 6: normally open contact


channel 1
5, 7: normally closed contact
channel 1

$8;UDLOPXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(

11-90

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$

&+

&+

&RPPRQ

12FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW

&RPPRQ

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
1, 2: normally open contact
channel 0
1, 3: normally closed contact
channel 0

12FRQWDFW

5, 6: normally open contact


channel 1

1&FRQWDFW

5, 7: normally closed contact


channel 1

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

&+
&RPPRQ

12FRQWDFW


1&FRQWDFW

70(6DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7

&+

1, 3: normally closed contact


channel 0

&RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW

5, 6: normally open contact


channel 1

1&FRQWDFW

5, 7: normally closed contact


channel 1

1, 2: normally open contact


channel 0

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
70(6$DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$

&+
&RPPRQ

&+


12FRQWDFW


1&FRQWDFW

$8;
$8;

&RPPRQ

1, 2: normally open contact


channel 0
1, 3: normally closed contact
channel 0

12FRQWDFW

5, 6: normally open contact


channel 1

1&FRQWDFW

5, 7: normally closed contact


channel 1

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-91

Digital Electronic Modules


11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ






3
3

0
/

3RODULW\
UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ

Figure 11-22 Block diagram of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D

15 81 52 (mm)

Weight

Approx. 50 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Unshielded

Max. 600 m

Shielded

Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power


module)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes

Up to 50 C

Max. 5 A

Up to 60 C

Max. 4 A

Isolation

11-92

Between the channels

Yes

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and supply voltage

Yes

Between the supply voltage and backplane


bus

Yes

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
Permissible potential difference

Between the supply voltage and backplane


bus

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Between channels and backplane bus

240 VAC

Between the channels and supply voltage

240 VAC

Insulation tested

Between the supply voltage and backplane


bus

500 VDC

Between channels and backplane bus

2500 VDC

Between the channels and supply voltage

2500 VDC

Current consumption

From the power supply L+

Max. 30 mA

From the backplane bus

Max. 10 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LEDs per channel

Diagnostic functions

No
Data for selecting an actuator

Output current

Continuous thermal current

Max. 5 A

Min. load current

8 mA

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load

To increase performance

Control of a digital input

No
No
Yes

Switch rate

For resistive load

2 Hz

With inductive load

0.5 Hz

For lamp load

2 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on


circuit interruption

No

Short-circuit protection of the output 1

No

The relay outputs must be protected externally with a 6 A fuse. For installation in a hazardous area
in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), only remove the fuse using a suitable tool if the
module is not in a potentially explosive area.
1

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-93

Digital Electronic Modules


11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts


With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the following
table.
The normally open and normally closed contacts of the relay vary in their length of service
life. This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts.
Table 11-29 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
Resistive load

For resistive load

Voltage

24 VDC

Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally open
contact

Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally closed
contact

5,0 A

0.1 million

0.15 million

4.0 A

0.2 million

0.175 million

2.0 A

0.45 million

0.3 million

0.5 A

1.4 million

1.1 million

0.1 A

1.5 million

1.5 million

2.0 A

0.15 million

0.11 million

1.0 A

0.3 million

0.2 million

0.5 A

0.6 million

0.6 million

0.1 A

0.8 million

0.6 million

48 VAC

2.0 A

0.45 million

0.35 million

60 VAC

2.0 A

0.45 million

0.35 million

120 VAC

5.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

0.3 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.6 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

1.0 million

5.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

0.3 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.6 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

1.0 million

48 VDC

230 VAC

11-94

Current

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Digital Electronic Modules


11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
Resistive load

Voltage

Current

Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally open
contact

Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally closed
contact

For inductive load in


24 VDC
accordance with IEC
947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15

2.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.2 million

0.2 million

0.5 A

0.5 million

0.5 million

48 VDC

2.0 A

0.07 million

0.05 million

1.0 A

0.15 million

0.1 million

0.5 A

0.4 million

0.25 million

48 VAC

1.0 A

0.5 million

0.3 million

60 VAC

1.0 A

0.5 million

0.3 million

120 VAC

2.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.3 million

0.1 million

0.5 A

0.9 million

0.6 million

0.1 A

1.5 million

1.0 million

2.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.5 million

0.3 million

0.5 A

0.9 million

0.6 million

0.1 A

1.0 million

1.0 million

230 VAC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11-95

Digital Electronic Modules


11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

11-96

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.1

12.1

12

Introduction

Analog electronic module range


The range of analog electronic modules (EM) includes modules for measuring voltages and
currents. For time-critical measuring of voltage and current, you can use the HIGH SPEED
modules. The HIGH FEATURE modules provide a higher resolution and greater accuracy.
There are also modules available for connecting thermocouples and resistance
thermometers or resistors.
Modules for connecting loads/actuators to current and voltage outputs complete the range.

12.2

12.2.1

12.2

Analog value representation

Overview

Electronic modules with analog inputs


You can use electronic modules with analog inputs to record, evaluate, and convert
continuously changing signals to digital values that you can process further. Examples of
such continuously changing signals are those that occur when measuring temperature or
pressure.

Electronic modules with analog outputs


The electronic modules with analog outputs allow digitized values that are input by means of
a controller to be converted in an analog output module to a corresponding analog signal
(current or voltage) to control actuators (setpoint input for speed controllers, temperature
controllers, etc.).

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-1

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled
The rules and additions outlined below apply to the following measuring ranges:
V to 5 V, 4 mA to 20 mA
Temperature sensor Pt xxx Standard and Climatic, Ni xx Standard and Climatic, Cu 10
Standard and Climatic
Thermocouple type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, C, T
The following additions and rules apply:
Table 12-1
Format

Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled
Parameter assignment

Measured values
Decimal

S7

Explanation

Hexadecimal

Enable "Wire break" diagnostics (at 1


to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1

32767

7FFFH

"Open circuit" diagnostic message

"Wire break check" enabled (in the


case of TC)

32767

7FFFH

"Open circuit" diagnostic message

"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at


1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1
"Overflow/underflow" enabled

-32767

8000H

Measured value after leaving the


underrange
"Lower limit value violated"
diagnostic message

"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at


1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1
"Overflow/underflow" disabled

-32767

8000H

Measured value after leaving the


underrange

"Wire break check" disabled (in the


case of TC)

---

---

Open input: undefined measured


value

Measuring range limits for detection of wire break/underrange:


1 to 5 V: for 0, 296 V
4 to 20 mA: for 1,185 mA

12.2.2

Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7

Analog value representation


The digitized analog value for input and output values is the same in the same rated range.
Analog values are represented in twos complement.
The following table shows the analog value representation of the analog electronic modules.
Table 12-2

Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format)

Resolution

Analog value

Bit number

15

14

13

12

11

10

Significance of the bits

214

213

212

211

210

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

12-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Sign
The sign (S, +/-) of the analog value is always in bit number 15:
"0" +
"1"

Measured-value resolution
In the table below, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the
associated decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog values.
The following table shows the resolutions 11, 12, 13, and 15 bits + sign. Each analog value
is entered in the accumulator with left justification. The bits marked "x" are set to "0".
Table 12-3

Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format)

Resolution in bits

Units

Analog value

Decimal

Hexadecimal

High byte

Low byte

11+ sign (S)

16

10H

S0000000

001xxxx

12 + sign (S)

8H

S0000000

0001xxx

13 + sign (S)

4H

S0000000

00001xx

15 + sign (S)

1H

S0000000

0000001

Note
This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are
the result of a conversion in the analog electronic module.

Note
The following applies to temperature measurements: In the overrange and underrange, the
gradient of the characteristic curve at the point where the linearized rated range is left is
retained.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-3

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

12.2.3

Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage,
current, and resistance-type sensors

Introduction
The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of the
analog input modules.
The binary representation of the analog values is always the same, so these tables only
compare the measuring ranges and the units.

Measuring ranges for voltage: 80 mV, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V


Table 12-4

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 80 mV, 2.5 V, 5 V, and 10 V

Measuring
range 80 mV

Measuring
range 2.5 V

Measuring
range 5 V

> 94,071
94,071
:
80,003
80,000
60,000
:
- 60,000
- 80,000
- 80,003
:
- 94,074
< - 94,074

> 2,9397
2,9397
:
2,5001
2,5
1,86
:
- 1,86
- 2,50
- 2,5001
:
- 2,9397
< - 2,9397

> 5,8794
5,8794
:
5,0002
5,00
3,75
:
- 3,75
- 5,00
- 5,0002
:
- 5,8796
< - 5,8796

Measuring
range
10 V
> 11,7589
11,7589
:
10,0004
10,00
7,50
:
- 7,50
- 10,00
- 10,0004
:
- 11,759
< - 11,759

Decimal

Units
Hexadecimal

32767
32511
:
27649
27648
20736
:
-20736
-27648
-27649
:
-32512
-32768

7FFF H
7EFFH
:
6C01H
6C00H
5100H
:
AF00H
9400H
93FFH
:
8100H
8000H

Range

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Measuring ranges for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA


Table 12-5

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Measuring range 1
to 5 V
> 5,704
5,704
:
5,000145
5,000
4,000
:
1,000
0,999855
:
0,296
< 0,296

12-4

Measuring range
0 to 20 mA
> 23,5178
23,5178
:
20,0007
20,0000
15,0000
:
0,0000
Negative values
not possible

Measuring range
4 to 20 mA
> 22,8142
22,8142
:
20,0005
20,0000
16,0000
:
4,0000
3,9995
.
1,1852
< 1,1852

Decimal
32767
32511
:
27649
27648
20736
:
0
-1
:
-4864
-32768

Units

Hexadecimal
7FFFH
7EFFH
:
6C01H
6C00H
5100H
:
0H
FFFFH
:
ED00H
8000H

Range
Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Measuring range for current: 20 mA


Table 12-6

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range 20 mA

Measuring range 20 mA

Range

Units
Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 23,5150

32767

7FFFH

23,5150

32511

7EFFH

20,0007

27649

6C01H

20,0000

27648

6C00H

14,9980

20736

5100H

- 14,9980

-20736

AF00H

- 20,0000

-27648

9400H

- 20,0007

-27649

93FFH

- 23,5160

-32512

8100H

< - 23,5160

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance-type sensors: 150 , 300 , 600 , 3000


Table 12-7

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 , 300 , 600 , 3000

Measuring range
150

Measuring range
300

Measuring range
600

Measuring range
3000

Range

Decimal

> 176.38

> 352,77

> 705,53

> 3527,67

32767

7FFFH

176,38

352,77

705,53

3527,67

32511

7EFFH

Units
Hexadecimal

150,005

300,01

600,02

3000,11

27649

6C01H

150,00

300,00

600,00

3000,00

27648

6C00H

112,50

225,00

450,00

2250,00

20736

5100H

0,00

0,00

0,00

0,00

(Negative values not physically possible)

0H

-1

FFFFH

-4864

ED00H

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange*
Underflow*

* If the resistors are connected incorrectly

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-5

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

12.2.4

Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for


resistance thermometer

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Standard


Table 12-8

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F

Pt x00 Standard in C
(1 digit = 0.1C)

Pt x00 Standard in F
(1 digit = 0.1 F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 1000,0

32767

7FFFH

> 1832,0

32767

7FFFH

1000,0
:

10000

2710H

1832,0

18320

4790H

850,1

8501

2135H

1562,1

15621

3D05H

850,0

8500

2134H

1562,0

15620

3D04H

Units

Range

Units

-200,0

-2000

F830H

-328,0

-3280

F330H

-200,1

-2001

F82FH

-328,1

-3281

F32FH

-243,0

-2430

F682H

-405,4

-4054

F02AH

< - 243,0

-32768

8000H

< - 405,4

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic


Table 12-9

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F

Pt x00 Climatic in C
(1 digit = 0.01C)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 155,00

32767

155,00
:

12-6

Pt x00 Climatic in F
(1 digit = 0.01 F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

7FFFH

> 311,00

32767

7FFFH

15500

3C8CH

311,00

31100

797CH

130,01

13001

32C9H

266,01

26601

67E9H

130,00

13000

32C8H

266,00

26600

67E8H

Units

Range

Units

-120,00

-12000

D120H

-184,00

-18400

B820H

-120,01

-12001

D11FH

-184,01

-18401

B81FH

-145,00

-14500

C75CH

-229,00

-22900

A68CH

< - 145,00

-32768

8000H

< - 229,00

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard


Table 12-10 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F
Ni x00 Standard in C
(1 digit = 0.1C)

Ni x00 Standard in F
(1 digit = 0.1 F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 295,0

32767

7FFFH

> 563,0

32767

7FFFH

295,0
:

2950

B86H

563,0

5630

15FEH

250,1

2501

9C5H

482,1

4821

12D5H

250,0

2500

9C4H

482,0

4820

12D4H

Units

Range

Units

-60,0

-600

FDA8H

-76,0

-760

FD08H

-60,1

-601

FDA7H

-76,1

-761

FD07H

-105,0

-1050

FBE6H

-157,0

-1570

F9DEH

< -105,0

-32768

8000H

< -157,0

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Climatic


Table 12-11 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F
Ni x00 Climatic in C
(1 digit = 0,01C)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Ni x00 Climatic in F
(1 digit = 0.01 F)

Decimal

Hexa
decimal

> 295,00

32767

7FFFH

> 325,11

32767

7FFFH

295,00
:

29500

733CH

327,66

32766

7FFEH

250,01

25001

61A9H

280,01

28001

6D61H

250,00

25000

61A8H

280,00

28000

6D60H

Units

Range

Units

-60,00

-6000

E890H

-76,00

-7600

E250H

-60,01

-6001

E88FH

-76,01

-7601

E24FH

-105,00

-10500

D6FCH

-157,00

-15700

C2ACH

< - 105,00

-32768

8000H

< - 157,00

-32768

8000H

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

12-7

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Standard


Table 12-12 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in C und F
Cu 10 Standard in C
(1 digit = 0.1C)

Cu 10 Standard in F
(1 digit = 0.1 F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 312,0

32767

7FFFH

> 593,6

32767

7FFFH

312,0
:

3120

C30H

593,6

5936

1730H

260,1

2601

A29H

500,1

5001

12D5H

260,0

2600

A28H

500,0

5000

1389H

Units

Range

Units

-200,0

-2000

F830H

-328,0

-3280

F330H

-200,1

-2001

F82FH

-328,1

-3281

F32FH

-240,0

-2400

F6A0H

-400,0

-4000

F060H

< - 240,0

-32768

8000H

< - 400,0

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic


Table 12-13 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in C und F
Cu 10 Climatic in C
(1 digit = 0.01C)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 180,00

32767

180,00

18000

12-8

Cu 10 Climatic in F
(1 digit = 0.01 F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

7FFFH

> 325,11

32767

7FFFH

4650H

327,66

32766

7FFEH

Units

Range

Units

150,01

15001

3A99H

280,01

28001

6D61AH

150,00

15000

3A98H

280,00

28000

6D60H

-50,00

-5000

EC78H

-58,00

-5800

E958H

-50,01

-5001

EC77H

-58,01

-5801

E957H

-60,00

-6000

E890H

-76,00

-7600

E250H

< - 60,00

-32768

8000H

< - 76,00

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

12.2.5

Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for


thermocouples

Measuring range for thermocouple: Type B


Table 12-14 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in C and F
Type B in C

Type B in F

Units
Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 2070,0

32767

7FFFH

2070,0

20700

1820,1
1820,0

Range

Units
Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 3276,6

32767

7FFFH

50DCH

3276,6

32766

7FFEH

18201

4719H

2786,6

27866

6CDAH

18200

4718H

2786,5

27865

6CD9H

0,0

0000H

32

320

0140H

-0,1

-1

FFFFH

31,9

319

013FH

-120,0

-1200

FB50H

-184,0

-1840

F8D0H

< -120,0

-32768

8000H

< -184,0

-32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple: Type C


Table 12-15 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in C and F
Type C in C

Type C in F

Units
Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 2500,0

32767

7FFFH

2500,0

25000

2315,1

23151

5A6FH

2315,0

23150

5A6EH

Range

Units
Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 3276,6

32767

7FFFH

61A8H

3276,6

32766

7FFEH

2786,6

27866

6CDAH

2786,5

27865

6CD9H

0,0

0000H

32,0

320

0140H

0,1

-1

FFFFH

31,9

319

013FH

-120,0

-1200

FB50H

-184,0

-1840

F8D0H

< -120,0

-32768

8000H

< -184,0

-32768

8000H

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

12-9

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Measuring range for thermocouple type E


Table 12-16 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in C and F
Type E in C

> 1200,0
1200,0
:
1000,1
1000,0
:
-270,0
< -270,0

Decimal
32767
12000
:
10001
10000
:
-2700
- 32768

Units

Hexadecimal
7FFFH
2EE0H
:
2711H
2710H
:
F574H
8000H

Type E in F

> 2192,0
2192,0
:
1832,1
1832,0
:
-454,0
< -454,0

Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
21920
55A0H
:
:
18321
4791H
18320
4790H
:
:
-4540
EE44H
- 32768
8000H

Range

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range
Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple type J


Table 12-17 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in C and F
Type J in C

> 1450,0
1450,0
:
1200,1
1200,0
:
-210,0
< -210,0

Decimal
32767
14500
:
12010
12000
:
-2100
- 32768

Units

Hexadecimal
7FFFH
38A4H
:
2EEAH
2EE0H
:
F7CCH
8000H

Type J in F

> 2642,0
2642,0
:
2192,1
2192,0
:
-346,0
< -346,0

Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
26420
6734H
:
:
21921
55A1H
21920
55A0H
:
:
-3460
F27CH
- 32768
8000H

Range

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range
Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple type K


Table 12-18 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in C and F
Type K in C

> 1622,0
1622,0
:
1372,1
1372,0
:
-270,0
< -270,0

12-10

Decimal
32767
16220
:
13721
13720
:
-2700
- 32768

Units
Hexa-decim
al
7FFFH
3F5CH
:
3599H
3589H
:
F574H
8000H

Type K in F

> 2951,6
2951,6
:
2501,7
2501,6
:
-454,0
< -454,0

Units
Decimal Hexa-deci
mal
32767
7FFFH
29516
734CH
:
:
25062
61B9H
61B8H
25061
:
:
-4540
EE44H
- 32768
8000H

Range

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range
Underflow

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Measuring range for thermocouple type L


Table 12-19 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in C and F
Type L in C

> 1150,0
1150,0
:
900,1
900,0
:
-200,0
< -200,0

Decimal
32767
11500
:
9001
9000
:
-2000
-32768

Type L in F

Units

Hexadecimal
7FFFH
2CECH
:
2329H
2328H
:
F830H
8000H

> 2102,0
2102,0
:
1652,1
1652,0
:
-328,0
< -328,0

Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
21020
521CH
:
:
16521
4089H
16520
4088H
:
:
-3280
F330H
-32768
8000H

Range

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range
Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple type N


Table 12-20 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in C and F
Type N in C

> 1550,0
1550,0
:
1300,1
1300,0
:
-270,0
< -270,0

Decimal
32767
15500
:
13001
13000
:
-2700
-32768

Type N in F

Units

Hexadecimal
7FFFH
3C8CH
:
32C9H
32C8H
:
F574H
8000H

> 2822,0
2822,0
:
2372,1
2372,0
:
-454,0
< -454,0

Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
28220
6E3CH
:
:
23721
5CA9H
23720
5CA8H
:
:
-4540
EE44H
-32768
8000H

Range

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range
Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple types R, S


Table 12-21 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in C and F
Types R, S in C

> 2019,0
2019,0
:
1769,1
1769,0
:
-50,0
-50,1
:
-170,0
< -170,0

Decimal
32767
20190
:
17691
17690
:
-500
-510
:
-1700
-32768

Units

Hexadecimal
7FFFH
4EDEH
:
451BH
451AH
:
FE0CH
FE0BH
:
F95CH
8000H

Types R, S in F

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

> 3276,6
3276,6
:
3216,3
3216,2
:
-58,0
-58,1
:
-274,0
< -274,0

Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
32766
7FFEH
:
:
32163
7DA3H
7DA2H
32162
:
:
-580
FDBCH
-581
FDBBH
:
:
-2740
F54CH
-32768
8000H

Range

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

12-11

Analog electronic modules


12.2 Analog value representation

Measuring range for thermocouple type T


Table 12-22 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in C and F
Type T in C

Type T in F

Units
Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 540,0

32767

7FFFH

540,0

5400

400,1

4001

0FA1H

400,0

4000

0FA0H

Range

Units
Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 1004,0

32767

7FFFH

1518H

1004,0

10040

2738H

752,1

7521

1DC1H

752,0

7520

1D60H

-270,0

-2700

F574H

-454,0

-4540

EE44H

< -270,0

-32768

8000H

< -454,0

-32768

8000H

12.2.6

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range
Underflow

Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage and
current

Output modules for voltage and current: 5V; 10V; 20mA


Table 12-23 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 5 V; 10 V; 20 mA
Output range 5 V

12-12

Output range 10 V

Output range 20
mA

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Range

Units

> 32511

> 7EFFH

5,8800

11,7589

23,5150

32511

7EFFH

5,0002

10,0004

20,0007

27649

6C01H

5,0000

10,0000

20,0000

27648

6C00H

3,7500

7,5000

14,9980

20736

5100H

- 3,7500

- 7,5000

- 14,9980

-20736

AF00H

- 5,0000

- 10,0000

- 20,0000

-27648

9400H

- 5,0002

- 10,0004

- 20,0007

-27649

93FFH

- 5,8800

- 11,7589

- 23,5160

-32512

8100H

< - 23,5160

< -32512

< 8100H

Overflow
Overrange
Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

Output modules for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V; 4 to 20 mA


Table 12-24 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA

12.3

12.3.1

12.3

Output range
Up to 5 V

Output range
Up to 20 mA

Range

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 32511

> 7EFFH

5,7000

22,8100

32511

7EFFH

5,0002

20,0005

27649

6C01H

5,0000

20,0000

27648

6C00H

Units

1,0000

4,0000

0H

0,9998

3,9995

-1

FFFFH

-6912

E500H

< -6913

< E4FFH

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange
Underflow

Fundamentals of analog value processing

Connecting measuring sensors

Introduction
You can connect different measuring sensors to the analog input modules, depending on the
type of module involved:
Voltage sensor
Current sensors as:
2-wire measuring transducer
4-wire measuring transducer
Resistance-type sensor
In this chapter you will find out how to connect the measuring sensors and what to watch for
when doing so.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-13

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

Lines for analog signals


You should use shielded and twisted-pair lines for the analog signals. This reduces the effect
of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line. If
there are differences in potential between the ends of the line, a compensating current flows
via the shield that can interfere with the analog signals. If this is the case, you should only
ground the shield at one end of the line.

Analog input modules


In the case of the analog input modules there is electrical isolation:
Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus
Between the load voltage and the channels. The following differences exist:
No isolation: Link between MANA and central grounding point
Isolation: No link between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)

Analog output modules


In the case of the analog output modules there is generally electrical isolation:
Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus
Between the load voltage and MANA.

Note
Ensure that this potential difference UISO does not exceed the permitted value. If there is
a possibility of exceeding the permitted value, make a connection between terminal MANA
and the central grounding point.

Connecting measuring sensors to analog inputs


Between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA there can be only a limited potential difference UCM (common-mode
voltage). To ensure that the permitted value is not exceeded, you must take different steps
depending on the whether the sensors are isolated or non-isolated. The steps you have to
take are described in this chapter.
Generally speaking, however, when connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current
measurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors, you should not make a
connection from M- to MANA. This also applies to inputs that have been assigned parameters
correspondingly but unused.

Note
For the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI RTD, and 2AI TC, you must short-circuit unused
analog inputs.

12-14

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

Abbreviations used
The meanings of the abbreviations in the figures below are as follows:
M+

Measuring line (positive)

M-

Measuring line (negative)

MANA

Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

Frame connection

L+

Rated load voltage 24 VDC

UCM

Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the measuring


circuit MANA

UISO

Potential difference between MANA and central grounding point

Isolated measuring sensors


The isolated measuring sensors are not connected to the local ground potential. They can be
floating. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or
dynamic) can occur between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference
point of the measuring circuit MANA.
To ensure that the permitted value for UCM is not exceeded in environments with strong EMC
interference, the following applies:
In the case of the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI I 4WIRE, and 2AI TC: Connect Mwith MANA!
When connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current measurement and when
connecting resistance-type sensors, you must not connect M- to MANA.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-15

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
The following figure illustrates the connection of isolated measuring sensors to the floating
analog input modules.
Connection of isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module:
/
0
0
0
0
0

8&0

1
$'8

0$1$

5
8,62

Logic

Backplane bus

Ground bus

Central grounding point

Recommended connection

Isolated measuring sensors

Non-isolated measuring sensors


The non-isolated measuring sensors are connected to the local ground potential. You must
connect MANA to the ground potential. Depending on local conditions or interference,
potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed
measuring points.
If the permitted value for UCM is exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors
between the measuring points.
The following figure illustrates the connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating
analog input module.

12-16

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module:
/
0
0
0

0
0
8&0

1
$'8

0$1$

4
8,62

Logic

Backplane bus

Ground bus

Equipotential bonding conductor

Non-isolated measuring sensors

Operating four-wire measuring transducers on an external voltage supply


If there is isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you can
connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE without additional connections.
If there is no isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you
can connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE only if the reference potential of the power supply voltages
(24 VDC) is the same.
If there is an increase in interference radiation, a connection between M- and MANA on the
terminal module of the 2AI I 4WIRE is recommended.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-17

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

12.3.2

Connecting thermocouples

Introduction
This section contains additional information on connecting thermocouples.

Compensation of the reference junction temperature


There are various ways of obtaining the reference junction temperature in order to get an
absolute temperature value from the temperature difference between the reference junction
and the measuring point.
Table 12-25 Compensation of the reference junction temperature
Option

Explanation

Reference junction parameters

No compensation

You record not only the temperature of the


measurement point. The temperature of the
reference junction (transition from Cu line to
thermocouple line) also affects the
thermo-electromotive force. The measured value
is thus errored.

None

Use of a compensating
box on the incoming lines
of a single thermocouple

You compensate using a compensating box. The


compensating box is the transition point from the
Cu line to the thermocouple line. No further
processing is necessary through the 2AI TC
Standard.

None

Use of a Pt100 Climatic


Range resistance
thermometer to record the
reference junction
temperature (best method)

You can record the reference junction


temperature using a resistance thermometer
(Pt100 Climatic Range). Given appropriate
parameter assignment, this temperature value in
the ET 200S is distributed to the 2AI TC Standard
modules and calculated in the modules together
with the temperature value obtained for the
measurement point.

The parameter assignment of the IM151-1


and the 2AI TC must be coordinated:
AI RTD Standard assigned
parameters to the Pt100 climatic
range at the correct slot;
AI TC ST: Reference junction : RTD;
select reference junction number 1
IM : Assignment of the reference
junction to a slot with the 2AI RTD
Standard; selection of a channel;

Number of reference junctions: 1 1


Internal compensation in
the case of the 2AI TC
High Feature

There is a temperature sensor in the


TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal
modules. The temperature sensor reports the
temperature of the terminals to the 2AI TC High
Feature. This value is then calculated together
with the measured value from the channel of the
electronic module.

AI TC High Feature:
Reference junction: yes

Extension to a reference junction


The thermocouples can be extended from their connection point by means of equalizing
lines to the reference junction (transition to Cu line) or the compensating box. The reference
junction can also be an ET 200S terminal module.
The equalization lines are made of the same material as the wires of the thermocouple. The
incoming lines are made of copper. Ensure correct polarity when connecting.

12-18

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

Use of a compensating box


The influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (for example,
terminal boxes) can be adjusted with a compensating box.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit that is adjusted for a certain reference
junction temperature (compensating temperature). You connect the thermocouples or their
adjustment lines to the compensating box. The compensating box then forms the reference
junction.
If the actual reference temperature differs from the compensating temperature, the
temperature-dependent bridge resistance changes. A positive or negative compensation
voltage occurs that is added to the thermo-electromotive force.
Compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 C must be used for the
compensation of the analog input modules.
Please note:
The compensating box must be supplied on an isolated basis.
The power supply unit must have adequate interference filtering (by means of a grounded
shielding winding, for example).

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-19

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

Compensation by means of a resistance thermometer at the 2AI RTD


If thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of the 2AI TC have the same reference
junction, compensate by means of a 2AI RTD.
For both channels of the 2AI TC module, you can select "RTD" or "None" as the reference
junction. If you select "RTD," the same reference junction (RTD channel) is always used for
both channels.
$,57'

$,7&

$EEUHYLDWLRQVXVHG
00HDVXULQJFDEOHSRVLWLYH
00HDVXULQJFDEOHQHJDWLYH
,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHSRVLWLYH
,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHQHJDWLYH

$,57'FRQILJXUHGIRU
PHDVXULQJUDQJH3WFOLPDWH
UDQJH

0
,QVXODWHG
WKHUPRFRXSOHVZLWK
H[WHUQDOFRPSHQVDWLRQ
E\PHDQVRIUHVLVWLYH
WKHUPRPHWHU
FRQQHFWHGWR$,57'
FKDQQHO

Figure 12-1

12-20

0









0
0

,&
,&

Compensation by means of the 2AI RTD

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

Parameter assignment of the reference junction for the 2AI TC and the interface module
You set the reference junctions for the 2AI TC electronic modules by means of the following
parameters:
Table 12-26 Reference junction parameters
Parameters

Module

Reference junction slot

Value range

IM 151

Explanation
This parameter allows you to assign a
slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the
channel for measuring the reference
temperature is located (calculation of
the compensation value).

None, 2 to 12
(IM151-1 BASIC)
None, 2 to 63
(IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE
IM 151-1 STANDARD
IM 151-1FO
STANDARD)

Reference junction input

IM 151

RTD at channel 0

This parameter allows you to set the


channel (0/1) for measuring the
reference temperature (calculation of
the compensation value) for the
assigned slot.

RTD at channel 1

Reference junction E0 and


reference junction E1

AI TC

None, RTD

This parameter allows you to enable


the use of the reference junction.

Reference junction number

AI TC

This parameter allows you to assign the


reference junction (1) that contains the
reference temperature (compensation
value).

Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions


Setup: For simplification, only RTD and TC modules are shown in the following figure:
5HIHUHQFH
MXQFWLRQ
6ORW

$,7&



(



(

$,7&



(



(

(



(

(

(



$,7&

$,57'

&RPSHQVDWLRQYLD$,57'PRGXOHV

Figure 12-2

Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-21

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Relevant parameters to be set for the interface module:
Parameters

Value

Reference junction slot

Reference junction input

RTD at channel 0

(Relevant) parameters for 2AI RTD and 2AI TC:


Slot

Parameters

Value

3 (2AI RTD)

Type/range of measurement E0

RTD-4L Pt100 Climatic

5 (2AI TC)

Reference junction E0

RTD

Reference junction E1

None

Reference junction number

Type/range of measurement E0

TC-EL Type...

Type/range of measurement E1

(any)

Reference junction E0

RTD

Reference junction E1

RTD

Reference junction number

Type/range of measurement E0

TC-EL Type...

8 (2AI TC)

11 (2AI TC)

Type/range of measurement E1

TC-EL Type...

Reference junction E0

None

Reference junction E1

RTD

Reference junction number

Type/range of measurement E0

(any)

Type/range of measurement E1

TC-EL Type...

Non-isolated thermocouples
When you use non-isolated thermocouples, you must comply with the permitted
common-mode voltage.

12-22

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

12.3.3

Connecting unused channels of analog input modules

Rules
Note the following when connecting unused channels:
Deactivate unused input channels during parameter assignment.
A deactivated channel always returns a value of 7FFFH.
In the case of the standard modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, 2AI I 4WIRE, 2AI RTD
Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, and 2AI TC High Feature, the cycle
time of the module is halved.
The cycle time remains unchanged for the 4AI I 2WIRE standard module.
In the case of the HIGH SPEED modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, and 2AI I 4WIRE, the cycle
time remains unchanged at 1 ms.
To adhere to the permissible potential differences (UCM), you must wire jumpers on the
terminal module for the unused channels. This is necessary in the case of the following
modules:
Analog input module

TM terminal
Channel 0
1

Channel 1
4

2AI U Standard

2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High


Feature, 2AI TC High Feature
2AI TC Standard

2AI U High Speed

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-23

Analog electronic modules


12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems

12.4

12.4.1

Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of


problems

12.4

Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values

Principle
The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage for
electronic components/sensors and on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP
master).
Table 12-27 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and
the supply voltage L +
Operating mode of the
PLC (CPU of the DP
master)
Power on

Power on

Power off

12-24

RUN

STOP

Input value of the electronic module


with analog inputs (evaluation
possible in the CPU of the DP
master)

Supply voltage L +
to ET 200S (power
module)
L + applied

Output value of the electronic


module with analog outputs

Process values

PLC values

7FFFH until the first conversion after


switching on or after assigning
parameters to the module

Until the first value output:


After switching on, a signal
of 0 mA or 0 V is output
Dependent on the
"Behavior at
CPU-Master-STOP"
parameter

L + not applied

7FFFH

L + applied

Process value

Dependent on the "Behavior at


CPU-Master-STOP" parameter

L + not applied

7FFFH

L + applied

Dependent on the "Behavior at


CPU-Master-STOP" parameter

L + not applied

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems

12.4.2

Effect of the value range for the analog input

Principle
The behavior of the electronic modules with analog inputs depends on where the input
values are in the value range.
Table 12-28 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value in the value range
Measured value in

Input value in SIMATIC S7 format

Input value in SIMATIC S5 format

Rated range

Measured value

Measured value

Overrange/underrange

Measured value

Measured value

Overflow

7FFFH

End of the overrange +1 plus overflow


bit

Underflow

8000H

End of the underrange -1 plus overflow


bit

Before assigning parameters or in the


case of incorrect parameter
assignment1

7FFFH

7FFFH

1 The following applies to 2AI U Standard, 2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI RTD Standard, and 2AI TC
Standard with product version 1: If you assign a parameter incorrectly and trigger the diagnostic message for a parameter
assignment error (for example, wire break for measuring range 20 mA), the SF LED lights up on the module and you can
evaluate the diagnostics. In this state, correct input values are delivered to the DP master.

12.4.3

Effect of the value range for the analog output

Principle
The behavior of the electronic modules with analog outputs depends on where the output
values are in the value range. The following table indicates this:
Table 12-29 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range
Output value in

Output value in SIMATIC S5/S7 format

Rated range

Value from DP master

Overrange/underrange

Value from DP master

Overflow

0 signal

Underflow

0 signal

Before assigning parameters or in the case of incorrect


parameter assignment1

0 signal

The following applies to 2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard with product version 1: If the assigned substitute value is
outside the nominal range, a diagnostic message for parameter error is entered and the SF LED lights up. In this state, the
output values transmitted by the DP master are output at the analog output modules.
1

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-25

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

12.4.4

Use of the shield connection

Rules

12.5
12.5.1

To avoid interference with analog electronic modules, we recommend the following:


Use shielded cables for the sensors/actuators.
Apply the cable shields on the shield connection element.
Connect the shield connection to the ground bus.

12.5

Parameters for analog electronic modules

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST,
4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST

Overview
Table 12-30 Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard
2AI U
Standard

2AI I 2WIRE
2AI I 4WIRE
Standard
Standard
4AI I 2WIRE
Standard
Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error,
internal error)
Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow
Diagnostics:
wire break2
Smoothing

Diagnostics:
wire break

Type/range
of measurement

---

---

---

Type/range of
measurement
---

---

---

1
2

Diagnostics:
wire break1

Type/range of
measurement

Value range

Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
Deactivated
5V
Up to 5 V
10V
Deactivated
2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
Deactivated
4 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
4 WIRE: 20 mA

Default setting

Applicability

Disable

Module

Disable

Module

Disable

Channel

None

Channel

10V

Channel

2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA

Channel

2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA

Channel

Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA


Only in the measuring range 1 to 5 V

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

12-26

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

12.5.2

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF

Overview
Table 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature
2AI U High Feature

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error,


internal error)

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

---

Disable
Enable

Disable

Channel

None
Weak
Medium
Strong

None

Channel

Diagnostics: Wire break1

Smoothing

Type/range of
measurement

---

Deactivated
5V
1 to 5 V
10V

10V

Channel

---

Type/range of measurement

Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
20mA

4 to 20 mA

Channel

Interference frequency suppression

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Run-time calibration

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-27

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

12.5.3

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High
Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

Parameters
Table 12-32 Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed
2AI U High Speed

2AI I 2WIRE High


Speed

2AI I 4WIRE High


Speed

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal


error)

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Disable
Enable

Disable

Channel

None
Weak
Medium
Strong

None

Channel

---

Diagnostics: Wire
break

Diagnostics: Wire
break

Smoothing

Type/range of
measurement

---

---

Deactivated
10 V
5 V
2,5 V
Up to 5 V

10V

Channel

---

Type/range of
measurement

---

Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Channel

---

---

Type/range of
measurement

Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
20mA

4 to 20 mA

Channel

Note
If you deactivate a channel of the HIGH SPEED module, you do not achieve any speed
advantage on account of the measuring procedure used.

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

12-28

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

12.5.4

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST,
and 2AI TC HF

Parameters
Table 12-33 Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC
2AI RTD
Standard

2AI TC Standard

2AI TC High
Feature

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error,


internal error)

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics:
Wire break2

Disable
Enable

Disable

Channel

None
Weak
Medium
Strong

None

Channel

Celsius
Fahrenheit

Celsius

Module

None
RTD

None

Channel

None
Yes (i.e. internal)

None

Channel

None
1 to 8
(in the case of the IM151-1
STANDARD and IM151-1
FO STANDARD)
1
(in the case of the IM151-1
BASIC and IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE)

None

Module

Deactivated
150 ohms
300 ohms
600 ohms
Pt100 Climatic
Ni100 Climatic Range
Pt100 Standard
Ni100 Standard

Pt100
Standard

Channel

Diagnostics: Wire break check1

Smoothing

Temperature
unit
---

Reference junction ---

-----

Reference
junction
Reference junction --number

Type/range of
measurement

---

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-29

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

---

2AI RTD
Standard

2AI TC Standard
Type/range of
measurement

2AI TC High
Feature

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

---

Deactivated
Voltage 80 mV
TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)
TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)
TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh)
TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi)
TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi)
TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)

TC-EL type K
(NiCr-Ni)

Channel

Type/range
of
measuremen
t

Deactivated
Voltage 80 mV
TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)
TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)
TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh)
TC-EL type C (WRe-WRe)
TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi)
TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi)
TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)

TC-EL type K
(NiCr-Ni)

Channel

Only with thermocouples. A parameter assignment error occurs when the wire break diagnosis is enabled in the voltage
measuring range.
The module does not start up.

The wire break is only detected with constant-current lines.

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

12-30

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

12.5.5

Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module

Parameters
Table 12-34 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module
Parameters

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Group diagnosis

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: Diagnostics/
underflow

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: Wire break

Disable1
Enable

Disable

Channel

Smoothing

None
Weak
Medium
Strong

None

Channel

Temperature unit

Celsius
Fahrenheit

Celsius

Module

Type of measurement

Deactivated
Four-conductor resistor
Three-conductor resistor
Two-conductor resistor
Four-conductor thermal
resistor
Three-conductor thermal
resistor
Two-conductor thermal
resistor

Four-conductor thermal
resistor

Channel

Pt 0,003850
Pt 0,003916
Pt 0,003902
Pt 0,003920
Pt 0.003851
Ni 0,006180
Ni 0,006720
Ni 0.005000
Cu 0,00427)

Pt 0.003851

Channel

Temperature coefficient

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-31

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
Parameters
Measuring range

Value range

150
300
600
3000
PTC
Pt100 Climatic
Ni100 Climatic Range
Pt100 Standard
Ni100 Standard
Pt500 standard range
Pt1000 standard range
Ni1000 standard range
Pt200 climatic range
Pt500 climatic range
Pt1000 climatic range
Ni1000 climatic range
Pt200 standard range
Ni120 standard range
Ni120 climatic range
Cu10 climatic range
Cu10 standard range
Ni200 standard range
Ni200 climatic range
Ni500 standard range
Ni500 climatic range

Default setting
Pt100 Standard

Applicability
Channel

Wire break diagnostic is disabled if - Type of measurement = "deactivated" or Measuring Range = "PTC" was assigned.

12-32

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

Type of measurement - temperature coefficient - measuring range


The following table lists the temperature coefficients and measuring ranges you can set for
each measurement type:
Type of measurement
Deactivated
Four-conductor resistor
Three-conductor resistor
Two-conductor resistor
Three-conductor thermal resistor

Temperature coefficient

150 / 300 / 600 / 3000

Pt 0.003850/ Pt 0.003916 /
Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 /
Pt 0.0038511

150 / 300 / 600 / 3000 / PTC

Ni 0.0061801 / Ni 0.006720

Ni100 climatic range /


NI100 standard range /
Ni120 climatic range /
Ni120 standard range /
Ni200 climatic range /
Ni200 standard range /
Ni500 climatic range /
Ni500 standard range /
Ni1000 climatic range /
Ni1000 standard range

Ni 0.005000

Ni 1000 climatic range2


Ni 1000 standard range2
Cu10 climatic range /
Cu10 standard range

Cu 0.004271
Two-conductor thermal resistor
Four-conductor thermal resistor

Measuring range

Pt100 climatic range /


Pt100 standard range /
Pt200 climatic range /
Pt200 standard range /
Pt500 climatic range /
Pt500 standard range /
Pt1000 climatic range /
Pt1000 standard range

Pt 0.003850 / Pt 0.003916 /
Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 /
Pt 0.003851

Pt100 climatic range /


Pt100 standard range /
Pt200 climatic range /
Pt200 standard range /
Pt500 climatic range /
Pt500 standard range /
Pt1000 climatic range /
Pt1000 standard range

Ni 0.006180) / Ni 0.006720

Ni100 climatic range /


Ni100 standard range /
Ni120 climatic range /
Ni120 standard range /
Ni200 climatic range /
Ni200 standard range /
Ni500 climatic range /
Ni500 standard range /
Ni1000 climatic range /
Ni1000 standard range

Ni 0.005000

Ni 1000 climatic range2


Ni 1000 standard range2
1 The default settings for the temperature coefficients are valid for Europe.
2 For LG-Ni 1000 sensors from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stfa)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-33

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

Temperature coefficient

The correction factor for the temperature coefficient (-value) specifies how much the
resistance of a certain material changes when the temperature is raised by 1 C.
The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. Only one
value is used in Europe for each type of sensor (default value).
Additional values enable you to make a sensor-specific setting for the temperature
coefficient, therefore ensuring more accuracy.

See also

12.5.6

Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST,
2AO I HF

Overview
Table 12-35 Parameters for analog output modules U, I
2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard,
2AO U High
2AO I High
Feature
Feature
Group diagnosis (parameter
assignment error, internal error)
Diagnostics:
--Short-circuit to M
--Diagnostics:
Wire break
Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP
Type/range of
output

---

---

Type/range of
output

Substitute value 1

Value range

Default setting

Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Output de-energized
Substitute a value
Keep last value
Deactivated
1 to 5 V
10V
Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
20mA
To 65535 (value range must be
within the nominal range)

Applicability

Disable

Module

Disable

Channel

Disable

Channel

Output de-energized

Module

10V

Channel

4 to 20mA

Channel

10V/ 20V: 0 V
Channel
4 to 20mA: 4 mA
1 to 5V: 1V
1 If there is no voltage going to the IM but the supply to the analog output modules continues, the substitute values that
have been assigned parameters are output. Substitute values must be within the nominal range. You can assign as
parameters values from -27648 to +27648 (in the case of parameter assignment by means of the device database file).

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

12-34

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

12.5.7

Parameter description for the analog electronic modules

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by means of digital filtering. The smoothing
can be adjusted in 4 steps, where the smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the
electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. The greater the
smoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter.
The figures below show the step response for the different smoothing factors depending on
the number of module cycles.
ZHDNN 

1RQHN 

PHGLXPN 

VWURQJN 

6WHSUHVSRQVH

 [ [















0RGXOHF\FOHV

Figure 12-3

Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U Standard, 2AI U High Feature, 2AI I 2WIRE
Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature, 2AI RTD Standard,
2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, 2AI TC High Feature

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-35

Analog electronic modules


12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
ZHDNN 

1RQHN 

PHGLXPN 

VWURQJN 

6WHSUHVSRQVH

 [ [















0RGXOHF\FOHV

Figure 12-4

Smoothing with 4AI I 2WIRE ST

ZHDNN 

1RQHN 

PHGLXPN 

VWURQJN 

6WHSUHVSRQVH

 [















0RGXOHF\FOHV

Figure 12-5

Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, 2AI I 4WIRE
High Speed

Interference frequency suppression


The 2AI U High Feature and 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog input modules support the
interference frequency suppression setting (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for the interface module. These
HIGH FEATURE analog input modules also allow you to disable interference frequency
suppression, thus enabling you to forego the setting on the interface module. If you disable
interference frequency suppression, the conversion and cycle times become faster for these
modules.

12-36

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)

Run-time calibration
2AI U High Feature
Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI U High
Feature analog electronic module to adjust for component drift due to changes in ambient
temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 250 ms.
Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5 C.
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI I
2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module to periodically adjust for the offset
voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is
delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time
calibration.

Reference junction, reference junction number


See "Connecting thermocouples."

See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

12.6

12.6

2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring voltage
Input ranges:
10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VSS AC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-37

Analog electronic modules


12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard for the different
terminal modules:
Table 12-36 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG'$86WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0 

0

0 

0

Mana: Ground of the module


9

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

M-: Input signal "-"


Mana: Ground of the module
9

QF

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

QF

70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
M+: Input signal "+"
M-: Input signal "-"

&+

Mana: Ground of the module

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

12-38

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6$DQG$,86WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

M-: Input signal "-"


Mana: Ground of the module
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

Figure 12-6




/
3
3

$'8

9

0 $1$


0

Block diagram of the 2AI U Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
Weight

15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Max. 200 m

12-39

Analog electronic modules


12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

P1

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

Between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)

2 VACSS

Between MANA and the central grounding


point (UISO)

75 VDC/60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Max. 30 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable

Yes
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per


channel:

Integration time can be assigned parameters

Yes

Interference frequency suppression in Hz

60

50

Integration time in milliseconds

16,7

20

Conversion time in ms

55

65

Cycle time in ms

Number of active channels per module x


conversion time

Resolution (including overrange)

10 V/13 bits + sign


5 V/13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f1 1%), (f1 = interference frequency)

12-40

Common-mode interference (USS)


Series-mode interference

min. 90 dB
min. 70 dB

(peak interference value < nominal value of


input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs

min. -50dB

Operational limit
(over the entire temperature range, relative to
the input range)

0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C


relative to input range)

0,4%

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
Temperature error (with reference to the input
range)

0.01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input range)

0,01%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C with


reference to input range)

0,05 %

Data for selecting a sensor


Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Voltage

5V/min. 100 k
1 to 5 V/min.100 k
10V/min. 100 k

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)

35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty


factor 1:20)

Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by


means of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time

12.7

12.7

2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring voltage
Input ranges:
10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign
10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign
1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-41

Analog electronic modules


12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature for the
different terminal modules:
Table 12-37 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0 

0

0 

0

QF

QF

$


$


$8; HJ3(

$8; HJ3(

$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG
WR3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0 

0

0 

0

QF

QF

QF

QF

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded


wires of up to 30 VDC.
9

70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
M+: Input signal "+"
M-: Input signal "-"

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

QF

QF

12-42

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Input signal "+"
M-: Input signal "-"

70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded


wires of up to 30 VDC.
&+
0 

&+
0

0 

0

QF

QF

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

$8;
$8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3


$'8



/

9

0 $1$

0

Figure 12-7

Block diagram of the 2AI U High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
Weight
Supports isochronous operation
Number of inputs
Length of cable

Shielded

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Dimensions and weight


15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules
No
2
Max. 200 m

12-43

Analog electronic modules


12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power
module)

VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

Between the channels and PE

Yes

Between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between the channels

140 VDC/100 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Max. 53 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.85 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable (wire break


diagnosis is not supported on the module.)

Yes

Analog value generation


Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per


channel

Integration time can be assigned


parameters

Yes

Interference frequency suppression in Hz

60

50

No

Integration time in milliseconds

16,67

20

7,5

Conversion time in ms
1 channel active per module
2 channels active per module

25
58,3

30
70

10
26

Cycle time in ms
1 channel active per module
2 channels active per module

75
175

90
210

30
78

Resolution (including overrange)

10 V/15 bits + sign


5 V/15 bits + sign
1 to 5 V/15 bits

12-44

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
Suppression of interference, limits of error
Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f1 0.5%), (f1 = interference
frequency)

Common-mode interference (USS)


Series-mode interference

Min. 100dB
min. 90dB

peak interference value < rated value of


input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs

min. -100dB

Operational limit
(entire temperature range with reference to
input range; calibration enabled1)

0,1%

Operational limit
(entire temperature range with reference to
input range; calibration disabled)

0,5%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with


reference to input range; calibration enabled1)

0,05%

Temperature error (with reference to input


range; calibration enabled1)

0.003%/K

Temperature error (with reference to input


range; calibration disabled)

0.015%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input


range)

0,03%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to input
range)

0,01%

Data for selecting a sensor


Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Voltage

10 V/min. 1 M
5 V/min. 1 M
1 to 5 V/min.1 M

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)

35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms

Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by


means of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time

1Run-time

calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to adjust for component
drift due to changes in ambient temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is
delayed by 250 ms. Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5 C.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-45

Analog electronic modules


12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)

12.8

12.8

2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring voltage
Input ranges:
10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
2,5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Permitted common-mode voltage 100 VSS AC
Supports isochronous operation
Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms
Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed for the
different terminal modules:
Table 12-38 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0 

0

0 

0

QF

QF

$


$


$8; HJ3(

Mana: Ground of the module


9

$8; HJ3(

$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG
WR3(

12-46

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0 

Mana: Ground of the module

0

9
0 

0

QF

QF

QF

QF

70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
M+: Input signal "+"
M-: Input signal "-"

&+

Mana: Ground of the module

&+

0 

0

0 

0

QF

QF

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Input signal "+"
70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

M-: Input signal "-"


Mana: Ground of the module

&+
0 

&+
0

0 

0

QF

QF

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-47

Analog electronic modules


12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3


$'8



/

0 $1$

9

0

Figure 12-8

Block diagram of the 2AI U High Speed

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane


bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage


L+

Yes

Between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)

100 VSS AC

Between MANA and the central


grounding point (UISO)

75 VDC/60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

Power supply and load voltage L+ (no


load)

Power dissipation of the module

12-48

Max. 35 mA
Typ. 0.8 W

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
Process interrupt
Can be assigned parameters1
Diagnostic functions
Group error display
Red "SF" LED
Diagnostic information can be displayed Possible2
Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Instantaneous value encoding
Cycle time/resolution:
Conversion time in ms (per channel)
0,1
Cycle time in ms (per module)
1
Resolution (including overrange)
10 V/13 bits + sign
5 V/13 bits + sign
2,5 V/13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V/13 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error
Common mode interference (Ucm) < 100 > 70 dB
VSS)
Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50 dB
Operational limit
0,3%
(in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C
0,2%
with reference to input range)
Temperature error (with reference to the
0.01%/K
input range)
Linearity error (with reference to the input
0,01%
range)
Repeatability
0,05%
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input ranges (rated value)/input resistance
Voltage
10 V/min. 100k
5 V/min. 100 k
2.5 V/min. 100 k
1 - 5 V/min. 100 k
Maximum input voltage for voltage input
50 V continuous, 100 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty
(destruction limit)
factor 1:20)
Connection of the sensors
For measuring voltage
Possible
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means
of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 64 x cycle time
Medium 128 x cycle time
Strong 512 x cycle time
1 DPV1 only
2 Parameter assignment error
Violation of lower limit value
Violation of upper limit value
Open circuit (only with 1 to 5 V)
Process interrupt lost

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-49

Analog electronic modules


12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)

12.9

2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module


(6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)

12.9

Order number
6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring current
Input range:
4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard for the
different terminal modules:
Table 12-39 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+
0 

M-: Input signal "-"

&+


Mana: Ground (of power module)

0
P$

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

P$

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied


by means of the measuring circuits.

$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(

12-50

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0 

0

M-: Input signal "-"


Mana: Ground (of power module)
P$

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied


by means of the measuring circuits.
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
M+: Input signal "+"

&+
0 

M-: Input signal "-"

&+


Mana: Ground (of power module)

0
P$

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied


by means of the measuring circuits.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD
QF

QF
$8;
$8;

M-: Input signal "-"


Mana: Ground (of power module)
P$

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied


by means of the measuring circuits.
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-51

Analog electronic modules


12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/

$'&

9

0 $1$




0
&XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ

Figure 12-9

Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Power supply of the transmitters

Yes

Short-circuit protection

Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage


L+

No

Between the channels

Insulation tested

No
500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Power dissipation of the module

12-52

Max. 80 mA
Typ. 0.6 W

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable

Yes
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per


channel:

Integration time can be assigned


parameters

Yes

Interference frequency suppression in Hz

60

50

Integration time in milliseconds

16,7

20

Conversion time in ms

55

65

Cycle time in ms

Number of active channels per module x conversion


time

Resolution (including overrange)

4 to 20 mA/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f11%), (f1 = interference frequency)

Series-mode interference
(peak interference value < rated value of
input range)

Min. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs

Min. -50 dB

Operational limit
(in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)

0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C


with reference to input range)

0,4%

Temperature error (with reference to the input 0,005%/K


range)
Linearity error (with reference to the input
range)

0,01%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)

0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor


Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Current

4 to 20 mA/50

Permitted input current (destruction limit)

40 mA

Load of the two-wire measuring transducer

Max. 750

Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by


means of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-53

Analog electronic modules


12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)

12.10

12.10

Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0

Features
4 inputs for measuring current
Input range:
4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST for the different
terminal modules:
Table 12-40 Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2
Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6
Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4
Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8
M+: Input signal "+"

0 
&+

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0 

0 

0 

M-: Input signal ""

0

2-wire measuring transducer is


supplied by means of the measuring
circuits.

P$

&+

70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2


Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6
Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4
Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8
M+: Input signal "+"

0 

&+

&+

&+
0 

0

0 

0 

P$

2-wire measuring transducer is


supplied by means of the measuring
circuits.

&+

0 

0 

$8;

$


$


$8;

$8;

12-54

M-: Input signal ""

0

$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)

%DFNSODQHEXV

Block diagram

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ










(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ
$'&

0 
0 
0
0
0 
0 
0 
0 

, , , ,
3
3

/

'&'&FRQYHUWHU
0 $1$

0

,QSXWFXUUHQW
OLPLW

6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ

Figure 12-10 Block diagram of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W H D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

P1

Power supply of the transmitters

Short-circuit protection

24 VDC
Yes
Yes
Yes (approx. 200 mA for module)

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Between the channels and load voltage L+ No

Between the channels

Insulation tested

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Yes
No
500 VDC

12-55

Analog electronic modules


12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)
Current consumption of the module
From the load voltage L+ (with sensor
Max. 125 mA
supply)
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Diagnostic functions readable
Yes
Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per
channel:
Integration time can be assigned
Yes
parameters
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
Cycle time per module in ms
33
40
Resolution (including overrange)
4 to 20 mA/13 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x
(f11%), (f1 = interference frequency)
Series-mode interference
Min. 70 dB
(peak interference value < rated value of
input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit
0,4 %
(in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with 0,3 %
reference to input range)
Temperature error (with reference to the input 0,003 %/K
range)
Linearity error (with reference to the input
0,01 %
range)
Repeatability
0,05 %
(in steady state at 25C with reference to input
range)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance
Current
4 to 20 mA/25
Permitted input current (destruction limit)
Approx. 30 mA (limited electronically)
Load of the two-wire measuring transducer
Max. 750
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 16 x cycle time
Strong 32 x cycle time

12-56

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)

12.11

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module


(6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)

12.11

Order number
6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring current
Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA)
Input ranges:
4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
Supports isochronous operation
Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms
Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed for the
different terminal modules:
Table 12-41 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

Mana: Ground (of power module)


P$

P$

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by


means of the measuring circuits.

$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-57

Analog electronic modules


12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0 

Mana: Ground (of power module)


2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by
means of the measuring circuits.

0
P$

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
M+: Input signal "+"
M-: Input signal "-"

&+

&+

Mana: Ground (of power module)


2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by
means of the measuring circuits.

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

P$

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

$8;
$8;

12-58

M-: Input signal "-"


Mana: Ground (of power module)
P$

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by


means of the measuring circuits.
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/




$'&

9

0 $1$


0
&XUUHQWOLPLW

Figure 12-11 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Short-circuit protection

Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between channels and load voltage L+

No

Between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

Insulation tested with

75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC

Current consumption

Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Max. 35 mA1
Typ. 0.8 W

12-59

Analog electronic modules


12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Process interrupt

Parmeterizable2

Diagnostic functions

Group error display

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable

Possible3
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Instantaneous value encoding

Cycle time/resolution:

Conversion time in ms (per channel)

0,1

Cycle time in ms (per module)

Resolution (including overrange)

4 to 20 mA/13 bits
0 to 20 mA/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Crosstalk between the inputs

> 50 dB

Operational limit
(in the entire temperature range, with reference
to the input range)

0,3%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with


reference to input range)

0,2%

Temperature error (with reference to the input


range)

0,01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input range)

0,01%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to input
range)

0,05%

Sensor power supply outputs


Number of outputs

Output voltage
With load

L+ (-2.5 V)

Output current
Rated value
Permitted range

90 mA (both channels)
0 mA to 90 mA

Short-circuit protection

Yes, electronic
Data for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated value/input resistance)

Current

To 20 mA/50
To 20 mA/50

Connection of the sensors

12-60

For current measurement as two-wire


transmitter

Possible

Load of the two-wire measuring transducer

Max. 670

Maximum input current for current input


(destruction limit)

60 mA

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by


means of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 64 x cycle time
Medium 128 x cycle time
Strong 512 x cycle time

Without sensor supply voltage

DPV only

Parameter assignment error


Violation of lower limit value
Violation of upper limit value
Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA)
Process interrupt lost

12.12

2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module


(6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

12.12

Order number
6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring current
Input ranges:
20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign
to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-61

Analog electronic modules


12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard for the
different terminal modules:
Table 12-42 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Input signal "+"
M-: Input signal "-"

&+
0 

&+


0
0

0 

9'&

0 DQD

ZLUH

DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire


measuring transducer
Mana: Ground (of power module)

P$

4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by


means of the module.

9'&
0 DQD

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

9'&

9'&

0 DQD

0 DQD

ZLUH

P$

$8;
$8;

12-62

M-: Input signal "-"


DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire
measuring transducer
Mana: Ground (of power module)
4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by
means of the module.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/

$'&




9

0 $1$

0
&XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ






Figure 12-12 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

P1

Power supply of the transmitters

Short-circuit protection

24 VDC
Yes
Yes
Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane


bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage


L+

No

Between the channels

No

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Power dissipation of the module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Max. 30 mA
Typ. 0.6 W

12-63

Analog electronic modules


12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable

Yes
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per


channel:

Integration time can be assigned


parameters

Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60

50

Integration time in milliseconds

16,7

20

Conversion time in ms

55

65

Cycle time in ms

Number of active channels per module x conversion


time

Resolution (including overrange)

20 mA/13 bits + sign

Yes

4 to 20 mA/13 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x
(f11%),
(f1 = interference frequency)

Series-mode interference
(peak interference value < rated value of
input range)

Min. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs

Min. -50 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature


range, with reference to the input range)

0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C


with reference to input range)

0,4%

Temperature error (with reference to the


input range)

0.005%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input


range)

0,01%

Repeatability
0,05%
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance
Current
20 mA/50
4 to 20 mA/50
Permitted input current (destruction limit)
40 mA
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means
of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time

12-64

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)

12.13

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module


(6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)

12.13

Order number
6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring current
Input ranges:
20 mA, resolution 15 bits + sign
4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC
Supports two-wire or four-wire measuring transducers

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature for
the different terminal modules:
Table 12-43 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+ : Input signal "+"
M-: Input signal "-"

ZLUH
&+
0 

&+


ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU

0
P$

DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring


transducer
DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring
transducer supply

0 

0

It is possible to supply four-wire measuring


transducers by means of the module.

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

To support isolation between the channels, use


an external supply to feed one of the measuring
transducers.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-65

Analog electronic modules


12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH
$OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+ : Input signal "-"
M- : Connect to 24 VDC

ZLUH
&+

&+

DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"

ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU

0 

0

0 

0

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by


means of the measuring circuits.
Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring
transducers is permitted.

P$

To support isolation between the channels, use


an external supply to feed one of the measuring
transducers.
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+ : Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

9'&
9'&
$8;
$8;

ZLUH

M- : Input signal "-"

ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU

DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring


transducer
DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring
transducer supply

P$

It is possible to supply four-wire measuring


transducers by means of the module.

9'&

To support isolation between the channels, use


an external supply to feed one of the measuring
transducers.

9'&
$8;
$8;

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH
$OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

9'&

9'&
9'&

9'&
$8;
$8;

12-66

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+ : Input signal "-"

ZLUH

M- : Connect to 24 VDC

ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU

DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"

P$

2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by


means of the measuring circuits.
Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring
transducers is permitted.
To support isolation between the channels, use
an external supply to feed one of the measuring
transducers.

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/

$'&




0 $1$

9

0
&XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ






Figure 12-13 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

P1

Power supply of the transmitters

Short-circuit protection

24 VDC
Yes
Yes
Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane


bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage


L+

Yes

Between the channels and PE

Yes

Between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between the channels

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

140 VDC/100 VAC (with isolated power supply of


measuring transducers)

12-67

Analog electronic modules


12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)
Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Max. 53 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.85 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable

Yes
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per


channel:

Integration time can be assigned


parameters

Yes

Interference frequency suppression in Hz

60

50

No

Integration time in milliseconds

16,67

20

7,5

Conversion time in ms
1 channel active per module
2 channels active per module

25
58,3

30
70

10
26

Cycle time in ms
1 channel active per module
2 channels active per module

75
175

90
210

30
78

Resolution (including overrange)

20 mA/15 bits + sign


4 to 20 mA/15 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Interference voltage suppression for f = n x
(f10.5%), (f1 = interference frequency)

Common-mode interference (USS)


Series-mode interference

Min. 100dB

peak interference value < rated value of


input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs
limit1

12-68

min. 90dB
Min. -100 dB

Operational
(over the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)

0,1%

Basic error limit1


operational limit at 25 C with reference to
input range

0,05%

Temperature error (with reference to the


input range)

0,003%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input


range)

0,03%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)

0,01%

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Current

20 mA/50
4 to 20 mA/50

Permitted input current (destruction limit)

40 mA (on a single channel)

Load of the two-wire measuring transducer

Max. 750

Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by


means of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time

Run-time calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to periodically adjust for
the offset voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is
delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time calibration.
1

12.14

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module


(6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)

12.14

Order number
6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for measuring current
Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA)
Input ranges:
4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign
Supports isochronous operation
Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms
Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-69

Analog electronic modules


12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed for the
terminal module.
Table 12-44 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
View

Pin assignment

Remarks

70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Input signal "+"

&+
0 

&+


M- : Input signal "-"

ZLUH

DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring


transducer

0

Mana: Ground (of power module)

P$
0 

0

9'&

9'&

0 DQD

0 DQD

4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by


means of the module.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Input signal "+"

&+
0 

&+


0
0

0 

9'&

0 DQD
$8;
$8;

12-70

ZLUH

P$

9'&

M- : Input signal "-"


DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring
transducer
Mana: Ground (of power module)
4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by
means of the module.

0 DQD
$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/

$'&





9

0 $1$

0
&XUUHQWOLPLW






Figure 12-14 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

P1

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between channels and load voltage L+

No

Between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

Insulation tested with

75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC

Current consumption

Power supply and load voltage L+ (no


load)

Power dissipation of the module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Max. 35 mA1
Typ. 0.8 W

12-71

Analog electronic modules


12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Process interrupt

Can be assigned parameters2

Diagnostic functions

Group error display

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic information readable

Possible3
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Instantaneous value encoding

Cycle time/resolution:

Conversion time in ms (per channel)

0,1

Cycle time in ms (per module)

Resolution (including overrange)

4 to 20 mA/13 bit
0 to 20 mA/13 bit
20 mA/13 bits + sign

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Crosstalk between the inputs

> 50 dB

Operational limit
(in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)

0,3%

Basic error limit (operational limit


at 25 C with reference to input range)

0,2%

Temperature error (with reference to the


input range)

0,01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input


range)

0,01%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)

0,05%

Sensor power supply outputs


Number of outputs

Output voltage
With load

L+ (-2.5 V)

Output current
Rated value
Permitted range

90 mA (both channels)
0 mA to 90 mA

Short-circuit protection

Yes, electronic
Data for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Current

4 to 20 mA/50
0 to 20 mA/50
20 mA/50

Connection of the sensors

For current measurement as two-wire


transmitter

Possible

Load of the two-wire measuring transducer

12-72

Max. 670

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)
Maximum input current for current input
(destruction limit)

60 mA

Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means


of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 64 x cycle time
Medium 128 x cycle time
Strong 512 x cycle time

Without encoder supply voltage

DPV1 only

Parameter assignment error


Violation of lower limit value
Violation of upper limit value
Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA)
Process interrupt lost

12.15

12.15

2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement
Input ranges:
Resistance thermometers: Pt100, Ni100; resolution 15 bits + sign
Resistance measurement: 150 ; 300 ; 600 , resolution max. 15 bits + sign
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves

Pin assignment
The resistance thermometers/resistors are measured in a four-conductor connection.
Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers/resistors by means of connections
IC + and IC -. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer/resistor is measured by
means of the connections M + and M -. This ensures highly accurate measurement results
with the four-conductor connection.
With the two/three-conductor connection, you must apply corresponding jumpers to the
module between M+ and Ic+ or M- and Ic- . However, you have to expect a loss of accuracy
in the measurement results.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-73

Analog electronic modules


12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard on the
terminal module.
Table 12-45 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

, &

, &

, &

, &

IC-: Constant-current line negative


ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M- : Measuring line negative


IC+: Constant-current line positive

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6$DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Measuring line positive
IC-: Constant-current line negative

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

, &

, &

, &

, &


$


$

$8;
$8;

ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M-: Measuring line negative


IC+: Constant-current line positive

0

$8;
$8;

Note
A wire break in the measuring lines of the temperature sensors for three- or four-conductor
connections (connections 1 and 2, or 5 and 6) is not detected. Undefined values can be
reported.

12-74

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/




$'&

0 $1$

9

08;
0






Figure 12-15 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

P1

Power supply of the transmitters

24 VDC
Yes
Yes

Constant-current supply for


resistance-type sensors

Approx. 1.5 mA

Short-circuit protection

Yes

Isolation

between the channels and backplane


bus

Yes

Between the channels and load


voltage L+

Yes

between the channels


Permissible potential difference
Between MANA and the central
grounding point (UISO)
Insulation tested
Current consumption
From load voltage L+
Power dissipation of the module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

No
75 VDC/60 VAC
500 VDC
max. 30mA
Typ. 0.6 W

12-75

Analog electronic modules


12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions

Group error

Diagnostic functions readable

Red "SF" LED


Yes
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per


channel:

Integration time can be assigned


parameters

Yes

Interference frequency suppression in


Hz

60

50

Integration time in milliseconds

16,7

20

Conversion time in ms

110

130

Cycle time in ms

Number of active channels per module x conversion time

Resolution (including overrange)

Pt100, Ni100/ 15 bits + sign


150 /14 bits/
300 , 600 /15 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f11%), (f1 = interference
frequency)

Common-mode interference (USS)


Series-mode interference

Min. 90dB
min. 70dB

peak interference value < rated value


of input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs

Min. -50 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature 0,6%


range, with reference to the input range)
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C
with reference to input range)

0,4%

Temperature error (with reference to the


input range)

0.005%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input


range)

0,01%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C with 0,05%


reference to input range)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Resistance-type sensor

150 /min. 2 M
300 /min. 2 M
600 /min. 2 M

Resistance thermometers

Pt100/min. 2 M
Ni100/min. 2 M

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)

12-76

Max. 9 V

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
Connection of the sensors

For measuring resistance


Two and three-conductor
connection

Yes, line resistances are also measured, jumpers at TR


Yes

Four-conductor connection

Characteristic curve linearization

Yes, parameters can be assigned for Pt100, Ni100

Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of


digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time

Medium 64 x cycle time


Strong 128 x cycle time

12.16

2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module


(6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)

12.16

Order number
6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement
Input ranges
Resistance thermometers: Pt100; Ni100; Ni120; Pt200; Ni200; Pt500; Ni500; Pt1000;
Ni1000; Cu10;resolution max. 15 bits + sign
Resistance measurement: 150 ; 300 ; 600 ; 3000 ; PTC; resolution max. 15 bits
Automatic compensation of line resistances in the case of a three-conductor connection
Temperature coefficient can be assigned parameters for resistance-type sensors
High degree of accuracy
Isolated from the load voltage
Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves
Parameter length 7 bytes
Permitted common-mode voltage 5 VACss
Recording of reference junction temperature (together with the 2AI TC Standard
electronic module)
Compatible with the 2AI RTD Standard (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB50)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-77

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)

Note
The EM 2AI RTD High Feature can replace a 2AI RTD Standard in an existing system.
The wiring does not have to be changed. The additional bridges on the terminal module
of the 2AI RTD Standard do not have to be removed.
The configuration (in HW Config or the GSD file) does not have to be changed. Only the
new functions of the 2AI RTD High Feature cannot be assigned parameters in this
instance.

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature on the
terminal modules.
Table 12-46 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

, &

, &

M-: Measuring line negative


ZLUH

IC+: Constant-current line positive

ZLUH

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

, &

, &

$8; HJ3(

12-78

M-: Measuring line negative


ZLUH

ZLUH

IC+: Constant-current line positive

$8; HJ3(

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

, &

, &

, &

, &

IC-: Constant-current line negative


ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M-: Measuring line negative


IC+: Constant-current line positive

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Measuring line positive

&+
0 
0 
, &
, &
$8;
$8;

IC-: Constant-current line negative

&+


ZLUH

ZLUH

M-: Measuring line negative

ZLUH

IC+: Constant-current line positive

0
0
, &
, &
$8;
$8;

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;

3
3

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

/

$'&




9

0 $1$
08;

0






Figure 12-16 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD High Feature

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-79

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)

Technical specifications
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
Weight
Supports isochronous operation
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded

Dimensions and weight


15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules
No
2

Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power
24 VDC
module)
P1
Yes
Power supply of the transmitters
Yes
Constant-current supply for
Approx. 1.25 mA
resistance-type sensors
Short-circuit protection
Yes
Isolation
between the channels and backplane
Yes
bus
Between the channels and load
Yes
voltage L+
between the channels
No
Permissible potential difference
Between MANA and the central
75 VDC/60 VAC
grounding point (UISO)
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
From load voltage L+
max. 30mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 0.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Diagnostic functions readable
Yes
Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrating (sigma-delta)
Integration and cycle time/resolution per
channel:
Integration time can be assigned
Yes
parameters
Interference frequency suppression in 60
50
Hz
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
Basic conversion time including
50
60
Integration time in milliseconds
Additional conversion time for wire
5
5
break check diagnosis in ms
Additional conversion time in ms for
50
60
line compensation in three-conductor
connections
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion time
Resolution (including overrange)
Pt 100; Ni 100; Ni120; Pt 200; Ni 200; Pt 500; Ni 500; Pt
1000; Ni 1000; Cu 10 / 15 bits + sign
150; 300; 600; 3000; / 15 bits
PTC1 / 1 bit

12-80

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
Suppression of interference, limits of error
Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f11%), (f1 = interference
frequency)
Common-mode interference (USS)
Min. 90dB
Series-mode interference
min. 70dB
peak interference value < rated value
of input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature
range, with reference to the input range)
Resistance-type sensor
0,1%
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard 1.0K
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic
0.25K
Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000
0.4K
Standard and Climatic
Cu10
1.5K
Basic error limit for resistance-type
sensors (operational limit at 25 C with
reference to input range)
Resistance-type sensor
0,05%
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard 0.6K
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic
0.13K
Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000
0.2K
Standard and Climatic
Cu10
1.0K
Temperature error (with reference to the
0.0009%/K
input range)
Linearity error (with reference to the input 0,01%
range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C with 0,05%
reference to input range)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance
Resistance-type sensor
150 /min. 10 M
300 /min. 10 M
600 /min. 10 M
3000 /min. 10 M
PTC min 10 M
Resistance thermometers
Pt100/min. 10 M
Ni100/min. 10 M
Ni120/min. 10 M
Pt200/min. 10 M
Ni200/min. 10 M
Pt500/min. 10 M
Ni500/min. 10 M
Pt1000/min. 10 M
Ni1000/min. 10 M
Cu10/min. 10 M
Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)
Max. 9 V

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-81

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
Connection of the sensors
For measuring resistance
2-conductor connection
3-conductor connection
4-conductor connection
Characteristic curve linearization
Smoothing of the measured values

Yes,
Yes, internal compensation of line resistances
Yes
Yes, can be assigned parameters for Ptxxx, Nixxx
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of
digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time
1In accordance with VDE 0660 Part 302/303, Type A

Use of Cu10 sensors


Select "Three-conductor thermal resistor" and "Cu10" at parameter assignment.
Wire the Cu10 sensor in accordance with the three-conductor connection method.
Automatic, internal compensation of line resistance for the missing measuring line occurs
during operation.

Note
Please note the following to ensure optimum line compensation in the case of Cu10:
The sum of the cable resistance and measurement resistance must not exceed 31 .
The cable must have a resistance of no more than 8 if you want to use the temperature
range up to and above 312 C. Example: A 200 m Cu cable with a 0.5 mm2 conductor
cross-section has approximately 7 . A smaller cross-section shortens the permissible
cable length accordingly.

12-82

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)

Using PTC resistors


PTCs are suitable for temperature monitoring and as thermal protective devices for complex
drives and transformer windings.
Select "Two-conductor resistor" and "PTC" at parameter assignment:
Connect the PTC in accordance with the two-conductor connection method.
Apply PTC resistors of type A (PTC thermistors) in accordance with DIN / VDE 0660, Part
302.
Sensor data for the PTC resistor:
Feature
Switching points

Technical
specifications

Remarks

Behavior with rising temperature


< 550

Normal range:
SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

550 to 1650

Prewarning range:
SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII)
SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)

> 1650

Addressable range:
SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

Behavior with rising temperature


> 750

Addressable range:
SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

750 to 540

Prewarning range:
SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII)
SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)

< 540

Normal range:
SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

(TNF-5) C

Max. 550

TNF= rated operating temperature

(TNF+5) C

Min. 1330

(TNF+15) C

Min. 4000

Measuring voltage

Max. 7.5 V

Voltage on the PTC

Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S7

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-83

Analog electronic modules


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
7 6
0

IB x

5 4 3

0 0 0

2 1

between prewarning threshold: 1


and response threshold

IB x + 1

7 6

5 4 3

2 1

0 0 0

0 0

0: Measured resistance < response threshold


1: Measured resistance > response threshold
0
0

Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S5

,%[

       
 

  

between prewarning threshold: 1


and response threshold

,%[

0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFHUHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG
0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFH!UHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG

       
       

Notes on programming

Notice
Only the bits 0+2 or 3+5 are relevant for the purposes of evaluation in the process input
image. You can use bits 0+2 or 3+5 to monitor the temperature of a motor, for example.
Bits 0+2 or 3+5 in the process input image does not have a retentive function. Make sure
at parameter assignment that motor start-up is controlled (by means of an
acknowledgment), for example.
Bits 0+2 or 3+5 cannot be set at the same time, but set one after the other.
For security reasons, always evaluate the diagnostic inputs of the 2AI RTD High Feature
because measurement is not possible when the EM is removed, when the power supply
to the EM has failed, or in the event of a wire break or short-circuit of the measuring lines.

12-84

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)

Example
The diagram below shows the temperature pattern and the switching points belonging to it.

7>r&@









1RUPDO
UDQJH

12.17

12.17

3UHZDUQLQJ
UDQJH

$GGUHVVDEOHUDQJH

3UHZDUQLQJ
UDQJH

1RUPDO
UDQJH

2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement
Input ranges:
Voltage measurement: 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign
Thermocouples: Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, resolution 15 bits + sign
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves
Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-85

Analog electronic modules


12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard for the different
terminal modules:
Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST.
Table 12-47 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

M-: Measuring line negative


Mana: Ground of the module

$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

Mana: Ground of the module


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

M-: Measuring line negative

70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
M+: Measuring line positive
M-: Measuring line negative

&+

12-86

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

Mana: Ground of the module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF
$8;
$8;

M-: Measuring line negative


Mana: Ground of the module
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8;
$8;

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/

$'&




9

0 $1$


0

Figure 12-17 Block diagram of the 2AI TC Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Max. 50 m

12-87

Analog electronic modules


12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power
module)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane


bus

Yes

Between the channels and load


voltage L+

Yes

Between the channels

No

Between the channels and 24 V supply Yes


voltage

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and the central


grounding point (Uiso)

75 VDC/60 VAC

Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)

2 VACSS

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

max. 30mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable

Yes
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration time/conversion time/resolution


per channel:

12-88

Integration time can be assigned


parameters

Yes

Interference frequency suppression in


Hz

60

50

Integration time in milliseconds

16,7

20

Basic conversion time including


Integration time in milliseconds

55

65

Additional conversion time for wire


break check diagnosis in ms

20

20

Cycle time in ms

Number of active channels per module x conversion time

Resolution (including overrange)

15 bits plus sign

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Suppression of interference, limits of error
Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f11%), (f1 = interference
frequency)

Common-mode interference (USS)


Series-mode interference
(peak interference value < rated value
of input range)

Min. 90 dB
Min. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs

Min. -50 dB

Operational limit (over the entire


temperature range, with reference to the
input range)1

0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C


with reference to input range)1

0,4%

Temperature error (with reference to the


input range)

0,005%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input


range)

0,01%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)

0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor


Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Voltage

80 mV/min. 1 M

Thermocouple

Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T/min. 1 M

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)

10 V, continuous

Connection of the sensors

For measuring voltage

Possible

Characteristic curve linearization

Yes, can be assigned parameters for type E, N, J, K, L,


S, R, B, T to IEC 584

Temperature compensation

Internal temperature compensation

External temperature compensation by Possible, one external compensating box per channel
looping a compensating box into the
measuring circuit

External compensation by means of


temperature value obtained at an
analog module of the same ET 200S
station

Smoothing of the measured values

Not possible

Yes

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of


digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time

Medium 32 x cycle time


Strong 64 x cycle time
1

for Type N: from -150C, Typ B: from 200C, Typ T: from -230C

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-89

Analog electronic modules


12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)

Compensation of thermocouples with a compensating box


As well as the error limits of the 2AI TC Standard electronic module (see Table "Technical
specifications" in this chapter) you must also take the accuracy of the compensating box into
account.

Compensation of thermocouples with a Pt100 on the 2AI RTD Standard


Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurement
Wiring rules

Ensure there is good thermal contact between the reference


junction and the Pt100 used for compensation.
We recommend that you wire the Pt100 with a four-conductor
connection.

Additional technical specifications The accuracy of the thermal resistor (Pt100) used for
on the error limits of the 2AI TC
compensation must be taken into account.*
The error of the measurement input (2AI RTD Standard) used for
compensation must be taken into account.*
* In the case of thermocouples with a characteristic curve with a very shallow gradient, these errors
can lead to a major measurement discrepancy.
For the following thermocouples, this causes a limitation of the input range of the thermocouples in
which the accuracy information in the manual applies:
Type N: -100C
Type K: -230C
Type E: -230C

See also
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) (Page 12-37)

12-90

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)

12.18

2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module


(6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)

12.18

Order number
6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0

Features
2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement
Input ranges:
Voltage measurement: 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign
Thermocouples: Types E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, resolution 15 bits + sign
2AI TC High-Feature is inserted on the TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves
Permitted common-mode voltage 140 VDC/100 VAC
Internal reference junction in connection with TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature for the
TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules
Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST.
Table 12-48 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 2

70(6$DQG$,7&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 6
M+: Measuring line positive
M-: Measuring line negative

&+

&+

0 

0

0 

0

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-91

Analog electronic modules


12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3

/

$'&




9

0

0 $1$

,QWHUQDO
UHIHU
HQFH
MXQFWLRQ

9

70(6$7

Figure 12-18 Block diagram of the 2AI TC High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of inputs

Length of cable

Shielded

Max. 50 m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane


bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage


L+

Yes

Between the channels

No

Between the channels and 24 V supply


voltage

Yes

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and the central grounding 75 VDC/60 VAC


point (Uiso)

Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)

Insulation tested

12-92

140 VDC/100 VAC


500 VDC

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)
Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Max. 30 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 0.6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Diagnostic functions readable

Red "SF" LED


Yes
Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration time/conversion time/resolution


per channel:

Integration time can be assigned


parameters

Yes

Interference frequency suppression in


Hz

60

50

Integration time in milliseconds

16,7

20

Basic conversion time including


Integration time in milliseconds

66

80

Additional conversion time for wire break 5


check diagnosis in ms

Cycle time in ms

Resolution (including overrange)

Number of active channels per module x conversion


time
15 bits plus sign

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f11%), (f1 = interference
frequency)

Common-mode interference (USS)


Series-mode interference

Min. 90dB
min. 70dB

peak interference value < rated value of


input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs

Min. -50 dB

Operational limit for 80 mV (over the entire


temperature range with reference to the
input range)

0,1%

Operational limit for thermocouples (over


the entire temperature range with reference
to the input range)1

1.5 K

Operational limit for thermocouple type C (in 7 K


the entire temperature range with reference
to the input range)1
Basic error limit for 80 mV (operational
limit at 25 C with reference to the input
range)

0,05%

Basic error limit for thermocouples


(operational limit at 25 C with reference to
input range)1

1K

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-93

Analog electronic modules


12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)
Basic error limit for thermocouples of type C 5 K
(operational limit at 25 C with reference to
the input range)1
Temperature error (with reference to the
0,005%/K
input range)
Linearity error (with reference to the input
0,01%
range)
Repeatability
0,05%
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)
Overall error limits using internal
compensation
Operational limit (in the entire
2.5 K
temperature range with a static, thermal
state, ambient temperature change <0.3
K/min)2
Basic error limit (operational limit at
1.5 K
25C with a static, thermal state,
ambient temperature change < 0.3
K/min)3
Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance

Voltage

Thermocouple

80 mV/min. 1 M
Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C/min. 1 M

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)

20 V, continuous

Connection of the sensors

For measuring voltage

Possible

Characteristic curve linearization

Yes, can be assigned parameters for types E, N, J, K,


L, S, R, B, T, C to IEC 584

Temperature compensation

Internal temperature compensation

Possible with TM-E15S24-ATTM-E15C24-AT

External temperature compensation by


looping a compensating box into the
measuring circuit
Smoothing of the measured values

Possible, one external compensating box per channel


Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means
of digital filtering

Step
None
Weak
Medium
Strong

Time constant
1 x cycle time
4 x cycle time
32 x cycle time

64 x cycle time
The specified error limits apply starting with the following temperatures:
Thermocouple Type T: -200C
Thermocouple Type K: -100C
Thermocouple Type B: +700C
Thermocouple Type N: -150C
Thermocouple Type E: -150C
Thermocouple Type R: +200C
Thermocouple Type S: +100C
2 In the case of thermocouple type C: 8K
3 In the case of thermocouple type C: 6K
1

12-94

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.19 2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)

Compensation of thermocouples with a compensating box


In addition to the error limits of the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module (see the table
entitled "Technical specifications" in this chapter), you must take into account the accuracy
of the compensating box.

Internal compensation with TM-E 15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT


Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurement
Rules on using internal
temperature compensation

The connected channel with internal compensation must be


assigned parameters separately.
Don't insert the 2AI TC High Feature directly next to a power
module with high incoming current ( >3 A). An incoming current of
10 A can result in a further 2 K error.

Additional technical specifications The station must be in a static state* to ensure that the specified
for the error limits of the 2AI TC
accuracy is achieved.
High Feature
Accuracy is achieved 30 minutes after the static state has been
achieved.
The overall malfunction of the channel is caused by the
combination of the input error and the internal compensation
error.
* The static state is defined by an almost constant ambient temperature (no draft, for example, in a
closed cabinet!)

See also
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) (Page 12-37)

12.19

12.19

2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0

Features
2 outputs for voltage output
Output range:
10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V, resolution 12 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-95

Analog electronic modules


12.19 2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard for the terminal
module:
Table 12-49 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG$286WDQGDUG

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
QV: Analog output voltage
S+: Detector line positive

&+

&+

49

49

6 

6

0 DQD

0 DQD

6 

6

ZLUH

ZLUH

Mana: Ground of the module


S-: Detector line negative

70(6$DQG$286WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
QV: Analog output voltage
S+: Detector line positive

&+
49

49

6 

6

0 DQD

0 DQD

6

6 
$8;
$8;

12-96

&+

ZLUH

ZLUH

Mana: Ground of the module


S-: Detector line negative

$8;
$8;

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.19 2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)

Block diagram



%DFNSODQHEXV

'$&

0 $1$



(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3



'$&

0 $1$



/

9

0 $1$

0

Figure 12-19 Block diagram of the 2AO U Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

Shielded

max. 200m
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power


module)

Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and the central grounding


point (Uiso)

Insulation tested

75 VDC/60 VAC
500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

Power dissipation of the module

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

max. 130mA
Max. 2 W

12-97

Analog electronic modules


12.19 2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Diagnostic functions

Group error

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic functions readable

Yes
Analog value generation

Resolution (including overrange)

10 V/13 bits + sign


1 to 5 V/12 bits

Cycle time

Max. 1.5 ms

Settling time

For resistive load

0.1 ms

For capacitive load

0.5 ms

For inductive load

0.5 ms

Substitute value can be assigned parameters

Yes

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Crosstalk between the outputs

min. -40dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature


range, with reference to the output range)

0,4%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with


reference to output range)

0,2%

Temperature error (with reference to the


output range)

0,01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the output


range)

0,02%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
output range)

0,05%

Output ripple (with reference to output range,


bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)

0,02%

Data for selecting an actuator


Output range (rated value)

10 V
1 to 5 V

Load resistance

Min. 1.0 k

For capacitive load

Max. 1 F

Short-circuit protection

Yes

Short-circuit current

Approx. 25mA

Destruction limit against voltages/currents


applied from outside

Voltage at the outputs to MANA

Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty


factor 1:20)

Current

Max. DC 50 mA

Connection of actuators

12-98

2-conductor connection

Possible, without compensation of the line


resistances

4-conductor connection

Yes

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.20 2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)

12.20

2AO U High Feature analog electronic module


(6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)

12.20

Order number
6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0

Features
2 outputs for voltage output
Output range:
10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign
1 to 5 V, resolution 14 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Supports isochronous operation
Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 3.75 ms
Minimum conversion time of the output modules: (TWAmin): 1.5 ms

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature for the
terminal module:
Table 12-50 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature
View

Pin assignment
70(6DQG$28+LJK)HDWXUH

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
QV: Analog output voltage
S+: Detector line positive

&+

&+

49

49

6 

6

0 DQD

0 DQD

6 

6

ZLUH

ZLUH

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Mana: Ground of the module


S-: Detector line negative

12-99

Analog electronic modules


12.20 2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6$DQG$28+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
QV: Analog output voltage

&+

&+

49

49

6 

6

0 DQD

0 DQD

6

6 
$8;
$8;

S+: Detector line positive

ZLUH

ZLUH

Mana: Ground of the module


S-: Detector line negative

$8;
$8;

Block diagram



%DFNSODQHEXV

'$&

0 $1$



(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
'$&

0 $1$



/
3
3




9

0 $1$

0

Figure 12-20 Block diagram of the 2AO U High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
Weight

15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of outputs

Length of cable

12-100

Shielded

max. 200m

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.20 2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power
module)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Isolation

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and the central grounding


point (Uiso)

Insulation tested

75 VDC/60 VAC
500 VDC

Current consumption

From load voltage L+

max. 130mA

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 2 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error display

Diagnostic information readable

Red "SF" LED


Possible

Substitute values can be applied

Yes, parameters can be assigned


Analog value generation

Resolution (including sign)

10 V/16 bits
1 to 5 V/14 bits

Conversion time (per channel)

Max. 1.0 ms

Settling time

For resistive load

0.1 ms

For capacitive load

0.5 ms

For inductive load

0.5 ms
Suppression of interference, limits of error

Crosstalk between the outputs

> 60 dB

Operational limit
(in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)

0,07%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with


reference to output range)

0,03%

Temperature error (with reference to the


output range)

0.001%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the output


range)

0,02%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25C with


reference to output range)

0,01%

Output ripple (with reference to output range,


bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)

0,02%

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-101

Analog electronic modules


12.21 2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)
Data for selecting an actuator
Output range (rated value)

10 V
1 to 5 V

Load impedance (in the rated range of the


output)
At voltage outputs

Min. 1.0 k
max. 1 F

Capacitive load
Voltage output
Short-circuit protection
Short-circuit current

Yes
Approx. 25 mA

Destruction limit against voltages/currents


applied from outside

Voltage at the outputs to MANA

Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty


factor 1:20)

Current

Max. DC 50 mA

Connection of actuators
Voltage output
Possible, without compensation of the line
resistances
Possible

2-conductor connection
4-conductor connection

12.21

12.21

2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0

Features
2 outputs for current output
Output range:
20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign
4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+

12-102

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.21 2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard for the different
terminal modules:
Table 12-51 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG$2,6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
QI: Analog output current
Mana: Ground of the module

&+

&+

4, 

4,

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

Terminals 2 and 6 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$2,6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
QI: Analog output current
Mana: Ground of the module

&+

&+

4, 

4,

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

70(6DQG$2,6WDQGDUG

Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be


used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
QI: Analog output current
Mana: Ground of the module

&+

&+

4, 

4,

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminals 2 and 6 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

12-103

Analog electronic modules


12.21 2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6$DQG$2,6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
QI: Analog output current

&+
4, 

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

$8;
$8;

Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be


used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

4,

QF

Mana: Ground of the module

&+

$8;
$8;

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

'$&

0 $1$


(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3


'$&

0 $1$


/

9

0 $1$

0

Figure 12-21 Block diagram of the 2AO I Standard

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

No

Number of outputs

Length of cable

12-104

Shielded

max. 200m

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.21 2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power
module)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage

Yes

Between the channels

No

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and the central grounding 75 VDC/60 VAC


point (Uiso)

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From the power supply L+

Max. 150 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 2 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error

Diagnostic functions readable

Red "SF" LED


Yes
Analog value generation

Resolution (including overrange)

20 mA/13 bits + sign


4 to 20 mA/13 bits

Cycle time

Max. 1.5 ms

Settling time

For resistive load

0.1 ms

For capacitive load

0.5 ms

For inductive load

0.5 ms

Substitute values can be applied

Yes

Suppression of interference, limits of error


Crosstalk between the outputs

min. -40dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature


range, with reference to the output range)

0,5%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C


with reference to output range)

0,3%

Temperature error (with reference to the


output range)

0.01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the output


range)

0,02%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
output range)

0,05%

Output ripple (with reference to output range,


bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)

0,02%

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

12-105

Analog electronic modules


12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)
Data for selecting an actuator
Output range (rated value)

20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Load resistance

Max. 500

For inductive load

1 mH

No-load voltage

18 V

Destruction limit against voltages/currents


applied from outside

Voltage at the outputs to MANA

Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty


factor 1:20)

Current

Max. DC 50 mA

Connection of actuators

12.22

2-conductor connection

Yes

4-conductor connection

No

2AO I High Feature analog electronic module


(6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)

12.22

Order number
6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0

Features
2 outputs for current output
Output range:
20 mA, resolution 15 bits + sign
4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Supports isochronous operation
Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 3.75 ms
Minimum conversion time of the output modules: (TWAmin): 1.5 ms

12-106

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature for the
different terminal modules:
Table 12-52 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

70(6$DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8
QI: Analog output current
Mana: Ground of the module

&+

&+

4, 

4,

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8; HJ3(

$


$


$8; HJ3(

Terminals 2 and 6 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
QI: Analog output current
Mana: Ground of the module

&+

&+

4, 

4,

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

70(6DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH

Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be used


for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3
Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7
QI: Analog output current
Mana: Ground of the module

&+

&+

4, 

4,

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminals 2 and 6 can be used for


unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

12-107

Analog electronic modules


12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)
View

Pin assignment

Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6$DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7
QI: Analog output current

&+
4, 

QF

QF

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

$8;

Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be used


for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

4,

$8;

Mana: Ground of the module

&+

$8;
$8;

Block diagram


%DFNSODQHEXV

'$&

0 $1$


(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3


'$&

0 $1$


/

9

0 $1$

0

Figure 12-22 Block diagram of the 2AO I High Feature

Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g
Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of outputs

Length of cable

12-108

Shielded

Max. 200 m

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated supply voltage of the electronics L+

P1

24 VDC
Yes

Isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Between channels and power supply of the Yes


electronics

Between the channels

Yes

No

Permissible potential difference

Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

75 VDC/60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC

Current consumption

From the power supply L+

Max. 150 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Max. 2 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic functions

Group error display

Red "SF" LED

Diagnostic information readable

Yes

Substitute values can be applied

Yes, parameters can be assigned


Analog value generation

Resolution (including sign)

20 mA/16 bits
4 to 20 mA/15 bits

Conversion time (per channel)

Max. 1.0 ms

Settling time

For resistive load

0.25 ms

For capacitive load

1.0 ms

For inductive load

0.5 ms
Suppression of interference, limits of error

Crosstalk between the outputs

> 60 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature


range, with reference to the output range)

0.07% (at 250 load impedance)

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with


reference to output range)

0,03% (at 250 load impedance)

Temperature error (with reference to the


output range)

0.001%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the output


range)

0,02%

Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
output range)

0,01%

Output ripple (with reference to output range,


bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)

0,02%

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

0.3% (for all other load impedances)


0,26% (for all other load impedances)

12-109

Analog electronic modules


12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)
Data for selecting an actuator
Output range (rated value)

20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in the rated range of the


output)

For current outputs


For inductive load

Max. 500
1mH

Current output

No-load voltage

18 V

Destruction limit against voltages/currents


applied from outside

Voltage at the outputs to MANA

Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty


factor 1:20)

Current

Max. DC 50 mA

Connection of actuators

Current output

Possible

2-conductor connection

12-110

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

4 IQ-SENSE
13.1

13.1

13

Features of 4 IQ-SENSE

Order number
6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0

Features
The 4 IQ-SENSE has the following features:
Connection of sensors with IQ-SENSE, photoelectric proximity switches: for example,
reflex sensors, diffuse sensors, and laser sensors.
You can connect up to 4 sensors. Each sensor requires a two-wire cable.
Excess gain and monitoring
Time functions, switching hysteresis, synchronization groups that can be assigned
parameters
Sensitivity and distance values can be specified (IntelliTeach using the "IQ-SENSE Opto"
FB)
Teach-in
Module can be removed and inserted during operation (restart the Teach-in using the
"IQ-SENSE Opto" function block or the button on the sensor)
Sensors can be removed and inserted during operation (automatic reassignment of
parameters)
Supports sensors with alignment tool
The 4 IQ-SENSE is a single-width (15 mm) electronic module that can be used with the
following terminal modules:
TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01 and TM-E15N24-01
TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1 and TM-E15N26-A1

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13-1

Analog electronic modules


13.1 Features of 4 IQ-SENSE

Parameter assignment
You set the parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE using the STEP 7 parameter assignment
software.
Configuration rules
With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service Pack 3
Contained in the hardware catalog of HW
Config. A GSD file is not required.

With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service Pack 3 or other


configuration software
IM151-1 BASIC: GSD file SIEM80F3.GSx as of
09/02 (as of V1.0)
IM151-1 STANDARD: GSD file SIEM806A.GSx as
of 10/01 (as of V1.0)
IM151-1 FO STANDARD: GSD file SIEM806B.GSx
as of 10/01 (as of V1.5)
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: GSD file
SIR380E0.GSx as of 12/01 (as of V1.0)
IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

13-2

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

13.2

13.2.1

13.2

Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

Overview

Parameters
Table 13-1

Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

Parameters

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Disable
Enable

Disable

Module

Synchronization group

1
2
3
4

Module

Sensor type

Reflex sensor
Diffuse sensor
Deactivated

Reflex sensor

Channel

Switching hysteresis

5%
10 %
20 %
50 %

20 %

Channel

Time functions

None
Return delay
Pickup delay
Pickup and return delay
Momentary impulse

None

Channel

Time value

5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s

5 ms

Channel

Teach-in disable

Teach-in with button

Channel

Group diagnosis

Teach-in with button

possible

Teach-in with button not

possible

possible

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13-3

Analog electronic modules


13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

Note
Unused channels of the module must be deactivated otherwise the wire break diagnosis will
be reported.
Measurement type parameter: deactivated
All the diagnostics are suppressed.
Sensitivity/distance values and circuit states are set to "0".
The sensor is switched off

13.2.2

Group diagnostics parameter

Features
If you enable group diagnosis, a queued diagnostic message is entered.

See also
Channel-specific diagnostics (Page 6-40)

13.2.3

Synchronization group parameter

Features
Sensors of different modules of the 4 IQ-SENSE can affect one another with scattered
light, for example.
To prevent this interference between adjacent sensors on different modules, you can
assign each module a separate synchronization group with this parameter. Modules with
different synchronization groups do not affect each other.
It is not possible for sensors on the same module to affect one another.

13-4

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

Operating principle
The following figure illustrates how the synchronization group parameter works:

,QWHUIDFH
PRGXOH

30

6ORW

,46(16(
3DUDPHWHUV


Figure 13-1

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
JURXS

Synchronization group

It is only possible for the sensors of the modules in slots 2 and 6 to interfere with one another
because they are in the same synchronization group: group 1.

Note
When you install sensors of the same synchronization group, you must ensure that the
minimum clearance is adhered to (see the sensor information leaflet) to prevent any
interference between the sensors.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13-5

Analog electronic modules


13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

13.2.4

Sensor type parameter

Features
You use this parameter to set the sensor type for each channel.
Reflex sensor
Diffuse sensor
Deactivated

Diffuse sensor
Table 13-2

Diffuse sensor

Diffuse sensor

Object

Transmitter

Circuit state 0: No object detected. In


other words, the object is not in the path
of the beams. The receiver cannot see
any light

Receiver

Transmitter

Circuit state 1: Object detected. In other


words, the object is in the path of the
beams. The receiver cannot see any light.

Receiver

Reflex sensor
Table 13-3

Reflex sensor

Reflex sensor
Transmitter
Receiver

Transmitter
Receiver

13-6

Object
Circuit state 0: No object detected. In
other words, the object is not in the path
of the beams. The receiver sees some
light.

Circuit state 1: Object detected. In other


words, the object is in the path of the
beams. The receiver cannot see any light.

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

13.2.5

Switching hysteresis parameter

Features
Faults with the diffuse sensor or in the production process can result in signal wobbles. The
measured value then changes the switching threshold by 100 % (object detected - object not
detected). You can prevent this switching threshold wobble using the switching hysteresis
parameter. This will ensure a stable output signal on the sensor.
You can assigned parameters to 5%/10%/20%/50% for switching hysteresis.

Requirements
You can only set the switching hysteresis parameter for diffuse sensors with background
fadeout.

Operating principle
5HFHLYLQJOHYHO



6ZLWFKLQJ
WKUHVKROG
'LIIHUHQWLDOWUDYHO

7LPH


6ZLWFKLQJRXWSXWRQVHQVRU

7LPH

Figure 13-2

Switching hysteresis parameter

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13-7

Analog electronic modules


13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

13.2.6

Time functions and time value parameters

Features
Using these parameters you can customize the electronic module to suit your application.

Operating principle
7LPHU
1RQH
GHIDXOW

6ZLWFKLQJVWDWXV

&XUYH





5HVHWGHOD\HG



3LFNXSGHOD\HG

3LFNXSDQG
UHVHWWLQJGHOD\



0RPHQWDU\
LPSXOVH


2EMHFWGHWHFWHG

6ZLWFKLQJVWDWH
RQVHQVRU

2EMHFWQRWGHWHFWHG
7 WLPHYDOXHSDUDPHWHU

Figure 13-3

Time value, time functions parameters

13.2.7

Teach-in disable parameter

Features
Using this parameter you can disable the Teach-in button on the sensor.

13-8

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

13.3

13.3.1

13.3

Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

Fundamentals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

Introduction
You can configure the address space of the control and feedback interfaces of the
4 IQ-SENSE. You can choose between Standard and Enhanced.

Standard features
The 4 IQ-SENSE occupies 4 bits in the feedback interface.
You can evaluate the circuit state of each channel using the feedback interface.

Enhanced features
The 4 IQ-SENSE occupies one byte in the control interface and one in the feedback
interface.
You can use the control interface to specify the sensitivity and distance values for each
channel (IntelliTeach via "IQ-SENSE Opto" FB) and execute Teach-in.
You can use the feedback interface to evaluate the acquired sensitivity and distance
values (switching threshold) and the circuit state for each channel.
Requirements:
You can use the "IQ-SENSE Opto" function block. The FB facilitates easy access to the
control and feedback interface.
Please note that in this case PII equals PIQ.
You can download the function block and the relevant product information on the Internet
at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd.

Configuring the address space


Address area

With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service


Pack 3

With STEP 7 as of V4.02 or COM


PROFIBUS or other configuration software

Standard

In the hardware catalog of HW


Config, choose 4IQ-SENSE
Opto S

From the GSD file, choose


S 6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0 IQ-SENSE Opto

Enhanced

In the hardware catalog of HW


Config, choose 4IQ-SENSE
Opto E

From the GSD file, choose


E 6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0 IQ-SENSE Opto

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13-9

Analog electronic modules


13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

13.3.2

Standard

Feedback interface (PII)


Table 13-4

Standard feedback interface

Address
Byte 0

Assignment
Bit 7:

0 (not assigned)

Bit 6:

0 (not assigned)

Bit 5:

0 (not assigned)

Bit 4:

0 (not assigned)

Bit 3:

Circuit state sensor on channel 3


1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

Bit 2:

Circuit state sensor on channel 2


1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

Bit 1:

Circuit state sensor on channel 1


1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

Bit 0:

Circuit state sensor on channel 0


1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

13-10

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

13.3.3

Enhanced

Feedback interface (PII)


Table 13-5

Enhanced feedback interface

Address
Byte 0

Assignment
Bit 0:

Circuit state sensor on channel 0

Designation on
"IQ-SENSE Opto" FB
Q_CH0

1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

Byte1

Bit 1 to bit 7:
Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 0 by
Teach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT

Bit 0:

Q_CH1

Circuit state sensor on channel 1


1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

Byte 2

Bit 1 to Bit 7:
Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 1 by
Teach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT

Bit 0:

Q_CH2

Circuit state sensor on channel 2


1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

Byte 3

Bit 1 to Bit 7:
Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 2 by
Teach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT

Bit 0:

Q_CH3

Circuit state sensor on channel 3


1: Object detected
0: Object not detected

Bit 1 to Bit 7:
Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 3 by
Teach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT

*: The current sensitivity/distance value is entered:


- After teach-in is completed on the sensor
- After teach-in is completed via the "IQ-SENSE Opto"

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13-11

Analog electronic modules


13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

Control interface (PIQ)


Table 13-6

Enhanced control interface

Address
Byte 0

Assignment
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 0
Bit 0:
1: Transfer sensitivity/distance value to the sensor on
channel 2 (using rising edge)
0: deactivated

Bit 1 to 7:
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 0: 1 to 126
(sensor-dependent)

Teach-in on the sensor on channel 0


Bit 0:
1: Start teach-in on the sensor on channel 0 (at the rising
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0
Byte1

Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 1


Bit 0:
1: Transfer sensitivity/distance value to the sensor on
channel 2 (using rising edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7:
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 1: 1 to 126
(sensor-dependent)
Teach-in on the sensor on channel 1
Bit 0:
1: Start teach-in on the sensor on channel 1 (at the rising
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0

Byte 2

Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 2


Bit 0:
1: Transfer sensitivity/distance value to the sensor on
channel 2 (using rising edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7:
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 2: 1 to 126
(sensor-dependent)
Teach-in on channel 2
Bit 0:
1: Start teach-in on the sensor on channel 2 (at the rising
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0

13-12

Designation on
"IQ-SENSE Opto" FB
WR_TEACH_VAL

TEACH_VAL_IN

START_TEACH

WR_TEACH_VAL

TEACH_VAL_IN

START_TEACH

WR_TEACH_VAL

TEACH_VAL_IN

START_TEACH

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic modules


13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)
Address
Byte 3

Assignment
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 3
Bit 0:
1: Transfer sensitivity/distance value to the sensor on
channel 2 (using rising edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7:
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 3: 1 to 126
(sensor-dependent)
Teach-in on the sensor on channel 3
Bit 0:
1: Start teach-in on the sensor on channel 3 (at the rising
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0

Designation on
"IQ-SENSE Opto" FB
WR_TEACH_VAL

TEACH_VAL_IN

START_TEACH

Principle of operation: Specifying a sensitivity/distance value (IntelliTeach)

6WDQGDUGPRGH
YDOLGVHQVLWLYLW\
GLVWDQFHYDOXH

3UHVHWVHQVLWLYLW\GLVWDQFH
YDOXH WR
DWELWWRLQWKH3,4

6HQVLWLYLW\GLVWDQFHYDOXH
WUDQVIHUUHGWRVHQVRUE\ULVLQJ
HGJHDWELWLQWKH3,4

Figure 13-4

Principle of operation: Specifying a sensitivity/distance value (IntelliTeach)

Distributed I/O System ET200S


Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

13-13

Analog electronic modules


13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

Principle of operation: Teach-in

1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ

6HWYDOXHDWELWWRLQ
3,4

6WDUW7HDFKLQE\
ULVLQJHGJHDW
ELWLQWKH3,4

7HDFKLQLVH[HFXWHG

7HDFKLQHQGHG
E\IDOOLQJ